islamic republic of pakistan national highway authority
TRANSCRIPT
ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF PAKISTANNATIONAL HIGHWAY AUTHORITY
Asian Development Bank
National Motorway M-4Shorkot - Khanewal Section Project
(ADB/rCB/M4)
BID DOCUMENT(Particular Specifications (Building Works)
Construction of National Motorway M-4Shorkot - Khanewal Section Project
ICB-M4-lllB: Dinpur - Shamkot (Khanewal) Section (34.28 Km)(Km 150+200 to Km 184+487)
On Post Qualification Basis(Sing/e-Sfage Two E nv el o p e)
(voLUME-u(B)
National Highway Authority28-Mauve Area, G-9/1, lslamabad
0092-51 -90327 27, F ax 0092-51 -926041 ITel:
oTABLE OF CONTENTS
a
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL
01000010900 ' t3100'1340015200't530
DtvtstoN2.stTEwoRK
02100
0220002300
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
031000320003300
DIVISION 4. CONCRETE
'040000410004200
plyElorlj
o DIVISION 9 - FINISHING
0s200095100970009900
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
PLASTER AND STUCCOSUSPENDED CEILINGFLOOR AND WALL FINISHINGPAINT AND COATING
DIVISION 1O - SPECIALTIES
1O1OO FIBRE GLASS WORKS
DIVISION 11 _ EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
' DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEM
DIVISION ,I5 - MECHANICAL
1510015200154001544015500156001570015990
160.10
16r)2r)a i;o3o
16040160501606016070160801609016 ' t00'161 10
16129
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEI\,1VALVESPLUIV]BING FIXTURES & EOUIPI\JIENTPLUMBING PUMPSSOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMSEWEMGE SYSTEIVIBORING / DRILLING & INSTALLATION OF WELLSTESTING OF WATER TANKS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEI\,1S.SWITCH, SOCKET FITTING & ACCESSORIES.WIRE AND CABLE.CONDUITS AND PIPESLIGHTING FIXTURES.I\,4ISC ITEMS FANS ETC,LOW VOLTAGE (LV) DISTRIBUTION.TELEPHONE SYSTEI\,1.EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION.WIRING AND SMALL POWER.AC DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN ELECTRICGENSET ANDALLIED EQUIP[4ENTS.WATER PUMPS.
oTable ofContent
1.
sEcTtoN _ 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
1.1 The General Conditions of Contract and speclal conditions of contractshall form an integral part of these General Requirements.
1 ,2
1 .3
1 .4
1 .7
' t .5
1 .6
The Contractor shall notify all sub-contractors of the provisions of theSoecial and General conditions of Contract and the GeneralReouirements of this Specification.
The arrangement and divisions of these Specifications is not to beconstrued establishing the limits of responsibility of sub-trades.
The Contractor is responsible for delineating the scope of sub-contractsand for coordinating all the works.
All works shall be carried out in accordance with the followlngspecifications, supplemented by detailed epecifications contained in thefollowing sections. Any inconsistencies or ambiguities shall be brought tothe notice of the Engjneer for his clariflcation/ decision. Decision anddirection of the Engineer, in all such cases, shall be tinal and binding.
The Contractor shall make himself thoroughly familiar with the siteconditions foresee any and all problems likely to be encountered duringexecution of the wo*s, and shall be able and ready to solve themeffectively. Proposals for solutions to the problems shall be submifted tothe Engineer for approval before proceeding with the work.
The B.O.Q, Tender Drawings, Specifications are to be read in conjunctionand shall be mutually explanatory. In case of any conflict the order ofpreference shall be as under contract Documents.
CODES. STANDARDS. CERTIFICATES
3.1 The Contractor shall supply and have at his site office:a3.1.1 copies of all latest editions of codes and standards referred to
these Specifications or equivalent codes and standardsapproved by the Engineer.
3. 1 .2 Catalogues and published recommendations form manufacturerssupplying products and materials for the project.
3.2 The Contractor shallthe Engineer for allrequirements of aSpecifications.
3. MANUFACTURERRECOMMENDATIONS
provide manufacturer's or suppliefs certificates toproducts and materials which must meet the
speciflc code of standard as state in these
Installation of manufactured items shali be inrecommended by the manufacturer or as approved
accordance with
01000-l
neer.procedures
t
4. UNITS OF MEASUREMENTS
The Sl System of Units shall be used throughout the Project.
PLANT, EOUIPMENT AND TOOLS
The Contractor shall provide at his cost modern plant, equipment and tools,adequate and befitting to the nature, magnitude and size of this Contract, in strictcompliance with the requirements of the General Conditions of Contract.
STORAGE & HANDLING FACILITIES
The Employer will provide the necessary space if available with him, forconstructional activities including batching plant, laboratory, workshop, storage ofplant, equipment and materials and for Contractor's temporary office/camp,during the currency of the Contract. lf the space is not available with theEmployer then the contractor shall arrange these facilities without additional costto the Employer.
TEST LABORATORY TESTING AND TESTING REPORT
7.1 Testing, except as otherwise specified hereln, shall be performed bytesting agency approved by the Engineer and at no extra cost to theEmployer. The Contractor shall bear the Cost of such Testing. TheEngineer may require all testing to be carried out under his supervisiononly.
7.2 The quality control testing shall be performed by the Contractor'scompelent personnel in accordance with a site testing and quality controlprogram to be established by the Contractor and approved by theEngineer.
The Contractor shall keep a complete record of ail quality tests performedon site.
All quality control and tests shall be carried out in accordance withaoolicable standards and cgdes.
7.3 The Contractor, after the approval by the Engineer for the source of thecement and steel, shall make available at the site sufficient stock of thematerials in advance in order to allow sample testing to prove qualitybefore they are used.
7.4 The Contractor shall furnish to Engineer's Representative four certifiedtrue cooies of reports of the tests of all materials used in the manufactureand fabrication of all equipments and material. The result of these testsshall be in such form as to show complianoe with the applicablespecifications, standards and codes for the material used.
CONSTRUCTION & CHECKING AT SITE
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in due time for approval anddiscussion, his proposals and plans as to the method and procedure to beadoDted for the execution of permanent works involved.
o
t
8.
a
oThe submitting ofthese suggestions and arrangements, and the approval thereo{ _,-::i- \Ry the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities and Ouf,g" ,, \\\nder the Contract.
,\ 46
, )/ olooo-2
\__/
8 .1 Site
Within the Project area limits as defined on the Drawings, the Contractorshall carry out and perform the construction works. The Contractor withprior approval of the Engineer will be permifted to construct temporaryroad-way camps, buildings and temporary works which he may require forthe execution of the work. lf the Contractor wishes to use other land forcamps he shall pay all rentals or other costs connected therewith.
BAR.BENDING SCHEDULE
Bar (Reinforcement bars) bending schedule of all drawings shall be prepared bythe Contractor and submifted in triplicate to the Engineer for approval, as per thesubmittal procedure described in the relevant section of these specifications.
AS BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall, at all times, keep on site a separate set of prints on whichshall be noted neatly, accurately and promptly as the work progresses allsignificant changes between the work shown on the drawings and that which isactually constructed.
At the completion of the works, the Contractor shall at his expense, supply theEngineerwith reproducible copies of these drawings.
PROTECTION OF THE WORKS
The Contractor shall whenever necessary cover up and protect the works fromweather and damage by his own or other workmen performing subsequentoperation. He shall provide all necessary dust sheets, barriers and guard railsand olear away the same at completion.
RESTORATION AND CLEANING
Upon completion of the works the Contractor shall restore all items covered bythe Contract to the satisfaclion of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall do regular cleaning and clean away all rubbish and excessmaterials that may accumulate from time to time on completion and beforehanding over. Upon completion of the works he shall obliterale all signs oftemporary construction facilities such as work areas, structures, toundations oftemporary structures, stock piles of excess or waste materials, or avestiges of constructign, as directed by the Engineer.
Trash shall be removed daily to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.
QUALITY OF MATERIAL
13.1 All materials and suoplies furnished under the Contract Documbe new and of standard first grade quality and of best workmanshjp anddesign. No inferior or low grade materials supplies or articles will be eitherapproved or accepted and all work of construction shall be made in neat,first class and workmanlike manner.
13.2 Pt'tot to procurement, the Contractor shallapproval, the name of the manufacturers ofwhich he contemplates incorporating in the
o
10.
11 .
12.
13 .
furnish to Engineerall equipment and m
01000-3
Works, samples of
a shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Equipment, materialsupplied and articles insialled or used without the Engineer's approvalshall be at the risk of subsequent rejection.
INSPECTION
All equipment and materials furnished under these specifications and all workperformed in connection therewith will be subjected to rigid inspection by theEngineer. The contractor is not relieved of his responsibility for meeting therequirements of the Contract.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
The contractor shall provide, erect or install, maintain alter as necessary andremove on completion or when directed by the Engineer all such temporaryfdcilities and services, not required by the Client, Including access roads asdescribed hereinafter and/or in the Contract Dooument and/or Instructed andapproved by the Engineer.
CO.ORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to co-ordinate and keep-up goodrelations with other contractors employed on site by the Employer.
NOTIFICATION TO ENGINEER AND DAILY ACTIVITY REPORT
The Engineer shall be notified by effective Receipt of Requisition slip in approvedformat in writing of the nature and location of the Works which the .Contractorintends to perform the next day so as to enable necessary inspection andmeasurement to be carried out. The Engineer may, if necessary, direct thecontractor that longer duration notice be given for certain operations.
The Contractor's Site Office shall also prepare and submit to the Enginee.'s SiteOffice 6 copies of a Daily Activity Report summarizing the main activities to beundertaken each day, noting special activities such as tests, alignment checks,etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for expediting the delivery of all materialand equipment to be provided by him and his sub-contractors.
ACCIDENT PREVENTION, PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall comply and enforce compliance by all his sub- contractorswith the highest siandards of safety and accident prevention in accordance withinternational standards and in compliance with all applicable laws, ordinancesand statutory provisions.
All requisite barriers, fences, warning signs, lights and other safety precautions,as required for the protection of persons and property on or adjacent to the siteshall be provided at the Contractor's cost.
All false work, scaffolding and hand rails shall be well constructed and secured atall times, be maintained in a clean and legible condition, to the satisfaction of the
14.
16 .a
17 .
18.
Engineer.
01000-4
,19.
20.
SURVEY INSTRUMENT
The Contractor shall maintain on site the requisite surveying instruments inperfect working conditions to enable the Engineer to check levels and lines of thework at all times.
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
As soon as work commences on Sites, the Contractor shall provide photographs(at least'10 to '12) of the works from positions (angles) to be selected by theEngineer. Each photographic print shall not be less than 297 mm x 2'10 mm andshall bear a printed description, a serial number and the date when taken.
The negatives of all photographs. shall be held at the Contractols Site Office,numbered and handed over to the Employer at the completion of the Contract.
The Contractor shall also provide fromEngineer, further photographs of thespecific events.
time to time as and when required by theContract works to record or illustrate
a21.
A.
APPROVED MANUFACTURER'S LIST
Civil Workslvlaterial / Articles Name of lVanuf acturers/BrandsL
2.
etc.3 .4.
Steel
Aluminum Works (Aluminum doors &Windows
Paints/DistemperLocks/Hardware
Water Supply / Sanltary Fittings
Fazal, ltehad, N4ughal, Pak Steel, CitySteel.Alcop, Alhali, Aluminum Co, PakistanCables. ChawlaRobialac Berger, lCl (Dulux),Alpha, Babar, SN4C
B.
Material I Articles Name of Manufacturers/Brands
I
1. Bib Cock, Mixer, Stop Cock etc2. WC (lndian) - ORISSA3. WC English4. Flushing Cisterns (Plastic)5. Flushing Cistern (Ceramic)6. Bottle Trap7. G.l Pipe8. PVC, UPVC, HDPE P|PE
9. PPRC Pipe'10. Cast lron Spun Pipe.
1'1. Gate valve12. Stainless Sinks13. Ceramic Tiles
Manga, Master, SonexLC.L., Fort & Toyo, PortaLC.L., Fort & Toyo, Portal\4aster, Baig, Super Asia, SonexlCL, Fort, Sonexl\,4aster, Faisal, Sonex lvlangallL (lvledium), victory (Medium).Shavyl, Galco, Beta, Builtec, RAK, Dadex,Polo, BBJGalco, Beta, FIRAT (Turkish), RAK ThermC.l. Engineering Corp: Teepu, Alpine, NPC& cl\,4EAnwar AsiaAtlas, Super AsiaMaster, Shabbir (Stile), Forte, Emco.
O01000-5
Electrification Worksa Material/ Arlicles Name of Manufacturers/Brands1 .2.3.
Wires and CablesTelephone CablesCircuit Breakersi) Single Phaseii) Three Phase i/c Change over
4. Switches and sockets.5. PVC Conduit pipe
6. PVC Duct channel7. Lights (Fittings/Fixtures)
i) Flourescent Tube lights, puttyFitting office Lights
ii) Garden lights, steel lights &Ceiling Mounted lights etc.
8: HT/LT main distribution panel.
L P.C. pole /structure
Pakistan Cables, Newage, AGE, universalSiemens, Pakistan Cables
Tera Saki, ABB, lvlerlin GerinTera Saki, ABB, Medin GerinSwitch Kid, Bosch, Clipsal, LegrandShavyl, Galco, Beta, Builtec, Dadex, MKTherm, PoloDura, Adamjee
Phil ips, Paklight, and Sunlight
Philips, Sunlight
Siemens, PEL, ECS, PEMPAK, Electrech,Electrol\4ech, TechmanAs per WAPDA Specifications
Asia, N4illat, Climax, GFC, Younas, PakPak, Younas, GFC
| 10. Fansi) Ceiling
ExhausVBracket
D. Gas Work.
iD
Material / Ariicles Name of lvla n ufacturers/Bra nds
a
1. Cooking Range2. Gas Room, Heaters3. Water heater (geyser)4. Chulahas.5. c.l Pipe6. Water cooler7. Air Conditioners
i) Windowsii) Split
8. Pumping Seti ) Up to5Hpii) Above 5 Hp
9. Diesel Generator
Sky Flame, NASGAS, CoronaNas gas, Firex, Singer, Rinnai, CannonSinger, NASGAS, ambassadorMarshal, NasgasllL (Medium), Victory (lMedium)Meco, Comfort
PEL, Climax, General Agnause,Sabro, Daikin, Orient, Kenwood, PEL
Golden, l\4ecoKSB, with Siemens Motors, Alama Sumotoitaly.PEL, CUI\4I\,4INS
22. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No measurement and payment will be madescope of this section of soecifications relatedQuantities. The cost, thereof, shall be deemedquoted by the tenderer.
work involved within therelevant items of Bill ofbeen included in the bid
for theto the
to have
a01000-6
sEcTtoN - 01090
REFERENCED STANDARDS
o
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Referenced Standards: Specifications or standards referenced herein shall bethe copies or editions current on the date of Advertisement for Bids. ln case of a
. conflict between the referenced specifications or standards, the one having themore stringent requirements shall govern.
ln the absence of other Standards being required by the Contraot Documents, allwork and materials shall meet the requirement of the Uniform Building Code ofthe United States, and/or applicable American Society for Testing Materials(ASTM) Specifications; and the latest American Concrete Institute lvlanual ofConcrete Practice and American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Manualrelevant to the Works, except in cases where the National Building Code ofPakistan requires a higher standard, in such cases the Pakistani Code shallgovern. Where the abbreviations listed below are used, it refers to the latestcode, standards. or publication of the organizations.
Should the contractor, at any time and for any specific reasons, wish to deviatefrom the above standards or desires to use materials or equipment other thanthose provided for by the above standards, than he shall state the exact nature ofthe change giving the reasons for making the change and shall submit completespecifications of the materials and descriptions of the equipment for theEngineer's approval, whose declsions shall be conclusive and binding upon thecontraclor.
Abbreviations:
AASHTO
ACIAIEE
AISCAISIANSI
ASAASCEASHRAE
ASMEASTI\,4
AWPBAWS
BSIBSICPCRSIO
Aluminum AssociationArchitectural Aluminum l\.4anufacturers AssociationAmerican Association of State Highway and TransportationOfficialsAmerican Concrete lnstituteAmerican Institute of Electrical Engineers (NowAcoustical and Insulating lvlaterials AssociationAmerican Institute of Steel ConstructionAmerican lron and Steel lnstituteAmerican National Standard InstituteAmerican Public Transil AssociationAmerican Public Works AssociationAmerican Standard AssociationAmerican Society of Civil Engineers
IEEE)
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning EngineersAmerican Society of Mechanical EngineersAmerican Society for Testing and lvlaterialsAmerican Wood Preservers AssociatiorlAmerican Wood Preseryers BureauAmerican Welding SocietyAmerican Water Works AssociationBritish Standards InstituteBritish Standard Institute Code ol PracticeConcrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
01090-1
I FMFS
IPCEAt\,fl1NMIVII\,1NBFUNBSNECNEMANFPANSFOSHA
PCAP(:I
PSISDISJISIMACNA
SSPCUBCUPCUL
Commercial StandardFactory l\4utual Engineering and ResearchFederalStandardInstitute of Electrical and Electronic EngineersInsulated Power Cable Engineers Associationlvlilltary Standardization DocumentsNational Association of Architectural Metal ManufacturersNational Board of Fire UnderwritersNational Bureau of StandardsNational Electrical CodeNational Electrical l\4anufacturers AssociationNational Fire Protection AssociationNational Science FoundationU,9. Dept. of Labor, Occupational Safety and l'lealthAssociationPortland Cement AssociationPre-stressed Concrete lnstitutePakistan Standard lnstituteSteel Decks InstituteSteel Joists InstituteSheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' NationalAsgociationStructural Steel Painting CouncilUniforn Building CodeUniform Plumbing CodeUnderwrite/s Laboratories, Inc.
I
a
I01090-2
o
sEcTtoN - 01310
WORKS PROGRAM
1.
7.
I. SCOPE
A. lmmediately after contract award and prior to pre-@nstruction meeting, prepareand submit to Engineer, for review, a proposed construction schedule in the formof a network plan utilizlng the Critical Path Method (CPM) and arrow diagram.Utilize Primavera or Suretrack software. DVD at same time as submittal of allhard copy data indicating equivalent revision level of schedule.
Contractor shall provide personn6l, skilled in the time and cosl applicationof network techniques for construction projects or a scheduling consultantto prepare the network plan and arrow diagram at his own cost.
In the arrow diagram, show initial start work dates and duration for eachmajor and minor construction stage, trade operation or work sequenceand their dependency relationships. Attach a computer producedconstruction schedule showing the required information for each activlty.ldentify each by related specification section number, name of operationor trade.
ldentify elements of works program which Contractor. Sub-Contractorsand/or Suppliers determine to be critical to orderly progression of workand to sequence of construction.
Determine interrelations of other trades or construction sequencesaffecting critical work element.
In the anow diagram, show not anly the activities for actual constructionwork for each trade category of the projeci, but also such activities as theContractor's work of submittal of shop drawings, equipment schedules,coordination drawings, templates, {abrication, delivery and the like, andEngineer review and approval of shop drawings.
Group activities related to a specific physical area of the project on thediagram for ease of understanding and simplification. Show activityduration (i.e., the single best estimate, considering the scope of theactivity, and the resources planned for the activity) on each activity on thedragram.
Include a cost estimate for each activity, based on and compatible withthe Bill of Quantities. The cost of activities cumulatively shall equal thetotal Contract cost.
Failure to include any element of work required for the performance ofthis Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing workrequired within any appljc€ble completion date, nohwithstanding theEngineer approval of arrow diagrams. To the extent that the arrowdiagram or any revised arrow diagram shows anything not jointly agreedupon or fails to show anything jointly agreed upon, it shall not be deemedto have been approved by the Engineer.
2.
3.
6 .
oB. Additional Datra Required: Contractor will be informed oy Engineer ay';f(
construction meeting ofadditional data required, ifany. t:{ .'
. \-r\01310- l \
AGREEMENT ON FINAL WORK PROGRAM
Not Used
WORK PROGRAM
General: Furnish with the arrow diagram, and each revision thereof, a computerproduced work program showing the following data for each activity:
1. Preceding and following event numbers.
2. Activitydescription.
3. Estimated duration of activilies.
4. Earliest start date.
5. Earliest finish date.
6 Pr n^c6.1 .r.rt .l.ra
7. Proposed finish date.
8. Latest start date (required start).
L Latest finish date (required start).
'10. Slack or f loat in calendar days.
11. Cost estimate value of activity.
12. Percentage of activity completed.
13. Contractofs earnings based on portion of activity completed.
Not Used
INITIAL IN-PUT DATA AND UPDATE
Provide to Engineer initial in-put data and monthly update of same relating toactual work activities accomplished for purpose of forecasting future workactivities and durations.
At jobsite progress meetings, present copies of the schedule and ContractPayment Report and other required data accurately filled in and completed priorto the meeting. Job progress will be reviewed to verify:
1. Remaining duration, required to complete each activity started, orscheduled to start, but not completed.
Percentage for completed and partially completed activities.
ldentification of any problems, including cunent, unresoNeoanticipated delay factors and impact on other aqlyisteps are being taken or planned.
o
t
4.I
2.
3.
O01310-2
and whatano/or
4. lvlonthly progress and recommend ways to improve schedule or anticipatedelays and/or safety problems.
C. After completion of the jobsite review and the Engineer review and acceptance ofentries, submit an updated computer produced calendar dated schedule to theEngineer within five days. Also inform and update Sub-Contractors and Suppliersof the revisions to the construction schedule.
FAILURE TO SUBMIT NETWORK ANALYSIS
A. Failure of the Contraitor to submit the netvvork analysis or any required revisionsthereto within the time limits stated, shall be sufficient cause for certification thatthe Contractor is not performing the Work required by this Section, or that theContractor's personnel directly responsible for planning, scheduling, andmaintaining progress of the Work are not performing their work in a proper andskillful manner, or both. The Engineer may withhold approval of the Contractor'sinvoices for progress payment until such delinquent submittal is made.
01310-3
o sEcTtoN - 0,t340
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
SCOPE
Submit shop drawings, calculations, setting drawings, manufactureas catalogcuts, product data, diagrams, schematics, wiring diagrams, equipment andmaterials lists and schedules, coordination drawings and samples as necessaryto satisfy requirements specified in various Sections throughout thesespecifications or elsewhere in Contract Documents.
Prepare and process specific submittals in accordance with the administrativeand procedural requirements specrfred herein.
DATES FOR SUBMISSION AND REVIEW
A. Designate in the Construction Schedule, or program dates for submissionand dates that reviewed shop drawings, product data and samples will beneeded, in order to maintain the project schedule.
SHOP DRAWINGS SAMPLES, PRODUCT DATA, ETC. .
A. Wherever it is specified in any Section of the specifications that shopdrawings, product data and samples etc. are required, submit such datafor review as followsl
1. Shop Drawings: Submit one reproducible, reverse transparenc,(sepia or equivalent together with two prints to be retained by theEngineer for each required shop drawing complying with thefollowing:
a. ldentify each drawing with the following informationplaced on each drawing:
(1) Project name and Owner's Project number.(2) Date drawing prepared.(3) Name and address of Contractor.(4) Name and address of Subcontractor.(5) Name of manufacturer.(6) Number and title of appropriate Specifications
Section.(7) Drawing number and detail references, as
appropriate.
b. Leave a blank space six inches wide by four inches high inthe lower right corner of the first sheet of the shopdrawings for the Engineer's shop drawing review stamp.
1 .
B.
2.
2. Product Data: Submit four (4) copiesdata sheel where reproduction cancopy process.
of each catalog cut or productbe accomplished by a direct
3. Samples: Unless otherwise specjfied submit (3) samdirected by the Engineer or specifispecifications.
01340-1
for i
B. Attach a copy of the Contractor's transmittal letter or form to eachrequired shop drawing, manufacturer's catalog cut or other product data.When submitting reverse transparencies, provide four (4) copies of thetransmittal forms, one to accompany each such submittal.
4. SUBMITTALIDENTIFICATION
Submit only one item or system per letter of transmittal properly identifiedto include the appropriate specification section and paragraphs.
When catalogs, product data, diagrams or charts are submifted with morethan one type qf product manufactured, identify the particular item,including options, that is intended for use in that phase of work.
E.
C. ldentify re-submiftal with original shop drawing number and the lefter A,B, etc. according with re-submiftal order, and direct specific attention torevisions and corrections made, other than those requested on previoussubmissions.
D. ldentify details by reference to sheet andDrawings and to Specifications Section.
or schedule shown on
Manufacturer's standards, schematic drawings and
1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is notaDolicable to work.
2. Suoolement standard information tospecifically applicable to Work.
SUBMITTAL COMPLETENESS
PREPARATION
7 .
c.D,
Submit catalog sheets, product data, shop drawings and where specified,submit calculations, material samples, color chips or charts, test data,warranties and guarantees all at same time for each item.
Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models
Show performance characteristics and capaoities.
Show dimensions and clearances required.
Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND BAR BENDING DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings, including drawings, diagrams, bar bendingschedules and performance charts, as reproducible transparencies andblue line prints. So as to cause no delay in the works.
B. Print and distribute copies of the transparencies reviewed and stampedby the Engineer. Submit as multiple copjes shop drawing material whichcannot be submitted in sepia or other transparent form. Submit samenumber of cooies as reouired for final distribution of reviewed submittals.
C. ln shop drawings for electrical equipment, includediagrams, installation drawjngs showing the location
01340-2
conduits, equipment and cable runs, outline drawing of major equipmentwith overall and other critical dimensions, and complete lists of equipmentand fixtures, accompanied by catalogs, catalog cuts, data sheets, andother literature describing the equipment proposed {or use. Includecomplete specifications, required test data, sizes and numbers ofconductors, cables and conduits.
PRODUCT DATA
A. Collect product data into a single submittal for each element ofconstruction or system. lnclude standafd printed information such asmanufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard colorcharts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagramsand performance curves. Where produot data must be specially preparedbecause standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as ShopDrawings.
Submil product data fully edited and tailored to the particularreouirements of the Work.
Fill in all blanks, provide supplementary information required by theSpecifications, circle or underline choices, cross out non pertinent orconf licting information.
Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printedproduct data includes information on sever€ll products, some of which arenot required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Includethe following information:
'1. Manufacturefsprintedrecommendations2. Compliance with recognized trade association standards3. . Compliance with recognized testing agency standards4. Application oftesting agency labels and seals5. Notation ofdimensions verified byfield measurement6. Notation of coordination reouirements
Do not submit product data untjl compliance with requirements of theContract Documents has been confirmed.
aB.
c.
E.
F. Manufacturer's catalogue sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules,performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive literatureshall be clearly marked to identify pertinent materials products or models.Dimensions and required clearance shall be indicated.
SAMPLES
A Samples shall be furnished by the Contractor so as not to delayfabrication, allowing the Engineer reasonable time for consideration of thesample submitted.
B. The Engineer shall check and approve samplesconformance with the design concept of the Works andwith the information given in the Contract Documents. Allaccordance with approved samples.
wjth only forfor compliance
work shall be in
Each sample shall be properly labeled with thematerial, manufacturer's name, name of the
name and quality
01340-3
project, the
10.
name and the date of submission, and the SDecifications Article numberto which the sample refers.
D The manufacturer's installation directlons shall be Drovided with eachsample. The Contractor shall pay all transportation costs and deliversamples to the Engineels office, Site or testing laboratory as directed byths Engineer.
E Samples shall be of adequate size to permit proper evaluation of thematerial by the Engineer. Where variations in colour, texture, dimensionsor other characteristics are to be expected, the Contractor shall submitsamples showing the maximum range of variation, Materials exceedingthe range of variation of the approved samples shall not be used on theWork.
F In order to permit coordinated selection of colours and finishes, theContractor shall deliver samples of all items of interior finish to theEngineer at one time. Samples of such materials will not be approveduntil all related samoles have been submitted.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Review shop drawings, catalog cuts, product data and samples prior tosubmission. Determine and verify:
1. Field measurements.2. Field constructidn criteria.3. Catalog numbers and similar data.4. ConformancewithSpecifications.5. Conformance with drawings and details.
Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work and of contractDocuments. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance ofperformance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
Notify the Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations insubmittals from requirements of Contract Documents, but do not use thesubmittal process as a means for substituting products.
Do not begin fabrication or Work which requires submittals until afterreceipt of submiftals carrying favorable action by the Engineer.
Where adjoining work requires shop drawings the Contractor shallprepare and submit composite shop drawings which shall show anddefine the work under all affected trades. lf the Contractor Installs workbefore coordinating with other trades so as to case interferenae with workof those trades, he shall make changes necessary to correct theconditions without extra cost to the Employer.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elementsof the Work so that processing will not be delayed by the need to reviewsubmittals concurrently for coordination. The Architect/Engineer reservesthe right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with othersubmittals until related submittals are received.
Submit shop drawings (bar bending drawings) in sufficient time toadequate study. discussion and any necessary coffectionbeginning the Wod( they c,over. No extension of Contract time
B.
D,
c.
E
F.
01340-4
authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to theArchitecvEngineer sufficiently in advance of the Work to permitprocessing.
Prior to sending in any submittals required by the Contract, includingthose of Subcontractors and suppliers, review and check eachsubmission for compliance with the Contract requirements and forcoordination of the Work as it affects other trades, and stamp and signapproval on each submittal. By approving and submitting each submittal,the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified allfield measurements, field construction criteria, mat€rials, catalog numbersand similar data. or will do so, and that he has checked and coordinatedeach submittal with the requirements of the Work and of the ContractDocuments..
Review, Correction and Final Approva! by Engineer: After reviewing theEngineer's comments, make any corrections as appropriate, and resubmitthe .corrected submittals until no further comment is made by theEngtneer.
No changes shall be made by the contractor in the resubmitted shopdrawings in excess of the corections spelled out by the Engineer and in aseparate note on the shop drawings.
Endorse by stamp with date of final approval of the submittal after allreviews by the ArchitecvEngineer have been made and all of theArchitect/Engineer's comments have been incorporated or otherwisesatisfactorily acted upon.
Commence no portion of the Work requiring a submittal until the submittalhas Contractor's final approval stamp and endorsement.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to submit the shop drawingson a schedule that allows reasonable time for checking and approval andsubsequent fabrication. Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time forchecking, correcting, and rechecking will not justify a delay in time forcomDletion ofwork.
11 . ENGINEER'S REVIEW
K,
t\4.
c
The Engineer will review submittals only for conformance with the designconcept of the Project, compliance with the provision of the ContractDocument and with the information given in the Contract Documents.
For each submittalfor review, allow 10 worKing days or as agreed by theEngineer excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
The Enginee/s approval relating to a separate item will not indicateapproval of an assembly in which the item functions.
The Enginee/s approval relating to submittals will not relieve theContractorfrom responsibility for any deviation.
The Enginee/s approval relating to submittials will not relieve th'e \Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Coniractor's ',
(or his subconlractor's) preparation of the submittals. , r .. .ff. I I
or34o-s \g/t
D.
OF.
K
The Engineer will note that he has reviewed each submittal and will returnthe submittal to the Contractor together with notes pertaining to designconcept ofthe Project and information given in the Contract Documents.
Prior to Engineer's approval on required submittals, any Wo* done ormaterials ordered for the Work involved will be at the Contractofs risk.
lf both Shop Drawings and samples are required for the same item, theEngineer may require both to be submitted before approving either.
No acceptanco or approval of any Shop Drawings, Product data orsample, or any indication or request by the Engineer on any ShopDrawings shall constitute an authorizalion for any increase in the contractSum.
No work in the shop shall be started and no material or equlplnentordered until the Engineer has approved the shop drawings.
I
a01340-6
IsEcTloN - 01520
CONTRACTOR'S CAMP AND FACILITIES
SCOPE
The work to be done under this section consists of construction, erection,Installation and maintenance of the Contractor's Project Site Offices or maincamp and the Contractor's sub-camps or temporary camps, if any, and shallinclude all offices, shops, warehouses, and othef operational buildings; allhousing and related iacilities including accommodations for the Contractor'sDersonnet.
The location of the Contractor's camps, including all buildings, utilities and'facilities thereof, and of the oamps or establishments of all persons/parties in thevicinity operating or associated with the Contractor shall be subiectto approval ofthe Engineer.
The work to be done under this item will terminate upon the actual CompletionDate. However, if directed by the Engineer or the Employer, the Contractor shallcontinue such work to the extent required by the Contractor's personnel duringthe period of maintenance. No compensation shall be paid for the continuedoperation and maintenance of the Contractor's Camps during the period ofmatntenance.
Upon completion of the Works, or at such time within the period of maintenanceas directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove all buildings utilities andother facilities from the Site and restore all camp areas to a neat and cleancondition.
The construction, operation and maintenance of all camps of the Contractor shallcomply with all applicable provisions of current Pakistan Labor Camp Rules.
Adequately equipped and properly staffed portable first aid stations ordispensaries shall be provided by the Contractor at camps and other strategiclocations to administer first aid treatment at any lime required and free of chargeto all persons on the Site, including employees of the Engineer and theEmployer.
PAYMENT OF WORK
No payment shall be made for the work involved within the scope of this sectionof Specifications unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bills of Quantities orhefetn.
The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the bid quoted by thetenderer and quoted rates of other items of the Bills of Quantities.
1 .
2 .
01520- l
t
1 .
2.
4
sEcTloN - 01530
STAKE-OUT & PRE WORK SURVEY
SCOPE
Under this item the Contractor shall make the stakeout & pre work survey lorconstruction purposes with competently qualified men, and surveyors jointlyalong with Employer's representative and in the presence of Engineer'srepresentative or his designated staff. The work shall proceed immediately uponthe award of the contract and shall be expeditiously progressed to completion ina manner and at a rate satisfactory to the Engineer. The Contractor shall keepthe Engineer fully informed as to the progress of the stakeout & pre work surve,.The scope of this section of specifications is covered by detailed specificationsas laid down herein.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
All instruments, equipment, stakes survey monuments, bench mark and othermaterial necessary to perform all work shall be provided by the Contractor.These instruments and equipments and shall be available to Engineer at all timesfor the purpose of checking the work ofthe contractor.
All & survey monuments stakes used shall be of a type approved by theEngineer, clearly and permanently marked so as to be legible at times. lt shall bethe Contractor's responsibility to maintain these stakes in the proper position andlocation at all times. Any existing stakes or makers defining property lines andsurvey monuments which may be disturbed during construction shall be properlytied into fixed reference point before being disturbed and accurately reset in theirproper position upon completion of the work.
SUBMITTALS
Submit all survey data, computations, field notes, drawings, Topo maps, contourmaps, sections and all other survey records necessary to accomplish the work.
EXECUTION
The Contractor shall trim trees, bushes and other interfering objects, notconsistent with the plan, from survey lines in advance of all survey work to permitaccurate and unimpeded work by his stake-out survey crews and the Engineer'ssurvey crews. The exact position of all work shall be established from controlpoints, which are shown on the plans or modified by the Engineer. Any error,apparent discrepancy in or absence of dala shown or required for accuratelyaccomplishing the stakeout survey shall be referred to the Engineer forinterpretation or furnishing when such is observed or required.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of his work and shallmaintain all reference points, stakes, etc. throughout the llfe of the contract.Damaged, destroyed or inaccessible reference points, bench marks or stakesshail be replaced by the Contractor. Existing or new control points that will be orare destroyed during construction shall be re-established and all reference tiesrecorded thereon shall be furnished to the Engineer. All stakeout survey workshall be referenced to the centerlines shown on the Plans. All computations --.'r.-.necessary to establish the exact position ofthe work from control points shall,be-- -r:r'i\
madeand preserved by the Contractor. All computations, survey notes and gf)br \f , \records necessary to accomplish the work shall be kept nearly
""a .[(e Z\9rl ,l
I ".."". &\/01530- I
available to the Engineer upon request and furnished to the Employer uponContract completion.
The Engineer may check all or any portion of the stakeout and benchmarks forborow pits shall be established by the Contractor.
Reference points, base lines, stakes and benchmarks for borrow pits shall beestablished by the Contractor.
All required righfof-way and easement limits shall be established, staked and... referenced by the Contractor concurrent with the construction stiakeout survey.
The Contractor shall Dlace at least two offset stakes or references at eacn cemerlines station and at such intermediate stations as the Engineer may direct. Fromcomputations and measurements made by the Contractor, these stakes shall beclearly marked with the correct center line, station number, offset and cut or fill soas to permit the establishment of the true center line location during construction,He shall locate and place all out, fill, slope, line grade or other stakes and pointsas the Engineer may direct to be necessary for the proper progress ofthe work.
The Contraclor shall mark all the center lines of the columns after the layout hasbeen checked. He shall make all the center lines on masonry pillars in cement,and shall maintain these pillars as long as desired by the Engineer.
The above mentioned masonry pillars shall be located at a distance where theyare not disturbed by the construction activity and the designation of the centerline as given on the drawings shall be clea y marked on the extemal vertjoal faceof the masonry pillars in non-washable paint. The pillars shall be high enough tobe easily identifiable and low enough to place a theodolite over them.
The Contractor shall be responsible for true and perfect setting out of the sameand for correctness of the positions, levels, dimensions and alignment$ of allparts thereof if at any time any error in this respect shall appear during theprogress of the works. The Contractor shall at his own expense rectify such errorto the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The bench marks shall be made in masonry pillars on which the plinth level of thestructure shall be established. This bench mark shall be established in relation todatum established by the Engineer. The bench marks shall be mentioned at lesttill the finished project is handed over to the Employer or for a durationestablished by the Engineer.
Other shakeouts required during construction shall be supplied and installed bythe Contractor, as directed by the Engineer.
5. PAYMENT OF WORK
No payment shall be made for the work involved within the scope of this sectionof Specifications unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bills of Quantities ornerern.
The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the bid quoted by thetenderer and quoted rates of other items ofthe Bills of Quantities.
01530-2
2.
sEcTtoN - 02200
TERMITE CONTROL TREATMENT
1. SCOPE
The scope of work for anti-termite treatment includes injection of insecticide insides and boftom offoundation trenches, spraying on stockpiled backfill materialand injections of the insecticide in floor sub-grade of the building. The scopealso covers treatment of all wood works with insecticides before installation inDosition.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
All methods of termite protection used herein shall be in accordance with thestandard practices of National Pest Control Association, U.S.A and the BritishWood Preserving Association.
SUBMITTALS
The contractor shall supply samples of all the materials to be used for insecticidecontrolfor approval of the Engineer and testing in accordance with the specifiedstandards. Rejected materials shall be removed from the site immediately. Allsubmittals shall be made as per the requirements of section 0'1340.
MATERIAL
4.1 An emulsible concentrate insecticide shall be used for dilution with water,specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not bepermitted as a diluent. Provide a working solution of the followingchemical element and concentrations.
AGENDA 25EC containing FIPRONILOrApproved Equivalent
4.2 All mixing shall be done at site and mixing proportion of insecticide withwater shall be in accordance with the approved manufacturer'srecommendations and shall be verified by the Engineer.
3.o
4.
4.3 Pure turpentine shall be used for dilutionproportion for application to woodwork.
5. EXECUTION
5.'t APPLICATION
The chemical shall be injected into the ground at various intervals beforg -.concrete has been poured and as per the instructions of the manufacturers a'ad <\shall ensure a proper seal around the structure. A minimum of 3 applicatldhs . /\i.\shall be made 24 hours apart or the number of applications recommended Qylthe [q ]jlapproved manufacturer, which eve is more. The Contractor shall tak!\gll l.'/netessary precautions to protect the laborers from any hard of hazard trom\by'/chemical used
of insecticide, in approved
02200-l
5.2 EXTENT OF APPLICATION
5.1.1 Insecticide solution shall be applied with approved pressurespraying equipment maintaining a pressure of 150 psi to allapplications to, on or in earth.
5.1.2 Soil treatment shall begin after all work of preparation of earthprior to installation of concrete has been done. After application,no additional earth moving or work upon sub grade should bedone. No covering of earth or concrete should be applied oversoil treatment until at least 24 hours after treatment has beenmade.
5.1.3 All excavations, all walls and bottoms of all pits or trenches forfootings of foundations are to be sprayed ad shown in thedrawings. Pesticide shall penetrate to a depth of 1' minimum inporous earth at boftom and 2" to 3" at sides of excavations.
5.1.4 . Stock oiled excavated materials to be used as backfill is to betreated as above. After backfilling to plinth level, the area isagain to be sprayed.
5.1.5 After grading, compaction and leveling and before installation ofany soling under slabs, all such areas are to be sprayed withpesticides, penetrating a minimum of 1" into soil.
5.1.6 Insecticide solution should not be applied during wet weather, orwhen the earth surface is excessively wet. Application should bemade to all areas beneath concrete slabs-gn-grade, includingsidewalks and paving abutting buildings for distance of at least 2m beyond building line. Solution shall be applied in amounts ofnot less than 5 lit./ Sq.M or 5 lit.i 10.76 Sq.ft. of area. lf appliedover gravel or sand fill, application shall not be less than 7 lit./Sq.M or 7lit./10.76 Sq.ft. ofarea. Insecticide shall penetrate to adeoth of'1-inch minimum in poious earth at bottom and 2 inch to3 inch at sides of excavations.
5.'1.7 Sides of foundation excavations, grade beam, and similar areasshall be treated with solution at a rate of 0.5 lit oer souare feetupon inner sides of such excavations, and at all locations whereconcrete stabs for platforms and similar work abut the building,Similar treatment shall be made at all locations whereexpansion joints, control joints, column bases and similar workoccur at or below grade slabs.
5.1.8 In the areas of application signs shall be fixed to show that soiltreatment has been applied. Such signs shall be removed whenareas are covered by other construction.
5.1.9 care shall be exercised to insure that no marks or damageoccurs to the finished structure as a result of the work under thissectlon.
5.1.10 All rough woodwork for the entire project is to be insecticidetreated (before application of solignum). Insecticide shallsprayed on all surfaces of all the wooden work viz.'frames, blocking, furring, planks, boards etc. before install?tion.Spraying is to be done at the site, after delivery and '9{G
02200-2
6.
installation. No spraying shall be necessary after field sawing,jointing or installation ofsuch material.
OUALITY ASSURANCE
6.1 ln addition to the reouirements of these soecifications, comolv withmanufacturer's instructibns and recommendati6ns for the work, ihiludingpreparation of substrata and application.
6.2 A professional operator shall be engaged who shall have license inaccordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soiltreatment solution.
GUARANTEE
The Contractor is to quarantee that the buildinq shall be free from termites (wh[eants). wood bores an-d other pests. which causE damaqe to wood or other oiqanrcmat6rialfor 10 years from th€; date of acceptance of thd building.
ln the event of any damage caused within the guaranteed period, the Contractorshall replace at his own cost such damaged material and finishes affected andsuitably preserve and treat the entire premises with the best method known to thetrade to prevent the spreading of termites.
MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT
GeneralExcept otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will be made for the undermentioned specified works related to the relevant items of the Bills ofQuantities. The cost there of shall be deemed to have been included in theouoted unit rate ofthe respective items ofthe Bills of Quantities.
8.1 .1 Termite control treatment on wooo worKs.
8.1.2 Turpentine & Water required for mixing insecticide solution.
8.1.3 Transpoitation of materialand storage at site.
81.4 Anti-termite treatment on stock piled backfill material.
8.1.5 Termite control treatment to vertical surfaces.
Termite Control Treatment
8.2.1 lvleasurement
Measurement of acceptably completed works of termite control treatmentwill be made on the basis of number of square meire of site area treatedby measuring the hwo dimensions (length & breadth) of treated area. NoseparaXe measurement will be made for the vertical or horizontal surfacesof the foundations/excavated area.
8.
8 .1
4.2
8.2.2 Payment
8.2.2.'l Payment will be made for acceptable measuredtermite control treatment on the basis of unit rate
02200-3
quaper sq
meter of site area (plinth area+2m beyond) treated as quotedthe Bills of Quantities & shall constitute full compensation forthe works related to the item.
8.2.2.2 For "Termite treatment control", the rate is for the unit site area(plinth area+2m beyond, irrespective of the number of story's inthe building) and covers the followings operations:
,
i .
[ .
Treatment of filled up earth.
Treatment of timber to be used.
Treatment of sunounding areasbuilding.
2 Meters of the
Any other operation which the speoialized firm may deemnecessary in context to their guaranteed obligations.
Treatment of bed and sides of excavated foundationrencnes.
Treatment of backfill.
02200-4
o sEcTtoN - 02r00
EXCAVATION, FILLING, BACKFILLING AND DISPOSAL (EARTHWORK)
SCOPE OF WORK
The work under this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all plant,labor, equipment, transportation, appliances and materials and in performing alloperations in connection with earthwork of all underground se.vices andstructural units, roads and temporary drainage, stock piling of suitable excavatqdmaterial, disposal of unsuitable and surplus excavated material, filling andbacklilling around or under the foundations or plinth beams in accbrdance withthis section of specifications, the applicable drawings and subject to terms andconditions of the Contract.
2. SUBMITTALS
3.'l
The contactor shall perform a joint survey with the Engineer's Representative, ofthe area where earthwork is required, plot the ground levels on the drawings andobtain approval from the Engineer before starting the Earthwork. All submittalsshall be made as per the requirements of section 01340.
MATERIALS
Unsuitable MaterialThe material shall be declared unsuitable if the soaked CBR (96 hours) is lessthan five (5) percent and/or if falls under 4-6 or A-7 of MSHTO soilclassification.
Common Backfill/FillCommon backfill materials shall have soaked CBR (96 hours) greater than five
. (5) percent and shall not falls under A-6 or A-7 of MSHTO soil classification.
3.3 GranularBackfi lUFil l
Granular backfill materials shall meet the following requirements.
a) cradingRequirementsMm lnch A
3.2
Material satisfyingclassification A-3granular f i l l i t shallapproved material.
No.4 50-85
2.0 No. 10 40-70
0.425 No.40 25-45
0.075 No.200 0-15
25 1"'t9 3t4"
100
60 - 100
't00
75 - 10055 - '100
40 - 100
20-50
5-15
o) the requirements of coarse sand falling under soil(AASHTO). In case coarse sand is utilized forbe ensured that the same is confined properly with
c) The material shall have a plasticity index of not more than sixdetermined by MSHTO T - 89 and T - 90.
o02100-1
3.4 Structural FillStructural fill materials shall be A-1, A-2 or A-3 of AASHTO classification andcombination thereof and shall have a bearing capacity greater or equal to thebearing capacity for which the foundations are designed for under the prescribedinches of settlement
EXECUTION
The Contractor shall be deemed to have made local and independent inquires asto, and shall take the whole risk of, the nature of the ground subsoil or material tobe excavated or penelrated and the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive anextra or additional payment nor to be.relieved from any of his obligations byreasons of the nature of such ground subsoil or material.
All excavations, cuts and fills shall be constructed to the lines, levels, slopes andgradients specified with any necessary allowance for consolidation, settlementand drainage so that at the end of the Defects Liability Period the Ground shallbe at the required lines, levels and gradients. During the course of the Contractand during the Defects Liability Period any damage or defects in cuts and fills, instructures and other works or rolling of stones/boulders caused by blasting or.otherwise, slips, falls of wash-ins or any other ground movement due to theContractor's negligence shall be reconstructed by the Contractor at his own cost.
SITE PREPARATION
4.1.1 The Contractor shall set out the work and shall be responsible fortrue and perfect setting out of the same and for correctness of thepositions, levels, dimensions and alignments of all parts thereof. lfat any time any error in this respect shall appear during theprogress of the work, the Contractor shall at his own expenserectify such error, to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Engineer'sReoresentative.
4.1.2 The contractor shall construct and maintain accurate bench markso that the Lines and levels can be easily checked by theEngineer/Engineer's representative.
EXCAVATIONS
4.2.1 Excavation shall include the removal of all material of every nameand nalure.
It is expected that rock and other hard material will beencountered during excavation- The rate of excavation shallinclude the removal of the sub-surface materlal of every name andnature and no classification of sub-sudace material shall be made.
4.2.2 fhe major portion of excavations shall be canied out bymechanical excavators and excavated materials disposed off tostock on spoil as directed by the Engineer. The excavation may be
o
4.
a
4.1
4.2
o02100-2
4.2.5
4.2.6
within the limits of whole of the project site/outside the site atlocations designated and approved by the Engineer.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to dispose-offunsuitable excavated material anywhere without any lead or lift.
4.2.3 The Contractor shall give reasonable notice that he intends tocommence any excavation and shall submit to the Engineer fulldetails of his proposals. The Engineer's approval shall notrelieve the Contractor of his responsibility with respect to such
l.z.q tn" contractor shall preserve the completed excavation fromdamage due to slips and earth movements, ingress of waterfrom any source whatsoever and deterioration by exposure tothe sun and the effects ofthe weather.
All excavations shall be kept free of water and shall be maintaineddry to ihe satisfaction of the Engineer. Prevent surface water andsub-surface water from flowing into the excavation and floodingthe project site and surroundings.
Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations, remove waterfrom excavations to prevent softening of foundation bottoms,under cutting footings and soll changes detrimental to the stabilityof sub-grades and foundations. Provide discharge lines necessaryto convey the water away from the excavations. Convey water,removed from excavation and rain water, to outside the limits inmanner that no damages are caused to the surrounding servicespropenres.
Excavation for pits, cable trenches, equipment-foundations andother structures shall be taken out to the levels and dimensionsshown on Drawings or such other levels and dimensions as theEngineer may direct.
Excavation shall extend to adeouate distance from walls andfootings to allow for placing and romoval of forms, installations offorms, installations of services and for inspection, except wherethe concrete for walls and footings is authorized to be depositeddirectly against excavated surfaces. Undercutting will not bepermitted. The additional excavation for placing and removal offorms, installation of services, for inspection and generally forworking area on slopes for stability shall not be measured forpayment and shall be deemed to be included in the rates forexcavation as measured net.
All excavations in foundations shall be taken to 6 lnch above thefinal exoavation elevations shown on the drawings and the last 6-inch shall be rimmed carefully to a smooth and level surface.lmmediately after trimming to the final elevation, a layer ofblinding/Lean concrete shall be placed to the thickness shown onthe drawings. All excavations for foundations which have bthe drawtngs. All excavatrons lor Tounoalons wnrcn nave DeeR'trimmed and disturbed shall be compacted and covered by,leilfconcrete by the end of the day.
02100-3
4.2.8 No Excavation shall be refilled nor any psrmanent workcommenced until the foundation has been inspected by theEngineer and his permission to proceed is given.
4.2.9 lf excavatlon for sub-structures is carried below the required level,as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, thesurplus depth shall be filled in with concrete of same grade as oflean concrete at the sole cost of the Contractor.
4.2.10 The placing of lean concrete, placing of reinforcement and castingof the oermanent work in the excavation shall be caried out in thedry condition.
4.2.11 Shoring, where required during excavation, shall be installed toprotect workmen and the bank, adjacent paving, structures andutilities. The term shoring shall also be deemed to cover whatevermethods the Contractor elects to adopt, with prior approval of theEngineer, for upholding the sides of excavation and also forplanklng and strutting to excavation against the side of roadwaysand adjoining properties in existing hardcore of any other material.The contractor will be held responsible for upholding the sides ofall excavations and no claim for additional excavation, concrete orother material will be considered in the respect.
4.2.12 Existing utility lines that are shown on the drawings or thelocations of which are made known to the Contractor prior toexcavation and that are to be retained, as well as utility linesconstructed during excavation and backfilling, and if damaged,shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense. Anyexisting utility lines which are not known to the Contractor insufficient time to avoid damage, if inadvertently damaged duringexcavation, shall be repaired by the contractor and adjustment inpayment will be made as approved by the Engineer. When utilitylines which are to be removed, are encountered within the area ofoperations the contractor shall notify the Engineer in ample timefor the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption ofthe services.
4.2.13 Where applicable the excavation work shall include the excavationabove water table and excavation below water table. TheContractor shall provide all plant, equipment, pumps, sheeting,well points as required to keep the water table 3.0 feet below thedeepest foundation as shown on the drawings till the completionof ioundation works.
4.2.14 Belorc starting the excavation for pipelines, the Contractor shallensure the conect alignment of the pipeline on the ground thedepth and width of excavation of the trench, all in accordance withthe drawings and instructions of the Engineer. The Contractorshall make profit wjth cement concrete pillars.
Excavation shall be carried out true to lines, levels, grades andwidths as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineerensuring proper laying of the pipe line, the bedding fill,
4.3
Without the written permission of the Engineer, not more than 600feet of the trench shall be opened in advance of the completeoioeline.
4.215 fhe Engineer may require the contractor to excavate below theelevations shown on the drawings or may order him to stop abovethe elevations shown depending upon the suitable foundationmaterialencountered.
4.2.16 lf for any reason, the levels, grades or profiles of the excavationsare changed adversely by the Contractor, the Contractor shall athis own cost, be liable to bring the excavations to the requiredlevels and profiles as shown on the drawings or as directed by theEngineer.
EXCAVATION TOLERANCES
All slopes, lines and grades shall be true, correct and accurate to thoseshown in the plans or otherwise directed and approved by the Engineer.The sub-grade in cuts shall be accurate to the authorized profile grade forthe sub-grade to +/- one inch (1'). Where discrepancies are found in thework the Contractor shall make the necessary corrections.
EXCAVATION CLASSIFICATIONFor the purpose of excavation, the soil may be classified by the Enginberinto the following classifications:
4,4,1 EXCAVATION IN COIVIMON MATERIAL
Excavation in CoFmon Material consisting of Aeolian, alluvial,residual material consisting of gravel, shale volcanic ashes, loam,sand, clay or any combination of these material.
4.4.2 EXCAVATION IN SOFT ROCK
Excavation in Soft Rock includes flrm and rigid igneous,metamorphic and sedimentary rock. Soft rock, which can beremoved by manual Chiseling.
4,4,3 EXCAVATION IN MEDIUM ROCK
Excavation in Medium Rock includes firm and rigid igneous,metamorphic and sedimentary rock. l\.4edium rock, which can beremoved by Ripper attached to a Bulldozer (200 HP) andchiseling.
4.4.4 EXCAVATION IN HARD ROCK
Excavation in hard Rock includes firm and rigid igneous,metamorphic and sedimentary rock. Hard rock constitute firm andcontinuous bed rock requiring blasting for excavation. This willinclude boulders larger than one quarter (1/4) cubic meter involume, provided these are firm and stable lying in the continuousbed and constitute more than 50% by volume comparedtype of material.
4.4
to
02100-5
4.4.5 EXCAVATION REQUIRING SPLIfiING AND BLASTINGThis includes hard rock and similar other formation cannot beexcavated by the use ofjumpers, wedges and hammers, etc.
Blasting shall not be performed without the prior writtenpermission of the Engineer and without obtaining the explosivelicense from the concerned authorities. The contractor shall takeall necessary precaution for safety of person, property etc., asrequired by regulations and shall be implicitly obey all instructionon blastlng as may be issued, without extra payment.
4.5 FILL AND BACKFILL
4.4.1 The backfilling shall indlude filling under the floors, around the. foundation trenches, pipes, conduits, ducts and channels, etc.
The backfi l l ing shall include loading. unloading, transporting.placing, stacking, spreading of earth, watering, rolling, rammingand compacting, etc., complete as specified herein.
4.4.2 Backlill or filing shall be either using structural fill or granularbackfill material or common backfill as directed and aoorovedby the Engineer.
4.4.3 Not Used.
4.4.4 The Contractor shall provide the approved quality of backlill andfill material required to complete the fill and back-filling wo*from the places as designated by the Engineer.
Deep filling shall be predominantly granular material and free. from slurry mud, organic or other unsuitable matter and capable
of compaction by ordinary means.
4.4.5 Material for backfilling shall be as approved by the Engineer andshall be placed in layers not exceeding six (6) inches measured ascompacted material with sufficient water and compacted toproduce in-situ density not less than 95% (unless otherwisespecified on the drawings) of the maximum dry density at optimummolsture content achieved in lvlodified Proctor Test (AAHSTO T-180) .
Depending on the depth of fill the Engineer may instruct increasedthickness of successive layers to be placed.
The filling shall be compacted by mechanical means as approvedby the Engineer.
4.4.6 Filling around pipes and cables shall be carefully placed with finematerial to cover the pipe or cable completely before the normal fillis placed.
Backfilling of trenches/foundations shall be carried outoioe line/structural works within the excavationsinspected, tested and approved by the Engineer.
4.4.7
02100-6
4.4.8 Fill shall not be placed against foundation walls prior to approval bythe Engineer. Fill shall be brought up evenly on each side of thewalls as far as practicable. HeaW equipment for spreading andcompacting the fill shall not be operated closer to the wall than adistance equalto the height of the fill above the top offooting.
4.4.9 Before the start of fill and backfill, the Contractor shall satisfyhimself as to the levels and slopes of the fills and backfill shown onthe Drawings, the requirements of compaction, the possibility ofsettlement & all other particulars whatsoever in connection with thefilling works.
4.4.10 All filled areas shall be left neat. smooth and well compacted, the, top surface consisting of the normal site surface soil, unless
otherwise directed.
4.5 TOLERANCES
The stabilization of compacted backfilufill surface shall be smooth andeven and shall not vary more than 3/8 inch in 10 feet from true profile andshall not be more than 1/2 inch from true elevation.
4.6 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL OR UNSUITABLEMATERIAL
4.6.1 The rejected unsuitable material and surplus excavated materialshall be disposed off by the Contractor. No compensation of anylead/lift is admissible and rates quoted shall be deemed to includethe same. The surplus excavated material shall be so placed thatit will present a neat appearance and not offer any danger toabutting properties.
4.6,2 fhe disposal of surplus/unsuitable excavaled material shallinclude loading, unloading, transporting, stacking, spreading andleveling.
5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
General
Exoeot otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will be made for the undermentioned works related to the relevant BOQ items. The cost thereof shallbe deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate of the resoectiveitems of the Bill of Quantities.
5.1.1 Timber shoring, planking, strutting and providing slope forupholding the sides of excavations.
5.1.2 Any fill with approved material necessitated by over excavationdue to fault or convenience of the Contractor except understructulal members.
5.1
5.1.3 Stockpiling the excavated material at approved locationstransporting suitable material to places requiring fill or backfill.
5.'1.4 Specified foundation bed preparation.02100-'1 ri'm),
ano
5.1
5.1.5 Excavation involved in providing adequate working space aroundsides of foundation an service line trenches.
5.1.6 Providing approved quality fill/backfill material obtained fromexcavated material as designated by the Engineer.
5.1.7 Rolling, leveling, watering & compacting the fill and backfill torequlred densitY.
5.1.8 All laboratory and field tests stipulated in thesg specifications.
5.1.9 Disposal of rejected surplus and unsuitable excavated
material anywhere.
5.1.10 De-watering to keep the foundations dry during
construction..
EXCAVATION
5.1.1 Measurement
Quantities of excavation shall be calculated / measured from the pre-work levels of leveled and graded ground taken jointly by the Conlractorand the Engineer before commencement ofthe work.
The quantities set out for excavation and its subsequent disposal shall bedeemed to be the bulk quantity before excavating and no allowanc€ shallbe made for any subsequent variations in bulk or for any extraexcavation.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings quantities of excavation shall bemeasured of, acceptably completed works the basis of verticalexcavations required in accordance with lines of concrete.
Measurement and payment of excavation for laying service line trenchesshall be included in the relevant service lines items. No separate paymentshall be made under this item.
Measurement for acceptably completed excavation works shall be madeon the basis of number of cubic meter of material excavated forfoundation and service trenches as shown on the Drawinos or as directedby the Engineer.
5.1.2 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptably measured quantity of excavation onthe basis of unit rate per cubic meters quoted in the Bills of Quantities andshall constitute full compensation for all the works related toincluding but not limjting to back filling.
BACKFILUFILLS
5.2.1 Measurement
Measurement for acceptably completed backfill/fill works willthe basis of number of cubic meter of compacted backfillifill
a
5.2
02100-8in position i
a accordance with the lines, levels and grade as shown on Drawings or asdirected by the Engineer.
5.2.2 Paymeti
Payment will be made for acc,eptably measured quantity of backfillffill onthe basis of unit rate per cubic meter quoted in the Bills of Quantities andshall constitute full compensation or all the works related to the item.
o
a
o02100-9
sEcTtoN - 02300
STONE SOLING
SCOPE
The work under this section of specifications consists of furnishing all plant,labour, equipment, appliance, materials and performance of all operationsrequired in connection with the construction of stone soling in strictaccordance with the specifications and Drawings and / or as directed by theEngineer. The scope of this section of specification is covered with detailedspecification as laid down herein.
STONE
Stone to be used shall comprise of strong, hard, durable stone of theapproved size, free from impurities, quarry sap, dust, dirt and solubilitycharacteristics. The stone shall be obtained from approvod quarries and shallbe sound, free from laminations and weak cleavages.
CONSTRUCTION
Preparation of Sub-grade
Sub-grade shall be formed of suitable materials lree of clods, sod, roots,stumps, brush or other objectionable materials.
Sub-grade material shall be placed in successive layers not exoeeding 6inchin thickness and each layer shall be thoroughly compacted at optimummoisture content.
The Maximum dry weight density of the sub-grade shall not be less then 95%of Modified MSHTO requirements.
Stone Ballast Soling
The Stone Ballast Shall be well graded and broken hard of 2" mesh obtainedfrom an approved quarry.
The stone shall be laid and packed to even grades and well rolled usingvibratory roller / plate compactor to a consolidated thickness of net less then6inch or as shown on the Drawings.
The whole of the surface of the compacted stone ballast soling will be blindedwith murrum or any other approved gritty material stone dust (Khaka). Afterthe interstices have been filled with smaller size crushed stone, so as toeffectively fill in the voids and crevices, soling area may be watered, ifnecessary and again thoroughly rolled with the same roller to produce asmooth and even surface free from irregularities , true to line and level.
Care is to be taken to avoid any damage tg existing structures, mains orpipes while rolling operation is in progress. In places inaccessible for a roller,oompaction shall be done by hard tampers weighing not less then 20 lb. orpower reams as directed by the Engineer.
2.
o
02301-1
o 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.2 Measurement:
Exoect otherwise soecified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocument no measurement and payment will b made for theunder mentioned specified works related to the relevant items ofthe Bills of Quantities. The Cost thereof shall be deemed to havebeen included in the quoted unit rate of the respective items of theBills of Quantities.
Any losses ofi(a) material, which may result from shrinkage, compaction, waste.
Overflow erosion etc.(b) Sub-grade preparation.(c) Blinding materialof approved quality.(d) Stone Soling
Measurement of acceptably completed works of stgne ballaslsoling will be made on the basis of number of cube feetcompacted soling in position as shown on the Drawings or asdirected by the Engineer
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofcompacted stone ballast soling on the basis of unit rate per cubefeet quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute fullcomoensation for all the works related to the items.
4.3 Payment
4.1 General
o
a
I02301-2
a sEcTtoN - 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK & ACCESSORIES
SCOPE
The work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations inany floor and at any height in connection with the supply and installation offormwork for the purpose of shuttering in concreting work, complete in strictaccordance with this section of the specifications and the applicable drawingsand subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
As oer the requirements of sections 01090.
SUBMITTALS
As oer the reouirements of sections 0'1340.
MATERIALS
The Contractor shall use the following formwork materials for different purposesas stated below:
4,1 TIMBER
Form framing and sheathing only upon approval of the Engineer.
PLWVOOD (r\4ARrNE)
Form sheathing and panels.
4.3 STEEL
- Sheathing and panels- HeaW forms and false work- Column and joint forms- Permanent forms- Welding of permanent forms
4.4 FORM TIES ANCHORS AND HANGERS
For securing formwork against placing loads and pressures.
4.5 COAT|NGS
To facilitate form removal.
4.6 STEEL JOISTS
For formwork support.
4.7 STEEL FMI,IE SHORING/PIPES
For formwork support.
2.
1 .
4.
c
4.2
t
a03100-l
6.
DELIVERY ANO STORAGE
5.1 DELIVERYThe delivery of formwork materials shall be done in such a manner thatdamage can be prevented.
5.2 STORAGE
Formwork should be stored, after cleaning and preparing for re-use ifused before, in such a manner that access to all different materials isavailable.
Material which can be affected by weathering shall be stored inappropriate building or under covers and shade.
EXECUTION
6.1 WORKI\4ANSHIP
6.1.1 Forms shall have sufficient strength to withstand the pressureresulting from placement and vibration of the concrete and shahave sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolerances.
Where .equired details and locations of special forms to be usedare set out on the drawings. The Engineer shall refuse anyformwork in any part of the building, which has been constructedwith a non-approved formwork. The Engineer shall refuse anyconcreting which will not be perfect or may not conform to theaDoroved model.
6.1.2 Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surfaces ofreinforced concrete work unless required as such or permitted bythe Engineer.
6.1.3 [,4ud centering shall not be permitted wjthout the prior approval ofthe Engineer.
a
6.1 .4 a )
o)
c)
Formwork except props & support shall be of wroughttimber (only upon approval of the Engineer), steel, marineplywood, proprietary building boards and such specialmaterials, as may be shown on the drawings or approvedby the Engineer, which give the required finish to thesurface of concrete. Marine plywood formwork shall be freefrom loose knots and shall be well seasoned.
No wooden props, bamboo, (ballies), etc., shall be used assupports to beams or roofs and floors. Only steel pipesc€ffoldings (tubular) to be used for allworks.
No wooden formwork shall be allowed to be used incolumns, roofs and floors and beams etc. All the form workshall be of steel as approved.
Only wooden planks of approved quality and thickness of 2inches minimum on the inner sides of plinth beams and
03100-2
fillers to bridge gap between steel sheathing of forms forroof shall be allowed on the approval ofthe Engineer.
e) Allthe erected formwork shall be inspected and approved inall respects by the Engineer or his representative prior toconcrelng.
0 Where concrete will be exposed to view, special caie shallbe taken in the seleotion of the form material and theconstruction of the forms, to the end that the concrete will
. be smooth, uniform in texture, true in line and face and freefrom honeycombing and other projections. All sides andioints on the forms shall be flush (without lipping) andinconspicuous, wood used for such work shall bethoroughly cleaned before each reuse and shall be freefrom cracks, splinters, nails, or other defects effecting theappearance of the concrete.
'6.1.5 The responsibility of the safe design of the formwork shali beentirely that of the Contractor.
6.'1.6 The formwork shall conform to the shape, l ines and dimensions asshown on the plans and be so constructed as to remainsufficiently rigid during the placing and compacting of theconcrete, and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of liquidfrom the concrete.
6.'1.7
The design and Engineering of the formwork, as well as itsconstruction, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Wherenecessary, to maintain the specified tolerances, the formworkshall be cambered to compensate for anticipaled deflections inthe formwork due to the weight and pressure of the freshconcrete and due to construction loads.
The Contractor shall establish and maintain in an undisturbedconditioned until final completion. and acceptance of the project,sufficient control points and benchmarks to be used asreferences for checking upon tolerances.
Forms for architectural concrete shall be designed to produce therequired finish or finishes. Deflection ol lacing materials betweenstuds as well as deflection of studs and wailers shall be limited to0.0025 times the span or as otherwise specified. Forms shall bedesigned to permit easy removal. Prying against the face of theconcrete shall not be allowed. Only wooden wedges shall beused.
Where natural plywood-form-finish, groufcleaned-finish, smooth-rubbed- finish, scrubbed-finish or sand-floated-finish is required,forms shall be smooth (faced with plywood, liner sheets, or pre-fabricated panels) and true lo line, in order that the surfacesproduced wlll require little dressing to arrive at true surfaces.Where any as-cast finish is required, no dressing shall bepermitted in the finishing operation.
Where as-cast surfaces, including natural plywood-form-finish arespecified. the panels of material against which concrete isshall be orderly in arrangement, with joints between pan
f4l
'^q)03100-3
planned in approved relation to openings, building corners, andother architectural features.
6.1.1owhere panels for as-c€st surfac€s are separated by recessed orotherwise emphasized joints, the structural design of the formsshall provide for locating form ties, where possible, within thejoints so that patches of tie holes will not fall within the panelareas.
6.1,11 Forms shall not be re-used if there is any evidence of surface' wear and tear or defect, which would impair the quality of the
surface finish. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and properlycoated with form oil before re-use.
6.1.12 lhe tormwork shall be designed so that the sotfits of slabs a;dsides of beams, columns and walls may be removed first, leavingthe forms to the soffits of beams and their supports in position.
6.1.13 Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from theconcrete. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documentschamfer strips shall be placed in the corners of forms to producebeveled edges on permanently exposed surfaces. Interior cornerson such surfaces and the edges of formed joints will not requirebeveling unless required by the Contract Documents.
6.1.'14 Posjtive means such as wedges or jacks for accurate adjustmentand for proper removal of shores and struts shall be provided andall settlement shall be monitored during concrete placingoperation. Forms shall be securely braced against Lateraldeflections.
6.1.15 Where conoreting of thin members is required to be carried outwithin formwork of considerable depth, temporary openings in thesides of the formwork shall be proved where necessary tofacilitate the placing and consolidation of concrete. smalltemporary openings shall also be provided at the bottom of theformwork for columns, walls and deep beams to permit thecleaning out of debris and observation immediately beforeconcrete is deDosited.
6.'1.16 Form ties shall be constructed so that the ends or end fastenerscan be removed without causing appreciable spelling at the facesof the concrete. After the ends or end fasteners of form ties havebeen removed, the embedded portion of the ties shall terminatenot less than 2 diameter or twice the minimum dimension of thetie from the formed faces of concrete to be permanently exposedto view exceot that in no case shall this distance be less than 3/4inch. When the formed face of the concreie is not to bepermanently exposed to view, form ties may be cut off flush withthe formed surfaces. Precaution shall be taken not to rotate formtres.
Through bolts may be permitted provided that they are greased toallow for easy withdrawal and the holes subsequently madegood. Through bolts are not to be used on water-retainingstructures and basement walls.i;
03100-4
o
6.1.17 At construction joints contact surface of the form sheathing forflush surfaces exposed to view shall overlap the hardenedconcrete in the previous placement by no less than 1 inch, Theforms shall be held against the hardened concrete to preventoffsets or loss of mortar at the construction ioint so as to maintaina true surface.
6.1.18 Forms for wall opening shall be constructed to facilitate loosening,if necessary to counteract swelling of the forms.
6.1.19 Wedges used for final adjustment of the forms pior to concreteplacement shall be fastened in position after the final check.
6.1.20 Formwork shall be so anchored to Ghores or to other supportingsurfaces or members that upward or lateral movement of any partof the formwork system during concrete placement will not occur.
6.'1.21 Runways or planks tor moving labour and equipment shall beprovided wjth struts or legs and shall be supported directly on theiormwork gr upon the structural member without resting on thereinforcing steel.
6.'1.22 AII surfaces of forms and embedded materials shall be cleaned ofany accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and ofall other foreign material before placing fresh concrete.
6.'1.23 Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout orcement paste. Board forms having joints opened by shrinkage ofthe wood shall be removed and replaced. Plywood and otherwood sufaces not subject to shrinkage shall be sealed againstabsorption of moisture from the concrete by either:
(1) a field applied, approved form oil or sealer, or
(2\ a factory applied non-absorptive liner.
When forms are coated to prevent bond wjth concrete, it shall bedone prior to placing of the reinforcing steel. Excess coatingmaterial shall not be allowed to stand in puddles in the forms norallowed to oome in contact with the concrete against which freshconcrete will be placed. Care shall be taken that such approvedcomposition is keep out of contact with the reinlorcement. Whereas-cast finishes are required, materials, which will impart a stain tothe concrete, shall not be applied to the form surfaces. Where thefinished surface is required to be painted, the malerial applied toform surfaces shall be compatible with the type of paint to beused.
6.1.24 For reinforoed concrete, in no circumstances shall forms bestruck until the concrete attains 75olo of ultimate strength.
The strength referred to shall be that of concrete u$ing the samecement and aggregates, with the same proportions, and curedunder conditions of temDerature and moisture similar to thoseobtaining in the work. Where possible, the formwork should beleft for longer time, as it would assist the curing.
t
03100-5
a
In normal circumstances (generally where temperatures areabove 20" C and where ordinary cement is used, forms may bestruck after expiry of the following perlods.
Walls, columns and vertical sides of 48 hours or as may beBeams decided by the
Engineer,
Side of slab (shores of props left 6 days.unoer).
Beams soffits (shores or props left '12 days.under).Removal of shores or props to slabs.1. Spanning upto 12 feet.2. Spanning over 12 feet.
10 days.16 days.
Removal of shores or props to beams.1. Spanning upto lSfeet. 18 days.2. Spanning over 18 feet. 25 days.
For rapid hardening cement 3/7 of the above period will besufficient in all cases except vertical sides of slabs, beams andcolumns, which should be retained for a minimum of 24 hours.
The number of shores or props, their sizes and disposition shallbe such as to be able to safely carry the full dead load of the slaband beams, as the case may be,
Proper allowance shall be made for the decrease in rate ofhardening of concrete in cold weather and the above minimumduration must be increased when the mean dailv temoerature isbelow 20 C.
6. 1.25 When repair of surface defects or finishing is required at an earlyage, forms shall be removed as soon as the concrete hashardened sufticiently to resist damage from removal operations.
6.'1.26 Top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete shall be removed assoon as the concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to preventsagging. Any needed repairg or treatment required on suchsloping surfaces shall be performed at once and be followed bythe specified curing.
6.'1.27 Forms for wall openings shall be loosened as soon asthis can beaccomplished without damage to the concrete.
6.1.28 All formwork shall be removed without such shock or vibration aswould damage the reinforced concrete. Before the top plank andstruts are removed, the concrete surface shall be exposed wherenecessary in order to ascertain that the concrete has sufficientlyhardened. Prooer orecautions shall be taken to allow for thedecrease in the rate of hardening that occurs with all cement inthe cold weather.
When reshoring or repropping is permitted oroperations shall be planned in advance and shallapproval. While reshoring is underway no live
required, thebe subject
);
1.29
03100-6
load shall b
t
permitted on the new construction. In no case durjng reshoringshall concrete in beam, slab, columns or any other structuralmember be subjected to combined dead and construction loadsin excess of the load permitted by the Engineer for the developedconcrete strength at the time of reshoring.
Reshores shall be placed as soon as practicable after strippingoperations are complete but in no case later than the end ofworking day on which stripping occurs.
Reshores shall be tightened to carry their required loads withoutoverstressing the construction. Reshores shall remain in place atleast until tests representative of the concrete being supportedhave reached the strength specified in sub-clause 6.1.23 hereof.
6.1.30 Floors supporting props or shores under newly placed concreteshall have their original suppodng props or shores left in place orshall be reshored. The reshoring system shall have a capacitysufficient to resist the ariticiDated loads and in all cases shallhave a capacity equal to at least one half the capacity of theshoring system above. The reshores shall be located directlyunder a shore position above unless other locations arepermitted.
The reshoring or re-propping shall extend over a sufficient numberof storeys to distribute the weight of newly placed concrete, forms,and construction live loads in such a manner that the designsuperimposed loads of the floors supporting shores or props arenot exceeded.
6.1.3'l lt is generally desirable to give forms for reinforced concrete anupward camber to ensure that the beams or slabs (speciallycantilever slabs) do not have a sag when they have taken up theirdeflection, but this should not be done unless permitted by theEngineer.
6.'1.32 No loads, other than man and light plant required in connectionwith the actualwork in hand. shall be allowed on suspended floorsuntil 28 days after concreting where ordinary Portland Cement isused and 14 days when rapid hardening Portland Cement is used.
6.1.33 Prior to placing concrete, all forms shall be inspected and alldebris and extraneous matter removed. The form oil or releaseagent shall not react with concrete to affect the strength nor shall itgrve any colour.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No payment will be made for the works involved within the scope of this sectionof the specifications unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bills of Quantitiesor heretn.
The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in ouoted unit rates ofrelevant items of the Bills of Quantities.
t
03100-7
2.
,1.
sEcTtoN - 03200
REINFORCEMENT
SCOPE
The work under this section of specifications oonsists of furnishing, cutting,fabricating, bending and placing steel reinforcement and Welded wire fabric in anyfloor and at any height in concrete structures or elsewhere as shown on thedrawings or as directed by the Engineer
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Latest editions of the following British and ASTM Standards are relevant to thesespecifications wherever applicable.British Standards
BS 785 Hot rolled bars and hard drawn wire for the reinforcement ofconcrete.BS 4449 Hot rolled steel bars for reinforcement of concreteBS 4461 cold worked steel bars for reinforcement of concrete.BS 4466 Bending dimensions and scheduling of bars for the reinforcement
of concrete.4483 Welded steelwire fabrics.
ASTM Standard
a
A 301
A 615A 185A 706
l\4inimum requirement for the deformations of deformed steel barsfor conorete reinforcement.Deformed billet steel bars for concrete reinforcement.Welded steelwire fabric for concrete reinforcement.Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Barsfor Concrete Reinforcement
ln addition to the above, the latest editions of other Pakistan Standards, Britishstandards, American Concrete lnstitute Standards, American Society for Testingand l\4aterials Standards and other standards as may be specified by theEngineer for Special lvlaterial and construction are also relevant.
SUBMITTALS
Reinforcement shall be obtained only from manufacturers approved bythe Engineer; Each consignment of reinforcement steel shall beaccompanied by the manufacturer's certificate or shall refer to a previouscertificate, if the consignment is from the same batch, showing that thereinforcement steel comolies with the soecified requirement. lf suchcertificate is not made available or if the Engineer considers that themanufacturer's tests are inadequate, samples shall be taken foracceptance test from different consignments as the Engineer may directand shall be tested at the contracto/s cost. Should the result of such testsshow that the sample does not meet with the specifications the wholeconsignment shall be rejected and removed from the site at theContractods cost. All submittals shall be made as per the requirements of
3 .1
section 01340.
03200-1
BAR BENDING SCHEDULES
The Contractor shall prepare bar bending schedules of all the reinforcingsteel bars and these bar bending schedules shall be submitted to theEngineerfor his approval.
All detail ing shall be done as per ACl, standards ACI-315 & 318. TheContractor shall obtain approval of the bar bending schedules beforestarting actual bar bending works.
MATERIAL AND SIZE OF BARS
4.1 Reinforcement for concrete shall conform to the respective British,ASTM, or other Standards as speoified in the Drawings and in theContract Documents or as may be specified by the Engineer.
4.2 Unless otherwise specified, all deformed reinforcing bars shall complywith the reouirements of ASTM A706 for deformed cold worked newstock billet steel bars and shall have a minimum characteristic strengthof 60 ksi.
4.3 Reinforcement shall be free from all loose or flaky rust and mill scale, orcoating, including ice, and any other substance that would reduce ordestroy the bond. Reduced section steel reinforcement shall not beuseo.
DELIVERY AND STOMGE
5.1 DELIVERY
Steel reinforcement bars shall be kept in bundles firmly secured andtagged. Each bar or bundle of bars shall be.identified by marks stampedon hot or cold or painted on or by any other means. The identifyingmarks shall contain the following information:
- Name ofthe producer or his trade.
- Standard to which the bars have been manufactured.
- The class type and strength. - The diameter.
- The number of the test certificate.
5,2 STORAGE
The method of storage shall be approved by the Engineer. Reinforcingbars shall be stored in racks or platforms above the surface of groundand shall be protected free from scaling, rusting, oiling, coatings,damage, contamination and structural defects prior to placement inworks. Bars of different diameters and grades of steel reinforcementshall be kept separately.
FABRICATING. BENDING & PLACING
Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall be fabricated in accordanwith the dimensions shown in the bar-bending schedule approved by
4,
a
6.
6.'t
Engineer.
03200-2
6.2 The cufting tolerance for all bars shall be + 1 inch.
6.3 Where an overall or an internal dimension of a bent bar is sDecified in theschedule, the bending tolerance, unless otherwise stated, shall be as inTable 1.
Table 1: Bending Tolerances
Dimensions of bent bars
OverFeet
Upto & includingfeet
36
Tolerance
plustnch
1/51 t51t5
minusInch
1t5'| 151
36
6.4 Reinforcement shall not be bent or straiqhtened in a manner that willinjure the material.
No bars shall be bent twice in the same place, norstraightened after bending.
they be
Unless permitted by the Engineer, reinforcement shall not be bent afterbeing partially embedded in hardened concrete.
Bars which depend for their strength on cold working shall not be heatedfor any reason.
Welding shall be permitted for bars only under suitable conditions andwith suitable safeguards in accordance with BS 693, BS 1856, or AWSD12.1, provided the type of reinforcing bar has the required weldingproperties. Tack welding may be used to fix in position bars that crosseach other, only with prior approval of the Engineer. Welding shall bedone as in lectum structural steel & metal works.
No splice of reinforcement shall be made except as shown on theworking drawings.
Reinforcement is to be accurately placed as shown jn the drawings, andsecured against displacement by using 18-20 gauge black annealed wireties or suitable slips at intersections and supported from the formwork byusing concrete, metal or plastic chairs and spacers or hangers of anapproved pattern. Where concrete blocks are used for ensuring thecover, they shall be made of mortar not leaner than 1 part of cement to 2oarts of sand.
Where the concrete suface will be exposed to the weather infinished structure, the portions of all accessories in contact withformwork shall be galvanized or shall be made of plastic.
6 .7
thethe
03200-3
a
6.8 Concrete clear cover for reinforcinq steel shall be as follows:
6.9 Bars shall be placed to the following tolerances:
6.10 Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with otherreinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items. lf bars are moved morethan one bar diameter or enough to exceed the above toleranaes, theresulting arrangement of bars shall be subject to approval of Engineer.
6.11 Vertical bars in columns shall be offset at least one bar diameter atlapped splices. To ensure proper placement, templates shall befurnished for all column dowels.
6.12 Exposed reinforcement intended for bonding with future extensions is tobe effectively protected from corrosion. Protection is also to be providedto reinforcement partly built jnto concrete where the exposed part is to bebuilt into later concrete.
6.13 All reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed, shall be free of loosemile scale, loose rust mud, oil grease, or other materials that mayadversely affect or reduce the bond.
6.14 No concreting is to be carried out until the reinforcement has beenchecked and approved by the Engineer.
Structural Members Minimum Cover (inches)
a) loncrete cast against and)ermanenflv exDosed to earth
3
)) loncrete exoosed to earth or weather:(i) For reinforcing bars # 6 or larger 2
(ii) For reinforcing bars less than # 6 't-1t2
, loncrete not exposed to weather or in contact with)round:llabs, Walls )t4
feams, Columns:Ties/Stirrups reinforcement)
1-1t4
1 . loncrete cover to formed surfaces t 114 inch
2. Minimum spacing between bars 'll4 inch
3. Top bars in slabs and beams
a. lvlembers 8 inch deep or lessb. lvlembers more than 8 inch but not over 2 feetc. Members more then 2 feet deep
r 1l4 incht 112 incht 1 inch
4. Crosswise of members: oaced evenlv within z tncnLenqthwise of members i 2 inch
03200-4
MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT
7.1 General
Exceot otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will be made fortheunder mentioned specified works related to the relevant items olthe Bills of Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to havebeen included in the quoted unit rate of the respective items of theBills of Ouantities.
The rates quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities shallinclude work to be executed under these specification in any floorand at any height except where otherwise specifically stated in therelevant item of Bill of Quantities and the Contractor shall not beentitled to any claim or claim any compensation on this account.
Providing and installing cover blocks, chairs, supports, hooks,spacers, binding wires, and laps not shown on drawings includingwastage and rolling margin and as such are not payable. Lapsshown on drawings shall be payable.
7.2 Mild Steel and Deformed Steel
7.2.'1 MeasurementMeasurement for acceptably completed works ofreinforcement according to bar bending schedulesapproved by the Engineer shall be made by weight.
Comouted on the bases of table 2. The Contractor shallnot claim for the difference in the actual weights of barsand their standard weights given in Table-2.
Nominal Bar Diameter Bar No.
#5
#8#s#10
2204.60 Lbs = '1.00 tonne* to the nearest 1/7"
7.2.2 PaymenliPayment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofreinforcement on the basis of unit rate per metric tonquoted in the Bill of Quantities and shall constitute fullcompensation for allthe works related to the item.
The rate quoted include all lead/lift requiredfabrication & placement at/in any floor and at anyper orawrngs.
(lnches)"1.25t8',
3t8"1t2"5/8'3t4"718',1 "1-1tg',1-114'
Weiqht(Lbs/ft.)0.0660.1670.3760.6681.044'1.5032.046
4.176
c03200-5
1.
sEcTtoN - 03300
PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE
SCOPE
The work under this section of the specification conslsts of furnishing allplant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing alloperations in connection with the supply and installation of plain andreinforced concrete work complete in any floor and at any height as perdrawings except where specifically stated in the relevant item of Bill ofQuantities, in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and theapplicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.The scope of this section of specification is covered with detailedspecifications as laid down herein.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Latest editions of the following Pakistan, British and ASTI\.4 Standards arerelevant to these specifications wherever applicable.
2.1 ASTI,,I (AIVERICAN SOCIETY FORTESTING AND MATERIALS)
B 370 Copper sheet and strip for building construction.c 31 Samolino of Concrete CvlindersC 33 Concrete AoqreqatesC 40 Orqanic imourities in sand for concrete.C 87 Effect of oroanic imourities in fine aqoreoates on of mortar.C 88 Soundness of aqoreoates.C 94 Ready mixed Concrete.C 109 Compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars.C 117 Material f iner than No.200 (0.075mm) sieve.C 123 Lioht-weioht Dieces in aoqreqates.C 125 Concrete and concrete aggregates.C 127 Specific gravity and absorption of coarse aggregate.C 12A Soecific oravitv and absorption of fine aoqreqate.C 131 Resistance to abrasion of small size coarse aoqreqates.C 136 Sieve or screen analysis of fine and ooarse aggregate.C 142 Clay lumps and friable particles in aggregates.
a
C 143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.C 144 Aooreqate for masonrv mortar. l,C 150 Portland Cement. I/4,C 156 Water retention bv concrete curino malerial n*lC 171 Sheet material for curino concrete. tt;tC 185 Air content or hvdraulic cement mortar. \\8,'C'188 Densitv of hvdraulic cement. \\C 191 Time of settino of hvdraulic cement bv vicat needle.C 260 Air entraininq admixtures for concrete.C 289 Potential reactivitv of aooreoate.C 309 Liquid membrane-formino comDounds for curino concrete.C 330 Liohtweiqht aooreoates for structural concrete.C 331 Liohtweioht aqqreqates for concrete masonry.C 332 Liqhtuveiqht aooreoates for insulatino concrete.C 494 Chemical admixtures for concrete.C 535 Resistance to abrasion of larqe size coarse agqreqates.C 567 Unit weight of structural lighh'veight concrete.D 75 Aggregate sampling.
D 994 Preformed expansion joint fillerfor concrete.D 1 19 Concrete ioint sealer (hot ooured elastic tvDe).^ 4-7^. Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion joint fil
concrete paving and structural construction.a03300-1
Dr850paving and structural construction.Concrete joint sealer (cold application type).Wire cloth sleeves fortestino ourDoses.Water vapor transmission of materials in sheet form.Materials for use as vapor barrier under concrete slabs.Relative humidity by wet and dry bulb psych'gmeter.
2.2 ACI (At\tERtCAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE)
211.1
214301
Recommended practice for selecting proportions for normal andheavy weightconcrete.Recommended practice for evaluation of strength test result ofconcreteSpecifications for structural concrete for buildings.Recommended practice for measuring, mixing, transporting andplacrngconcrete.Hot weather concreting.Recommended practice for curing concrete.Recommended Dractice for consolidation of concrete.Building code requirements for reinforced concrete.Recommended Dractice for concrete formwork.Pre-cast structural concrete in building.Low pressure steam curing.Fabrication, handling and erection of pre-cast concrete wallpaners.
304
305308309318
512517533
2.3 BRITISH STANDARDS
E11E96
E 337
BSBSBS
BS
410812
882BS 1305BS 188'lBS 3148BS 3837BS 5328BS 3869BS 3927BS 4027BS 8110cP 114cP 116cP 5337
Portland cement, ordinary and rapidTest Sieves.Methods for the samplino andfillers.Coarse and fine aggregates fromBatch Mixer.
hardening.
testinq of
naturalsources.
lvlethods of testinq and samolinq concrete.Tests for water for makinq concrete.Exoanded oolvstvrene boards.Structural Concrete..Rioid exoanded Dolwinvl chloride forthermal insulation.Phenolic foam materials for thermal insulation and buildinqSulohate-resistino Portland cement.Structural use of concrete.Structural use of reinforced concrete in buildinos.Structural use of orecast concrete,The structural use of concrete for retaining aqueous liquids.
3.
In addition, the latest editions of other Pakistan and British Standards, AmericanConcrete lnstitute Standards, American Society for Testing and l\ilaterialsStandards and other Standards as may be specified by the Engineer for specialMaterials and Construction are also relevant.
SUBMITTALS
Suitable templates or instructions or both shall be provided for setting outitems not placed in the forms. Embedded items and other materials formechanical and electrical operations shall have been completed,inspected, tested and approved before concrete is placed. t'!
3 .1
03300-2
€-00t€0
'oteL0 uollces Jo slusu.re.rlnbor eql red se opEul aq lleqs sleuu]qns llvl, l'g
'loour6uf eql Jole oJdde aql roJ Jope4uoC eql ̂q poDruqns aq osle lleqs uolllsod ul sltunlsec-old 6urlcoJa pue 6uruodsue.r] JoJ lesodoJd eql eldues po^oJddeoql ol LuroJuoc ^lculs lleqs sllun lsec-gJd lle :.reaur6u3 or.ll lo le^ordde aqlJOI ltun $e3-an lo oldu-/es e llujgns ol paJlnbal 9q l,eris ]olcelluog aqj 0t e
').1Olrr\
elll Jo luetrlocusLuurog ol Jotd 'roJe elercuoc e6els puoces )iulqsuoN pue lnor6 ouryuuqs uoN Jo uolllsoduroc eql lo le^oJdde lol 6u[sa]pue uorsep xlu urnulldo e)ieu.t 'lsoc u^\o srq le 'llEqs rolce.tluoS etll
'le^oJddB srq ]oj.roau!6u3 s$ ol poDrurqns oq lleqs lelraleLr] loeldur?s aql qlvlr\ 6uolB suo[cnJ]9ur pue suorlepueLuluocal sJernlcenueL\]
loeulouf eql ro luasuoc ue$uM oq] lnor]lrM pelllpoLu eq lou llsqspeutelqo enle^ oql pue sexrur lsol /teurul(s.rd eql oulitlp peulurolapoq lleqs olorcuoc Jo ssElc LlcEg roJ Jolce, uollgeouroc ro ounls eql
'0t! 0 l llsv ue^r6 spoqlau,r aql ql/( aaugpJocce ul peuJolod
eq lleqs aseql pue Jsau!6uf sql Iq paleorlp se slsol roFeJ uollcpdutoc.ro dunls eq] Jeqlro Iq poururJolep oq lleqs elercuoo Jo ,/qlllqe)iJoM,
's)roM oql roJ elalcuoc lenlceeql ourcnpoJd oJolgq uasap xr!! qceo rol 6u[L]^1 ur reeur6uf eLl] uroJ]le odde urelqo lleqs.rolceluog eql rseulouS or.lt ]o le^ordde rol slsallo sllnsal puB elep luB^slsr llB lluqns pue o^rleluoserdqE s/eeu!6u=lo aeueseJd eql ur slerualur slep 8z t v,'!'e]P- qcee s]epul cglsalpue lq0!4,\,\ Iq oulqclBq uorsep xll/! oql qly\^ ocueprocce u! seqcul (q6!qZ L X elo 9) ssqoleq ubrsap xrL! e qcee .rol JapuIIc lssl Z L ornlcelnueyl
'eloJcuocjo sselc qceo rol lq6ro ̂ Iq uorsap xlnl ep!^ord lleqs rope4uoc oql
- Stle sg ql|^'\ aoueprocceur pelsal eq llEqs l|Joleff\ eql jo ^llllqellns oql ol se slslxe lqnop eJaqM
rslsal fu€ururleJd gql ul pgsn seldues aql Jo leql sP arlespue uJolun sl 6ulpeJ6 eql leql olnsuo ol 'pelddns suol 001 &e^e Jo] ecuolseol ]E pelsel eq lleqs sale6el66B euu puB esJeoc eql lo 6urpei6 oql
'Jesu!6uf eql ̂q po oiddefuoleJoqel e u! lno pe!.uec gq llsus slsol eseql elrs-)ro/v\ oql uoJl lueuec,o saldues oql lo leadser ur prepuels eleudoJdde eql Lll!/v\ salBcljlueclsel 'sleruelu! I[qoluuoJ ]P reeulouf ol.l] o] ^ddns lleqs rolce.4uoc sql
'pocuoururocsl lroM e.roloq peurelqo oq lleqs qsrurJ ele.rcuoc Jo saldurBs lenlceJO lEq] Se lle/v\ se s6un P]p doqs jo le o.rddv lsoc u/ro stq le '.ropelluoSoqt Iq poJederd pue peu6rsap eq lleqs s6uf{eJp doqs )jJoau.r.rol (suJol drls'6 s) uo0cnrlsuoc ,o spoqlour lB|cods ]o] pue qsruu oloJcuoc lelceds tol
6e
8.9
1t
9e
,e
ee
4. MATERIALS
4.1 Aggregates
4.1.1 The sources of supply of all fine and coarse aggregates shall besubject to the approval of the Engineer.
4.1.2 All tine and coarse aggregates shall be clean and free from clay,loam, silt and other deleterious matter. lf required, the Engineerreserves the right to have them washed by the Contractor at noadditional expense. Coarse and fine aggregates shall be deliveredand stored separately at site. Aggregates shall not be stored onmuddy ground or where they are likely to become dirty orcontaminated.
4.1.3 Fine aggregate shall be hard coarse sand, crushed stone or gravelscreenings and shall conform to requirements of PS 243 and/or BS882 and/or ASTM C 33. Only fine aggregate of grading zones 1 to3 (BS 882) shall be used.
4.1.4 Coarse aggregate shall be gravel or crush stone of hard, durablematerial free from laminated structure and conforming to PS 243and/or BS 882 and/or ASTI,4 C 33 graded as follows for use in massconcrete as in foundations:
Total Passino B.S. Sieve Percent bv weioht3 in. (76.20 mm) 1001.5 in (38 .10 mm) 95-'t000.75 in. (19.05 mm) 30-700.37 in. (9.52 mm) 10-350.19 in . (4 .76 mm)
Coarse aggregate for all cast-in-place conorete other than massconcrete as for foundations shall be graded with the following limits:
Total Passing B.S. Sieve Percent byweiqht
1 .5 tN (38.10 MM) 1000.75 in. '19.05 mm) 95-'t000.38 in.0 .19 in . (4.76 mm) 0-10
4 .1 .5 Wherever feasible, the nominal maximum size of aggregate forcast- in- place reinforced concrete slabs and other membersshall be 3/4 inch. lf there are difficulties in placing such concretethe maximum size may be restricted to 1/2 inch provided therequirements for strength are satisfied. The gradingrequirements of 112 inch or 3/8 inch down aggregate shall beagreed to with the Engineer as per relevant ASTM/BS standards.
The nominal maximum size of the aggregate for pre-castconcrete s.hall not be larger than one fifth of the narrowestdimension bewee-n sides of forms. or one-third of the depth ofslabs or three-{ourtlrs of the minimum clear distance betweenreinforcing bars or between bars and forms, whichever is least. lr\-Pre-cast columns the nominal maximum size of the aggregafg.
{ I \ . ro33oo-4 fl" z /
_ / ' '..ri1i>-
4.'1.6
4 .1 .7
shall be limited as above but shall not be larger than two-thirds ofthe minimum clear distance between bars.
Coarse aggregates in pre-cast concrete of normal weight may beof one maximum size for all concrete placed in I day whenquantities to be placed are too small to permit economical use ofmore than one mix design.
When a single mix design is so used, the maximum nominal sizeshall be as required for the most critical condition of concreting, inaccordance with the requirements of clause (4.1.6) above.
For use in fireproof concrete, the aggregates shall be fire clayand semi-acidic fine ground. The use of broken fire clay bricks ascoarse aggregate and waste of semi-acidic refractory particles asfine aggregate can be allowed.
4.2
4 .1 .8
CEMENT
4.2.1 the cement shall be fresh and of approved origin andmanufacture. lt shall be one of the following as may be specified bythe Engineer.- Ordinary or Rapid Hardening Portland cements complying
with the reouirements of PS 232 or BS 12 oTASTM C 150.
- Sulphate Resisting Portland/Cement complying with therequirements of PS 612 or BS 4027 or ASTI\,'| C 150.
4.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, ordinary Portland cement complyingwith the requirements of BS 12 shall be used.
4.2.3 For all fair faced concrete it will be necessary to use approvedcement with a view to obtain light shade concrete as approved bythe Engineer.
4.2.4 Only one brand of each type of cement shall be used for concrete inany individual member of the structure. Cement shall be used in thesequence of receipt of shipment, unless otherwise directed.
4.2.5 There shall be sufficient cement at site to ensure that each sectionof work is completed without interruption.
4.2.6 Cement reclaimed from cleaning of bags or from leaky containersshall not be used.
4.2.7 Cemenl shall be used as soon as possible after delivery andcement which the Engineer considers has become stale orunsuitable through absorption of moisture from the atmosphereor otherwise shall be rejected and removed immediately from thesite at the Contractor's expense, Any cement in containersdamaged so as to allow the contents to spill or permitting accessof the atmosphere prior to opening of the container at the time ofconcrete mixing shall be rejected and removed immediately fromthe site at the Contractor's exDense.
4.2.8 The mixing together of differentpermitted.
03300-5
will not be
o 4.3
4.4
4.5
WATER
Only clean water from the city supply, tube well installed at the site orfrom other sources approved by the Engineer shall be used. TheContractor shall and cleaning plant and tools. Where water can b€shown to contain any sugar or an excess of acid, alkalj or salt, theEngineer may refuse to permit its use.
In case of doubt, the Engineer may require that concrete mlxed wlthwater prgposed to be used should not have a compressive strengthlower than 90 percent of the strength of concrete mixed with dlstilledwater.
ADDITIVE
AII additives such as foaming and water proofing agents shall be from amanufacturer approved by the Engineer.
Air Entraining Admixtures shall conform to ASTM C 260. OtherAdmixtures shall conform to ASTM C 494.
NOMINAL CONCRETE I\4IXES
4.5.1 Proportions of Mix
a) Cement and aggregates:
Cement, fine aggregate and the coarse aggregate shall beweighed separately. The proportions of cement to fine aggregateand coarse aggregate shall be adjusted so as to provide theconcrete of the required crushing strength when tested as set outin Table '1.
The Contractor shall regulate and arrange mixing of theingredients for the designed mix of the concrete by weightbatching. The cost of designing the mix shall be borne by theContractor.
Water/Cement ratio:
The quantity of water used shall be just sufficient to producedense concrete of adequate strength and workability for ltsouroose. For all external work and foundations the water/cementratio should not exceed 0,55 for concrete Class A and B.
d) Workability:'Workability' shall be determined by either the slump orcompaction factor tests as directed by the Engineer and theseshall be performed in accordance with the methods given inBS 422 to BS 177 or ASTM C 143.
The slumo or compaction factor for each class of concreteshall be determined during the preliminary Test mixes and thevalue obtained shall not be modified without the wr'ttenconsent of the Engineer. Unless otherwise permitted orspecified, the concrete shall be proportioned and produced tohave a slump of 3 inch or less for consolidation by vibration. A
o l
c)
03300-6
o tolerance of uDto 1 inch above the indicated maximum shall beallowed for individual batches provided the average ior allbatches or the most recent 10 batches tested, which ever isfewer, does not exceed the maximum limit. Concrete of lowerthan usual slump may be used provided it is properly placedand consolidated.
Strength requirements for concrete
a) Concrete made with Portland cement shall comply with thestrength requirements ofTable 1
Strength requirements for Portland concrete with aggregates complyingwith ASTt\,t c31.& c90.
b) The strengths given in Table 1 are based on the assumptionthat average temperature is 20 degree C. Where accuraterecords of temperature are kept, allowance may be made forchange of temperature or the cylinders may be tested at theequivalent maturity.
c) All structural concrete shall conform to BS 5328.
d) Unless otherwise stated, the types of concrete shall beclassified on the basis of compressive strength requirements.The Contractor shall provide lvlix design by weight for eachclass of concrete.
Manufacture 12 test cylinders (6 Dia. x l2) inches inaccordance with the Mix design batching by weight and test 3cylinders each at 7, 14I28 days intervals in the presence ofEngineels Representative and submit all relevant data andresult of tests for approval of the Engineer. The Contractorshall obtain approval from the Engineer in writing for each Mixdesign before producing the actual concrete for the Works.
No payments for producing the l\ilix design, manufacture oftest cylinders and testing shall be paid. The Contractor shallinclude this cost in the relevant item of concrete
PVC WATER STOPi HYDROFOIL
All PVC water stops/hydrofoil shall be central bulb or ribbed type from amanufacturer approved by the'Engineel. The specific gravity of PVC,:':.*1 -'.,
Table 1:
o
o
Class of Concrete
Nominal Ratio is indicative only,Coniractor to prepare mix Designto achieve the cylindrical strengthfor the corresponding clags ofconcrete
Cylinder strength at28 days after mixing& pouring (psi)
1 "1"2 45001 :1 .5 :3 4000
c 1.2"4 3000D 1 i3 :6 2200E (Lean Concrete) 112'.4 1400
4.6
01300-7
Owater stop/hydrofoil shall not be less than 1.37 and full stretch Break cutintensity when tested at normal temperature shall not be less than 1875psi.
The material shall have a modulus of rigidity of 850 psi at +100 C and10,500 psi. at 20'C,
NON-SHRINK GROUT:
Grout for placement under base and bearing plates of machinery andequipment, for grouting anchor bars and dowels and for similar uses shallbe as followsl
4.7.1 Composition
a) Non-shrink grout of less than 1-inch thickness shall consistof one part Portland cement and one part of clean sharpsand conforming to the requirements of thesespecifications and 1:22,000 to 1:15000 part of grainedaluminum powder containing non-polishing agent.
b) Non-shrink grout of 1 lnch or more in thickness shall beproportioned as above except that 1-112 patls of 3/8 inchto 'll4 inch pea gravel shall be added.
c) The above-specified composition may be varied if requiredby the Engineer.
d) Proportioning shall be done by weight.
e) Mixing water shall be proportioned so as to provide a flowable mixture without segregation or bleeding. Dry packingwill not be oermitted.
NON.SHRINK SECOND STAGE CONCRETE GROUT
Nonlshrink second stage concrete grout shall be provided and placed inposition where shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.Non-shrink concrete mix proportion shall be one part cement two partscoarse clean sand and four parts of coarse aggregates meeting therequirements of these specifications and 1:22,000 to 'l:15000 part ofgrained aluminum powder containing non-polishing agent. Proportioningshall be done by weight.
The above-specified composition may be varied if required by theEngineer.
NON-SHRINK CONCRETE GROUT FOR STAIR RAILING COLUMNPOST
Grout for placement in pockets for stair columns shall be non shrink andshall be of strength 10,000 psi.
4.7
4.8
4.9
4 .10 VAPOUR BARRIER
See Section 07165.
EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL4.1'l
03300-8
All materials for use in the expansion joints shall have prior approval ofthe Engineer before placing order for supply.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Except where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer that asupply of properly graded aggregate of uniform quality can be maintainedover the period of the work, the grading of the aggregates shall becontrolled by obtaining the 3/4" maximum nominal size, the different sizesbeing stocked in separate stock piles and recombined in the correctproportion for each batch at the batching plant. The materials shall bestockpiled for a period before use so as to drain nearly to constant moisturecontent (as long as site and other conditions permit, preferably for at leasta day).
The Contractor shall provide and erect (at his cost) a suitable plain, dry,well ventilated, weatherproof and water proof shed of sufficient capacity tostore the cement.
EXECUTION
CAST]N.SITU CONCRETE WORK
6.'1.1 Batching
All cement, including cement supplied in bulk, shall bebatched by weight. A bag of cement may be taken asweighing 110 lb, with the prior approval ofthe Engineer.
Aggregates shall be batched by weight, due allowancebeing made for water content. Aggregates may be batchedby volume through conversion of weigh batching, only withthe prior permission of the Engineer. The apparatus forweight batching may be an integral part of the mixer or aseparate unit of a type approved by the Engineer. lt shall beaccurate within 2olo and shall be checked for accuracy atleast once a week.
The quantity of additives i.e. foaming and water proofingagents etc. shall be as pregcribed by the manufacturer oras directed by the Engineer.
Where the batching plant is of the type in which cement andaggregates are weighed in the same compartment, theaement shall be introduced into the compartment betweentwo sizes of aggregates.
Each batch shall be so charged into the mixer that somewater will enter in advance of the cement and aggregates.Water shall continue to flow for a period, which may extendto the end of the first 25 percent of the specified mixingtime. Controls shall be provided to prevent batchedingredients from entering the mixer before the previousbatch has been completely discharged.
5.1
5.2
6.'to
b)
c)
a)
6.1.2 Nlixing
a) The concrete shall be mixed in an approvedconforming to the requirements of BS 1305.
03300-9
o fitted with the manufacturer's plate stating the rates,oapacity and the recommended number of revolutions perminute and shall be operated in accordance therewith. ltshall be equipped with a suitable charging mechanism andan accurate water-measuring device. The mixer shall becapable of thorowhly combining the aggregates, cementand water into a uniform mass within the specified mixingtime and of discharging the concrete without harmfulsegregation
b) N,4ixing shall continue for the period recommended by themixer manufacturer or until there is apparently a uniformdistribution of the materials and the mass is uniform in
. colour, whichever period is longer.
lf it is desired to use a mixing period of less than 1-112minutes; the Engineeds approval shall be obtained inwrit ing.
c) Controls shall be orovided to ensure that the batch cannotbe discharged until the required mixing time has elapsed.At least three quarters of the required mixing time shalltake place after the last of the mixing water has beenadded.
d) The interior of the mixer shall be free of accumulations thatwill interfere with mixing action. Mixing blades shall bereplaced when they have lost 10 percent of their originalheight.
e) Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediateuse. Concrete which has set shall not be re-temogred, butshall be discarded.
6.1.3 Transporting
a) The concrete shall be transported from the place of mixingto the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable bymeans, which will prevent segregation or loss ofingredients. All skip vehicles, or containers used fortransporting the concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned.
b) During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be transportedin deep containers, on account of their lower ratios ofsufiace area to mass, which reduces the rate of loss ofwater, by evaporation during hot weather and loss of heatduring cold weather.
6.1.4 Placing
a) Before placing of concrete, formwork shall have beencompleted; water shall have been removed; reinforcementshall have been secured in place; expansion joint material,anchors and other embedded items shall have been keptin positioni and the entire preparation shall have beenapproved by the Engineer.
):, i:ff :"i:]:'?^b.:tlfii^I':'"*: l1l"llll "Yll,?,13io.:,,,r,runtil the oround to receive the same has been examiand approved by the Engineer for this purpose.
03300-10
o
b)
c)
o)
n,l
The actual sequence of construction proposed by theContractor shall be subject to the Engineer's approvalbefore construction starts on any part of the structure, andthis sequence shall not be varied without the Engineefsaoorovat.
The concrete after it has been mixed shall be placed assoon as it is practicable. Once the concrete has left themixer, no more water shall be added, although theconcrete may be mixed or agitated to help maintainworkability. The concrete shall not be used if, through anycause, the workability of the mix at the time of placing istoo low {or it 10 be compacted tully and to an acceptablefinish by whatever means available.
The time between mixing and placing should be reduced, ifthe mix is richer or the initial workability of the mix is lowerthan normal, or if a rapid hardening cement or anaccelerator is used, or if the work is e carried but at a hightemperature or exposed to a drying atmosphere. TheContractor shall ensure thai the delay between mixing andplacing including consolidation does not exceed 45minutes under any circumstances. Any concrete whichdoes not satisfy this requirement shall be rejected.
Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in itsfinal position to avoid segregation due to re-handling orflowing. In no circumstances may concrete be railed ormade to flow along the forms by the use of vibrators.
The free fall of concrete shall not be allowed to exceed 6feet. Where it is necessary for the concrete to be loweredmore than this depth, it is not to be dropped into its finalposition, but shall be placed through pipes fed by ahopper. When a pipe is used for placing concrete the lowerend shall be kept inside or close to the freshly depositedconcrete. The size of the oipe shall be not less than g inchin diameter.
Concrete shall be deposited continuously, or in layers ofsuch thickness that no concrete will be deposited onconcrete, which has hardened sufficiently to cause theformation of seams or planes of weakness wjthin thesection. lf a section c€nnot be placed continuously,construclion joints shall be located as shown in theContract Documents or as approved by the Engineer.Placing shall be carried out at such a rate that the concretewhich is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic.Concrete which has partially hardened shall not bedeposited. Temporary spreaders in forms shall be removedwhen the concrete placing has reached an elevationrendering their services unnecessary. They may remainembedded in the concrete only if made of metal orconcrete and if prior approval has been obtained.
Every Contractor whose work isservices or must be supported
01300-11
notice and opportunity to introduce and/or furnishembedded items before the concrete is placed.
6.1.5 Construction Joints
a) Construction Joints not shown on the drawings shall be somade and located as to least impair the strength of thestructure and shall need prior approval of the Engineer. Ingeneral, they shall be located near the middle of the spansof slabs and beams unless a secondary beam intersects amain beam at this point, in which case the joint in the mainbeam shall be offset a distance eoual to twice the width ofthe secondary beam. Joints in walls and columns shall beat the underside of floors, slabs or beams and at the top offootings or floor slabs. Beams, brackets, columns capitals,haunches and drop panels shall be placed at the sametime as slabs. Joints shall be oeroendicular to the mainreinforcement.
b) All reinforcing steel shall be continued across joints. Keysand inclined dowels shall be provided as directed by theEngineer. Longitudinal keys at leasl 1-112 inches deepshall be provided in all joints in walls and between wallsand slabs or footings.
When the work to be resumed on a surface whlch hashardened, such surface shall be roughened in an approvedmanner which will expose the aggregate uniformly and willnot leave laitance, loosened particles of aggregate ordamaged concrete at the surface.
The hardened concrete of construction joints and of jointsbeh|een footings and walls or columns, between walls orcolumns and beams or flooB they support, joints in un-exposed walls and all others not mentioned herein shall bedampened (but not saturated) immediately prior to placingof fresh concrete,
The hardened concrete of joints in exposed work, joints inthe middle of beams, and slabs; and joints in workdesigned to contain liquids shall be dampened (but notsaturated) and then thoroughly covered with a coat ofcement grout similar in proportions to the mortar in theconcrete. The grout shall be as thick as possible on verticalsurfaces and at least 1/2 inch thick on horizontal surfaces.The fresh concrete shall be placed before the grout hasattained initial set.
Where the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitanceshall be removed by scrubbing the wet surface with wire orbristle, and brushed, care being taken to avoiddislodgment of particles of aggregate. The surface shallthen be coated with neat cement grout. The first layer ofconcrete to be placed on this surface shall not exceed 6inch in thickrcss, and shall be well rammed against oldwork, particular attention being paid to corners andspots.
f)
03300-12
g) Stop ends for movement joints or construction joints shallbe made by splitting them along the lines of reinforcementpassing through them, so that each portion can bepositioned and rsmoved separately without disturbance orshock to the reinforcement or the concrete. Stop endsmade of expanded metal or similar material may only beleft permanently in the concrete with prior written approvalof the Engineer. Where such stop ends are used, no metalmay be left permanently in the concrete closer to thesurface of the concrete than the specified cover to thereinforcement.
6.1.6 Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be provided wherever indicated on theDrawings or as directed by the Engineer. In no case shall thereinforcement, corner protection angles, or other embedded itemsbe permitted to extend continuously through any expansion joint.
All expansion joints shall be carefully placed so as not to bedisplaced during concieting. The method of placing the expansionjoints shall be strictly in accordance with the Drawings and/or asdirected by the Engineer.
6.1.7 Placing and Connection of Water-Stops
The water-stops and expansion joint material shall be positionedaccurately and supported against displacement as shown on theorawrngs.
6.1.8 Electric Conduits and Pipes
a)
b )
Electric conduits and other pipes which are planned to beembedded shall not, with their fittings, displace more than'four percent of the area of the cross section of a column onwhich stress in calculated or which is required for fireprotection. Sleeves, conduits, or other pipes passingthrough floors, walls, or beams shall be of such size or insuch location as not to impair unduly the strength of theconstructioni such sleeves, conduits, or pipes may beconsidered as replacing structurally in compression thedisplaced concrete, provided that they are not exposed torusting or other deterioration, are of uncoated or galvanized.Similar samples of in-situ concrete for approval by theEngineer submit two samples, 2 Sq. ft. of each type ofexposed in-situ concrete. Ail in-situ samples will remain atthe construction site.
Sample approvals of pre-cast & in-situ concretel
These samples will be reviewed and approved on the basis ofcolour, dimensional accuracy, and finish of surfaces and generalappearance. The same requirements for sample approval willbe required for both pre-cast and in-situ concrete exposedsurfaces.
Forms
03300-13
I-t*
o
The contractor must maintain the forms unusually tight andbraces to prevent movement, mal-alignment and bleeding thatwill result in sand streaks, honeycomb, fins, stain or unslghtlyaopearance.
lf wood forms are chosen to be used by the Contractor they shallbe constructed of 3/4 inch minimum thickness plywoodconstructed in a fashion to allow many re-uses with all surfacessealed with a polyurethane varnish.
Edges, surfaces and corners of forms shall be sealed to preventloss of any matrix or unequal absorption of water. Corners ofwood forms shall be filled with suitable compound and all contactsurfaces sealed with a polyurethane varnish
Re-use of forms shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Curing:
Curing shall be done in shade (out of direct sunlight) and shall befor a minimum period of 4 days.
Finishing procedures:
"Finishing procedures for f i l l ing air void in smooth finishedconcrete developed by a formed surface":
While the concrete surface is still damp (not more than three daysafter removal of forms), apply a thin coat of medium consistencyneat cement slurry by means of bristle brushes to provide abonding coat within any pits or blemishes in the parent concrete;avoid coating large areas of the finished surface. Before slurryhas dried or changed colour, apply a dry (almost crumbly) groutcomprised of one part cement, of the type and brand of cementused in the original concrete, to one and one-half parts cleanmasonry sand with a fineness modulus of approximately 2.25 andcomplying with the gradation requirements of the ASTMSpecifications C 144. Mix proper amounts of white cement andcolouring with the parent mortar to produce a satisfactory colourmatch with the parent concrete after hardening. Use samplespreviously prepared.
Apply the finishing grout uniformly with damp (neither drippingwet nor dry) pads of coarse burlap approximately 6 inch squareused as afloat. Scrub the grout well into the pits to provide adense mortar in all the imperfections to be filled. Allow the mortarto partially harden, from one iron or steel not thinner Thanstandard steel pipe, have a nominal inside diameter not over 2inch and are spaced not less than three diameters on centers.Except when plans of conduits and pipes are approved by theEngineer, embedded pipes and conduits other than those merelypassing through, shall not be larger in outside diameter than onethird the thickness of the slab, wall, or beams in which they areembedded nor so located as to impair unduly the strength of theconstruction. Sleeve pipes, or conduits of any material notharmful to concrete and within the limitations of this section maybe embedded in concrete with the approval of the Engineerprovided they are not considered to replace the dispconcrete.
03300-14
o
b) All sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required foradjoining work or for its support shall be placed prior toconcreting. Voids in sleeves, inserts and anchor slots shall befilled temporarily with readily removable material to prevent theentry of concrete into the voids.
6.'1.9 'Mass-concrete' shall be placed in layers approximately 18 inch thick.Vibrator heads shall extend into the previously placed layer,
6.1.'10 Consolidation
a) All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, spading, Roding orforking so that the concrete is thoroughly worked around thereinforcement, around embedded items and into comers of forms,eliminating all air or stone pockets which may causehoneycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Internal vibratorsshall have a minimum frequency of 8000 vibrations per minuteand sufficient amplitude to consolidate the concrete effectively.They shall be operated by competent workmen. Use of vibratorsto transport within forms shall not be allowed. Vibrators shall beinserted and withdrawn at points approximately 18 inch apart. Ateach insertion, the duration shall be sufficient to consolidate theconcrete but not excessive so as to cause segregation, generallyfrom 5 to 15 sec. A spare Vibrator shall be kept on the job siteduring all concrete placing operations.
Where the concrete is lo have an as-cast finish, a full surface ofmortar shall be brought against the form by the vibration process,supplemented, if necessary, by spading to wgrk the coarseaggregate back from the formed surface.
lf there is any tendency for the mix to segregate duringconsolidation, particularly if this produces excessive laitance, themix proportions shall be modified to effect an improvement in thequality of the concrete to the satisfaction of the Engineer and inconformity with the provisions of Clause 5.
Vibrator shall not be allowed to contact the formwork for exDosedconcrete sufaces.
Mechanical vibrators shall be of a type suited in the opinion of theEngineer to the particular conditions.
Over-vibration or vibration of very wet mixes is harmful and shouldbe avoided.
b)
c)
o)
6.1.11 Curing and Protection
Beginning immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected frompremature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures and mechanical,injury and shall be maintained with minimum moisture loss at a relativeconstant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cementand hardening of the concrete. The materials and methods of curing snailbe subject to approval of the Engineer.
a )
K4lsexY Y"Ii \3
?>---/303300- l5
o) For concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, one of the followlngp.ocedures shall be applied immediately after completion of placementand finishinq:
Ponding or continuous sprinkling.
Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously wet.
Application of waterproof sheet materials approved by theEngineer.
Application of other moisture-retaining covering as approved.
Applicatiqn of a curing c4mpound conforming to ASTM c 30s.
The compound shall be applied in accordance with the recommendationsof the manufacturer immediately after any water sheen, whlch maydevelop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete surface. lt shallnot be used on any surface against which additional concrete or othermaterial is to be bonded unless it is proved that the curing compound willnot prevent bond, or unless positive measures are taken to remove itcompletely from areas to receive bonded applications.
Moisture loss from surfaces placed against wooden forms or metal fofmsexposed to heating by the sun shall be minimized by keeping the formswet until they can be safely removed. After form removal the concreteshall be cured until the end ol the time prescribed for curing.
curing in accordance with sub-clauge 'a' & 'b' above shall be continuedfor at least 10 days in the case of all concrete except concrete with rapid-hardening Portland Cement for which the period shall be at least 3 days.Alternatively, if tests are made of cylinders kept adjacent to the structureand cured by the same methods, moisture retention measures may beterminated when the average compressive strength has reached 70percent of the minimum specified works cylinder strength.lf one of the first four curing procedures of sub-clause 'b' is used initially, itmay be replaced by one of the other procedures of that sub-clause anytime after the concrete is one day old provided the concrete is notpermitted to become surface dry during the transition.
When the mean daily outdoor temperature is less than 5 degree C (41deg. F) temperature of the concrete shall be maintained beh,veen 10 and20 degrees C (50 to 68 deg. F) for the required curing period of sub-clause 'd'.
When necessary, arangements for heating, covering insulatlon orhousing the concrete work shall be made in advanoe of placement andshall be adequate to maintain the required temperature without injury dueto concentration of heat. Combustion heaters shall not be used during thefirst 24 hours unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of theconcrete to exhaust gasses, which contain carbon dioxide.
During hot weather when necessary, provision for wind-brakes, shadingfor spraying, sprinkling, ponding or wet covering with a light colouredmaterial shall be made, in advance of placement. Such protective
o)
measures shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishiliJ'Jlli'i"',iliiirJi'" "#;\\
. 03300-16 I" )i
s) Changes in temperature of the air immediately adjacent to the concreteduring and immediately following the curing period shall be kept asuniform as possible and shall not exceed 3 deg. C (37 deg. F) in anyone hour or 10 degree C (50 deg. F) in any 24 hour period.
During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from damagingmechanical disturbances, such as load stresses, heavy shock andexcessive vibrations. All finished concrete surfaces shall be protectedfrom damage by construction equipment, materials or methods byapplication of curing procedures, and by rain or running water. Self-supporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way as to over stressthe concrete.
n)
6.2
6.'1.'12 AoDlication of Non-Shrink Grout
a) Concrete surfaces to receive non-shrinking grout shall beroughened, cleaned and dampened.
b) Form shall be provided to retain the grout until sufticiently hard tosuPport itself.
c) Grout shall he poured in place and thoroughly rodded or washed toprevent the formation of voids.
d) After non-shrink grout has received its initial set, it shall be keptdamp for 24 hours.
6.1.13 Placing of Vapour Barrier
Vapour barrier shall be laid in posjtion wherever shown on the Drawings
The material shall be supplied in rolls and laid by rolling over the preparedsurface at the levels and position in the areas shown on the Drawings.Where joint is necessary at the side or end of a sheet, this shall be adouble weld folded joint made by placing thq edges together and foldingover twice continuously taking the top edge prior to concreting. TheContractor shall protect the film sheets from damages during laying andsubsequent operations and shall replace at his own cost all damaged filmsheets to the satisfaction of the Enqineer.
WORKS IN EXTREI\iIE WEATHER
6.2.'1 lJnless adequate protection is provided and approval is obtained from theEngineer, concrete shall not be placed during rain.
Rainwater shall not be allowed to increase the mixing water nor todamage the surface finish.
6.2.2 When the temperature of the suffounding air is expected to be below 5deg. C during placing or within 24 hours thereafter, the temperature of theplastic concrete, as placed, shall be no lower than 13 deg. C for sectionsless than 12 inch in any dimension nor 10 deg. C for any other sections.
When necessary concrete material should be heated before mixing andcarefully protected after placing, in general, heating or mixing water aloneto about 60 deg. C may be sufficient for this purpose. Dependence should ,'.tx{
be placed on salt or other chemicals for the prevention of freezing. Nd 7
03300-17
6.3
frozen material or materials, containing ice shall be used. All concretedamaged by frost shall be removed. lt is recommended that conoreteexposed to the action of freezing weather should lave entrained air andthe water content', of the mix should not exceed 5.5 gallon/bag ofcement.
lf water or aggregate is heated above 38 deg, C the water shall becombined with the aggregate in the mixer before cement is added.Cement shall not be mixed with water or with mixtures of water &aggregate having a temperature greater than 38 deg. C.
6.2.3 During hot weather, the temperature of the concrete as placed shall notbe so high as to cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set, or ooldloints and should not exceed 32 deg. C. For massive concrete, thistemperature should not exceed 21 degree C. When the temperature ofthe concrete exceeds 32 degree C, precautionary measures approved bythe Engineer shall be put into effect. When the temperature of the steel isgreater than 50 deg. C, steel forms and reinforcement shall be sprayedwith water just prior to placing the concrete. The ingredients shall becooled before mixing, or flaked ice or well crushed ice of a size that willmelt completely during mixing may be substituted for all part of themixing water if, due to high temperature, low slump, flash set or coldjoints are encountered.
Other precautions recommended by ACI Standard 305-72 shall also beadopted.
PRE.CAST CONCRETE
Pre-cast concrete units shall be fair faced or/and textured as per approveddesign/pattern, cast to the sizes and dimensions as indicated on the Dfawings.The concrete used for pre-cast units shall conform to the specifications laid downfor cast in situ reinforced cement concrete unless otherwise required and directedby the Engineer.
Pre-casting platform of the size and at the location approved by the Engineer shallbe constructed. The concrete in one ore-cast unit shall be placed in oneoperation, in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
The material and design of formwork and the method of pre-casting the units shallbe approved by the Engineer. The erection/installation and removal of the pre-cast units from the pre-casting platform shall not be permitted until and unlessthey are properly cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer.All pre-cast units shall be smoothly finished to the required Iines, grades, angles,etc. Holes, grooves, pockets and hooks shall be provided as shown and/or asdirected by the Engineer. The units shall be properly stacked on a platformwithout causing any cracks and damages. Curing of all the pre-cast units shall bedone in accordance with the relevant BS code/approval of the Engineer.
6.3.1 Erecting Pre-cast Units
All the pre-cast units shall be transported and erected into position in amanner as approved by the Engineer.
6.3.2 Liftinq Beams
The Contractor shall us lifting beams at his own cost for erecting pre-castmembers where the Engineer so directs. Lifting beams shall be suppland erected by the Cc tractor, at his own cost, at all points where Io
03300-18
Inecessary for maintaining the plant but is inaccessible to mobile cranes or,alternatively, covered by overhead traveling cranes. The Contractor,however, is to supply the trolleys and erect them on the lifting beams, andto test operation of installed equipment.
CEIiIENT CONCRETE PAVEMENTS
Full co-operation shall be given to trades like electrical, mechanical and otherservices. For all concrete work relevant specifications of this section shall apply
6.4.1 Side Forms and Construction
Side forms shall be of steel or any other suitable material and of a designas approved by the Engineer.
In general, only materials and methods that have proved theiracceptability by past performance will be considered. All form.shall beconstructed so that they can be removed without hammering or pryingagainst the concrete.
Horizontal joints in the forms t^/ill not be permitted. Forms shall bethoroughly cleaned and oiled with linseed/mineral oil shall be given twocoats of niter-cellulose lacquer each time they are used.
The forms shall be set on a thoroughly compacted base true to line andlevel and firmly secured in position by appropriate methods. Conformitywith the alignment and levels shown on the Drawings shall be checked asand when required by the Engineer. Where necessary corrections shallbe made immediately before placing the concrete; where any form hasbeen disturbed it shall be reset and rechecked.
Pavements shall be constructed in panels of sizes as shown on theDrawings. The panels shall be laid alternately, the adjoining panels beingconcreted when the side forms are struck and the jointing materialsplaced, inspected and approved by the Engineer. Each panel is to beconcreted in one operation and no interruptions shall be permitted duringthe operation. The concrete shall be tipped from the trolley slightly inadvance of the working place and then shoveled into positign. Thespreading shall be carried out very carefully. Compactjon shall be doneby means of vibro-compactors of approved surface vibrators. lf a vibro-compactor is used, if shall be operated on the concrete and will not beallowed to strike or displace the forms. The spreading and compacting ofthe successive layers shall proceed without interruptions and as quicklyas practicable so as to ensure that the slab is monolithic throughout itsdepth.
The wearing surface shall be laid while the base concrete is still wet andscreeded io line and level. When the initial set takes place the surfaceshall be troweled smooth with a steel trowel to Drovide a dense closedsurface.
All the joints shall be carefully formed as shown on the Drawings or asdirected by the Engineer. The joint filler together with performed grooveshall provide complete separation of adjacent slabs. The joints shall all besealed with bitumen as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the
6.4
Engineer.
03300-19
o
6.4.2 Protection and Curing
- GeneralRequirements:
Concrete shall be protected adequately from injurious action bysun, rain, flowing water and mechanical injury, and shall not beallowed to dry form the time it is placed until the expiry of theminimum curing periods specified hereinafter. Water curing shallbe accomplished by keeping the surface of the concretecontinuously wet by covering with water or with approved watersaturated covering. Where wood forms are left in place for'curing,they shall be kept sufficiently damp at all times to preventopenings at the joints and drying out of the concrete. All portionsof the structure shall be kept moist for the .full curing periods,specified hereinafter.
When liquid membrane curidg compound is used the surface ofthe concrete shall be protected form traffic or other abrasiveaction, which may break the membrane, for the full period ofcuring. The membrane curing compound snail be colourless ollight coloured and shall be approved by the Enginee. and shalcomply with ASTM Designation C 309.
- Curing Periods
The curing period shall be at least 10 days, or as directed by theEngineer.
- Removal of Forms
The Contractor shall exercise great care in avoiding damage tojoints, arises, dowel bars etc., while removing the forms. Underno circumstances will the use of pry bars between the forms andoavement be permitted. Side forms shall not be removed until atleast 40 hours have elapsed from the time of completing theconcreting of the slab, which they contain. In no case shall formsbe removed until the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permitremoval without damage to the concrete. Concrete work shall beprotected from injury resulting from the storage or movement ofmaterial during construction.
6.4.3 Finishing
All unformed surfaces shall be finished with a wood float except asotherwise specified. Visible vertical surfaces shall have all projectionsand irregularities removed. The entire sudace shall be rubbed if requiredby the Engineer, with a No. '16 carborundum brick, or other abrasive untileven, smooth and of uniform appearance, and shall be shed clean.Plastering of surface, application of cement or other coating will not bepermitted.
All exposed corners shall be chamfered,unless otherwise mentioned or shown onEngineer. Concrete surfaces which will beshall be screeded without floating.
1"x 1" (2.5 cms x 2.5 cms)the plans or directed by thecovered with other materials
03300-20
6.4.4 Spreading, finishing and floating of concrete in pavements
General Requirements
The striking off, compacting and floating of concrete shall bedone by mechanical methods, if approved by the Engineer.Where the Engineer determines that it is impracticable to usemechanical methods manual. methods of spreading, finishing andfloating may be used on pavement lines as indicated on theDrawings.
Mechanical l\.4ethods.
The concrete shall be spread uniformly between the forms,immediately after it is placed, by means of an approved spreadingmachine. The spreader shall be followed by an approved finishingmachine equipped with two oscillating or reciprocating screeds.The spreading machine or the finishing machine shall be equippedwith vibrating equipment that will vibrate the concrete for the fullpaving width. Internal vibrators shall be used adjacent to thelongitudinal edge of the pavement. These vibrators shall beattached to the rear of the spreading machine or to the finishingmachine. Vibrators shall not rest on view pavements or side formsor contract with any dowel bars and the arrangement of powersupply to the vibrators shall be such that when the motion ofmachine is stopped, vibration shall cease. The rate of vibrationshall be not less than 8000 vibrations per minute. The concreteshall be spread to full width before being struck off and compactedso that the surface will conform to the finished grade and cross-section as shown on the plans and at the same time leavesufficient material for the floating operation. The spreading &finishing machine shall move over the pavement as many timesand at such intervals as may be required by the Engineer toensure thorough compaction.
Except as otherwise specified, after the pavement has beenstruck off and compacted, if shall be finished with an approvedlongitudinal float. The Contractor may use a longitudinal floatcomposed of one or more cutting and smoothing floatssuspended from and guided by rigid frame. The frame shall becarried by four or more visible wheels riding on and constantly incontact with the forms.
The contractor may use a longitudinal float which works with asawing motion, while held in a floating position parallel to the roadcentre line and passing gradually from one side of the pavementto the other. lvlovements ahead, along the centre line of the road,shall be in successive advances of not more than half the lenothof the lloat.
Instead of using other type of longitudinal float a single machine,which will affect satisfactory compaction, finishing and floatingmay be used. This machine may be towed by a spreading
achine. This combination, finishing floating machine shall beluipped with screeds and vibrators as hereinafter specified for
ing and finishing machine. Floating shall be accomplishedby means of a non-oscillating float held in a suspended position/_ . - ,form the frame. _ | \\
ojioo-2I frt" I ], ' ' . / /
lf any spreading, finishing and floating equipment is notmaintained in full working order or if the equipment as used bythe Contractor proves inadequate to obtain the results prescribed,such equipment shall be improved or satisfactory equipmentsubstituted or added at the direction of the Engineer
Manual Methods
When striking-off and compacting by manual methods ispermitted, the concrete shall be leveled and then struck-off tosuch an elevation that, when properly compacted, the surface willconform to the r€quired grcde and cross-section. The strike boardshall be moved foMard with a combined longitudinal andtransverse motion, the manipulation being such that neither endsis raised from the side forms during the process. While striking off,a slight excess of concrete shall be kept in front of the cuttingedge at all times. Prior'" tamping, the concrete along the formsshall be thoroughly spaded or vibrated. The entire area ofpavement shall be tamped or vibr€ted a manner that will ensuremaximum compaction. The concrete shall be brought to therequired grade and shape by the use of a tamper consisting of aheavy plank whose length exceeds the width of the pavement by 'l
foot or by the use of a mechanical vibrating unit spanning the fullwidth of the spread. The tamper shall be constructed with properlytrussed roads to stiffen it and prevent sag and shall be shod with aheaw strip or metal for a tamping surface. The tamper shall bemoved with a combined tamping and longitudinal motion, raisjng itform side form and dropping it so that the concrete will bethoroughly compacted and rammed into place. A small surplusmaterial I is com acted and rammed into front of the tamper orvibrating unit and taming or vibrating shall continue until the truecross-section is obtained reed and the mortar flushes slightiy tothe surface.
on grades in e. excess of 5 percent wheie hand methods arepermitted, a liftle strike board shallfollow at a speed of 25 ft to 50ft per hour back of the heavy strike board, and shall be used in thesame way, so as to remove waves caused by flow of concrete.
Where hand tamping is permitted, not less than two strike boardsor tamoers shall be used for oroduction in excess of 350 Cu.ft.After the ooncrete has been compacted, it shall be smoothedwith a wooden float where necessary, as directed by theEngineer.
Longitudinal Floating
Manual floats shall be at least '12 ft. ln length not less than 6inches in width and shall be properly stiffened to prevent bendingor warping. In using the float, it shall be held parallel to centre lineof the pavement at all time and shall be moved laterally acrossthe pavement from one side or edge to the other until all highreas are cut down and floated into depressions, leaving a
smooth and true to grade. Batch transverselongitudinal manual float shall lap the proceeding
ce that isof the
ssage by half.
03300-22
€z-00f€0
l/orsuedxa lp JBq le^'\op gql Jo pua euo Juecuqnl pa ordde ueql!/r poteolJqnl eq lleqs sleq oqt bupeds parJ|cads eql le peoedeq lleqs Jolouerp poJlnbal lo sJeq lg/t^op 's6u/ti\e]c oql uo u^loqsaioqM lno perlcund Jo pellup aq ^loleJncce lleqs sleq la^opeql olepoururocce ol soloH qlpr^4 lurof eql se sseu)ictql suesoql Jo eq ol sr rollrl oql lueurdrnbQ ouqelcuoc orll Jo aoessed oql6uunp uo4Burorap lslseJ pue luloleql ur pellelsur ^uopeJslgs aqol l! elqeue ol ̂llpl6lJ luorollJns Jo luole rnbe Joord{oJ puB elqeJnp'olqlsssJduroc 'cqsela pa^ordde ue ro '.tslll} lulol uolsuedxo lloxollLllr/vl pell[ eq o] ere s]utol llv oJnsodxe oie^os ol ]cafqns ellsleulsnpu! Ilnp ^^eoq pue saleurlc leerdo4 loq Jol 66'Z-SA r.ll!./v\ourllduroc sluoue ed algjcuoc JoJ punoduroc oulleos pe^orddeJo ueuJnlrq pe.rnod lorl aq lleqs punoduog ourleos slurol elll
'susp.req alo.rcuo9oqt aJojoq sburMeJc oql uo u/v\or.ls sB snlpeJ e ol popuno./ eqlleqs Eurot lle lo Jgsr.r eLlI '6ulleas slr ol Joud leueleur pJeq Jaqloro auols 'slJqep lsnp lle to poueop ̂lqonoJol]l eq lleqs eseqcpeu.rJoJord a aql s6ur^,\etc 9r1l uo ur orls se eseq9 poLuroJordepl r.lcul t/e s uJ los punoduroc ourleos 6urpn4xa-uou poutcedseql qllM poleos oq lleqs slurot aql 'sqe9 yece[pe lo uo\eftdasaplduJo. apr^old lpqs aAooto pewJoleJd eql qI^ reqlaoolrell[ ]u!ol oqf uot]lsod leluozuoq pue lecu€^ qnJl u! IlquresseluloloJlue aql doo)i ol ilqssageu se 'pesn eq lleqs secl^op Jaqlo.ro sla)ce.rq 'so)els qcns 's"llqurasse lurol pue sreq leMop sptPoelsV .reeu!6u3 oql Iq popalrp se Jo s6u ̂plc eql Uo u/r^oqs sepourJol ̂llnlaJec oq lleqs slurol uorpeJluoc puB uolsuedxa oql lV I
sluror uo4ce.rluoS pue uorsuedxS
'JOl9e4uO9 Oql Jo asuedxeerll ]B peceldeJ pug pe^oursJ oq lleqs Jo '6urBnc Iq pepejroceq lleqs qeur 8/L ueql orour lo e6pa oullsel sLll uro]j uollelre^e s/roqs qc!q/!'\ luauta^gd oql lo uollod ^uv o6pe lqoreJls 'u-01 p qll/vr polsol eq ure6e lleqs luaura ed qql ]o acej]ns oql 'l
uo 6ur)leM lrur.red ol ̂lluslcuJns pauep.req seq oleJcuoc eql JaUV
buBsef e6pf lq6reIS puocss'asn
lo our[ eql le lsrou] eq lleqs ll aleJcuoc pguapJBr]lo sbu[eoc uro.]l ea.4 ]dgl pue ueelc eq lleqs delng uoqcaJlpleurpnllouol I ur lusl-lto ed oql lo ogel.rns eql 6uole pe66erpoq lleqs lo lnq eql qels eq) lo r.llp!,w\ oql ueql oJou|u t qlouole 6ur^eq pue epl/{ ll 0L o} } g (ss^uec eseoc) depnq Jo du}se qlrM pa66erp aq lleqs ecE/ns eql'cl}Seld-uou sotloceq eleJguoceql eJoFq lsnl pue ecegns eql uro4 paJeoddeslp seq laeqsrelB,rv\ eql ]o lsour uaq^\ pue 6u|sol o6pe lqorElls lsr[ eq] Jeuv
6ul66eJo (se^ueC ssJeoC) deln€'rnoluoc scelns pernoer gLll
seq luoure^ed oqt l[un onurluoc lleqs 6uqeo[-e] pue 6ul]sol o6polq6reJls eq1 paqsrurJgJ puB u/v\op pelJo^\ oq lleqs seaJe q6!H'peqslulJ puB pepBdtloc uo )icn4s oq lleqs qcrq^/\ eloJcuoc qso.4LII^ pellu ̂lelerpeluul! eq lleqs puno, suolssordop ̂uv
"opa lqolBJls (eolau|g xo.ldde) U-Ot e qU,\ polsal eq llELls lueue^edeql lo eeJe aJlue eq] 6ulleo[ leu[ bumollol ^lalerpsur.ul
ieLLorl
bulsol e6p: lq6rets lsrH
joints shall be provided with a closely fitting sleeve 3 inch long,oonsisting of bitumen coated plastic or other approved material topermit expansion. A loose plug 1 inch deep of approvedcompressible filling material shall be inserted into the sleeve asshown on the Drawings at the end of the bar. All the dowel barsshall be mild steel bars of the size shown on the Drawings andshall conform to the requirements as specified in the section'Concrete.
Contraction joints shall be provided as shown on the Drawings.
The assembly and method of con$tructing the expansionjoints/contraction joints shall be subject to the approval of theEngineer.
ln general all PVC water stops/hydrofoil shall be placed in thecenter of the structural member. Each piece of the water stop-hydrofoil shall be of maximum practicable length. An ordinarysharp knife saw or any other sharp tool can be used to cut thewater stop. Joints at inter sections and at ends of pieces shall bemade in the manner most appropriate to the material being used.Joints shall develop effective water tightness fully equal to that ofthe continuous water stop material and shall permanently retaintheir flexibility. For straight line connection melting method ofoonnection can be used by passing two water stops intended foroonnection against a heated iron or copper sheet. When they aremelted, the two are combined.
Afterjoining, the water stop should be allowed to cool.
For all other connections such as T-type or L-type, the weldingmethod of joining should be used. Welding rod of same materialas the water stop shall be used. The welding rod & the water stopshall be heated & melt at the same time, by means of heated air
. jefting from the hotjet gun.
TEST OF CONCRETE OUALITY
The Contractor shall prgvide samples of concrete for testing at theEngineefs direction. Proper facilities shall be provided for making andcuring the test specimens. A competent person thall be employed by theContractor whose first duty shall be to supervise all stages in thepreparation and placing of the concrete. All test specimens shall be madeat site and tests carried out under his direct supervision.
Cylindef test shall be performed in accordance with the discretion of theEngineer. The standard of acceptance for preliminary and works testsshall be as given below.
The usual test for concrete with maximum size of aggregate uplo 1-112inch is the 6 inch cylinder tested in compression. Details of the testing aregiven in ASTM C 39.
For all grades of concretei preliminary cylinder strength test with themixes and materials to be used shall be performed in accordance withASTI\il C31 before the work is begun and subsequently whenever anychange is to be made in the materials or in the proportions of materials tobe used, or as required by the Engineer. The strengths shall comply withthe standard of quality specified in accordance with Table 1 in
03300-24
I l
7.2
7.3
1 .4
?
accordance with ASTI\,4 C 39. The cost of such testing shall be borne bythe Contractor.
7.5 Test sample shall be taken at the mixer or as directed by the Engineer.The test soecimens shall be cured in accordance wKh ASTM C 3'1.
Records shall be kept of all test cylinders identifying the mix used thesection of work for which the concrete was used and the date poured.
7-6 Five test cylinders are to be tested for compressive strength as specifiedin ASTM C 39. These tests shall be carri€d out at site or in a laboratoryapproved by the Engineer. Two cylinders shall be tested at the age ofseven days and three at 28 days and the strengths determined are tocomply with the standard of quality specified. The laboratory tests shall becarried out by an independent organization, such as Government Testing
' Laboratory or such other undertakings approved by the Engineer. Theoriginal test reports received from the above authorities should besubmitted to the Engineer.
7.7 For all grades of concrete, the appropriate strength requirement shall beconsidered to be satisfied if none of the strengths ofthe cylinders is belowthe specified cylinder strength or if the average strength of the threecylinders is not less than the specified cylinder strength and the differencebetween the greatest and the least strength is not more than 20% ol theaverage.
7.8 When the results of works cylinder tests show that the strength of anyconcrete is below the minimum specified, the Engineer may giveinstructions for the whole or part of the work concerned to be removedand replaced at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall bearthe cost of any other part of his, or any other contractor's work, which has
. to be removed and replaced as a result of the defective concrete. lf anyconcrete is held to have failed, the Engineer may order the proportions ofthat class of concrete to be changed in order to provide the specifiedstrength.
FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES
8,1 GENEML
8.'1.'1 After removalofforms, the surfaces of concrete shall begiven oneor more of the finishes specified below in locations designated bythe Contract Documents.
8.1.2 When linishing is required to match a small sample lurnished tothe Contractor, the sample finish shall be reproduced on an areaat least 100 Sq. ft. in an inconspicuous location designated by theEngineer before proceeding with the flnish in the specifiedlocation.
Allowable deviations from plumb or level and from the alignmentprofile grades and djmensions are specified in clause '10.
Tolerances for concrete construction and defined as tolerancesthat are to be distinguished from irregularities in finish asdescribed herein. The finish requirements lor concrete surlacesshall be as generally specified in this clause and as indicated onthe Drawings. Finishing of concrete surfaces shall be perfoonlv bv workmen who are skilled in concrete finishes.
8.
8 .1 .3
03300-25
8.2
The Contractor shall keep the Engineer advised as to whenfinishing of concrete will be performed. Unless inspection iswaived in each specific case, finishing of concrete shall bperformed only in the presence of the Engineer. Concretesurfaces will be toted by 'the Engineer where necessary todetermine whether surface irregularities are within the limitsherein after specified. Surface irregularities are classified asabrupt or gradual.
Offsets caused by displaced or misplaced form sheeting orsections, or otherwise defective form limber will be considered asabrupt irregularities, and will be tested by direct measurements.All other irregularities will be considered as gradual irregularities,and will be tested by use of a template, consisting of a straightedge or the equivalent thereof for curved surfaces. The length ofthe template will be 6.5 ft. for testing of formed surfaces and 10fl. for testing of unformed surfaces.
AS.CAST FINISHES
Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings the classes offjnish shall apply as follows:
8.2.1 Rough form finish:
No selected form facing materials shall be specified for roughform finish surfaces. Tie holes and defects shall be patched. Finsexceeding 1/4" in height shall be chipped off or rubbed off.Otherwise, surfaces shall be left with the texture imparted by theforms.
8.2.2 Fair face finish:
Fair face finish applies to concrete formed surfaces, theappearance of which is considered by the Engineer to be ofspecial importance, such as surfaces of structures prominentlyexposed to public inspection. Surfaces of concrete structuresrequiring fair face finish is shown in the Drawings. Surfaceirregularit ies, measured as described in sub-clause 8.2.1, 'Rough
form finish', shall not exceed 1/4 inch for gradual irregularities and1/8 inch for abrupt irregularities, except that abrupt irregularitieswill not be permitted at construction joints. Abrupt irregularities atconstruction joints and elsewhere in excess of 1/8 inch andgradual irregularities in excess of 1/4 inch shall be reduced bygrinding so as to conform to the specified limits. Abruptirregularities at construction joints shall be ground on level of '1 to20 ratio of height to length.
Unless otherwise approved, repair of imperfections in formedconcrete shall be completed within 24 hours after removal offorms. The form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard,uniform texture on the concrete. lt may be plywood, temperatedconcrete-form-grade hardboard, metal, plastic paper, or otherapproved material capable of producing the desired fair facefinish. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly andsymmetrical, with the number of seams kept to the practicalminimum. lt shall be supported by studs or other backingqf preventing excessive deflection. Material with raised grainsurfaces. worn edge, patches, dents, or other defects whi
03300-26
a imoair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used. Tieholes and defects shall be patched. All ins shall be completelyremoveo.
8.2.3 Architectural Finish Concrete:
Architectural finish to concrete formed surfaces as shown on theDrawings is required by the Engineer where the architecturalappearance of surfaces of structures exposed to public view ls ofspecial consideration and importance. The Contractor shall useapproved special material for formwork and design the forms inconformity with the specified architectulal patterns, textures and
.finishes in order to obtain fir6t class architectural finish on formedconcrete surface without any defect, irregularities, blemishes,
. imperfectionsandencrustation's
. Samples
1. Sub to the Engineer a minimum of wo units or portions ofunits of each pre-cast item required. Each pair of sampleswhen accepted will describe the allowable- limits beh,veenwhich variations can be acceptable.
2. Similar samples of in-situ concrete for approval by theEngineer submit t\,vo samples, 2 Sq, ft. of each type ofexposed in-situ concrete. All in-situ samples will remainat the construction site.
Sample approvals of pre-cast & in-situ concrete:
These samples will be reviewed and approved on the basis ofcolour, dimensional accuracy, and finish of surfaces and generalappearance. The same rcquirements for sample approval willbe required for both pre-cast and in-situ concrete exposedsurfaces.
Forms
The contractor must maintain the forms unusually tight andbraces to prevent movement, mal-alignment and bleeding thatwill result in sand streaks, honeycomb, fins, stain or unsightlyaooearance.
lf wood forms are chosen to be used by the Contractor theyshall be constructed of 3/4 inch minimum thickness plywoodconstructed in a fashion to allow many re-uses with all surfacessealed with a polyurethane varnish.
Edges, surfaoes and corners of forms shall be sealed to preventloss of any matrix or unequal absorption of water. Corners ofwood forms shall be filled with suitable compound and all contactsurfaces sealed with a polyurethane varnish.
Re-use of forms shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Curing:
Curing shall be done in shade (out of direct sunlight) and shall befor a niinimum period of 4 days. ffr.ii
"';;;;-:li)i
03300-27
Finishing procedures:
"Finishing procedures for filling air void in smooth finishedconcrete developed by a formed surface":
While the concrete surface is still damp (not more than three daysafter removal of forms), apply a thin coat of me.dium consistencyneat cement slurry by means of bristle brushes to provide abonding coat within any pits or blemishes in the parent concrete;avoid coating large areas of the finished surface. Before slurryhas dried or changed colour, apply a dry (almost crumbly) groutcomprised of one part cement, of the type and brand of cementused in the original concrete, to one and one-half parts cleanmasonry sand with a fineness modulus of appfoximately 2.25 andcomplying with the gradation requirements of the ASTNiISpecifications C '144. N/ix proper amounts of white cement andcolouring with the parent mortar to produce a satisfactory colourmatch with the parent concrete after hardening. Use samplespreviously prepared.
Apply the finishing grout uniformly with damp (neithet dripping wetnor Pry) pads of coarse burlap approximately 6 inch square usedas afloat. Scrub the grout well into the pits to provide a densemortar in all the imperfections to be filled. Allow the mortar topartially harden, from QX to two hours, depending upon theweather. Avoid direct hot sunlight. if the air is hot and dry, keepthe concrete surface damp during this period using a fine fogspray. When the grout has hardened sufficiently so it can bescraped from the surface with the edge of a steel trowel withoutdamaging the grout from the small pits of holes, cut off all that canbe removed with a trowel without delay; next allow the surface todry thoroughly and rub it vigorously with clean, dry burlap tocompletely remove any dried grout. No visible.film of grout shallremain after this rubbing. Complele the entire cleaning andgrouting operation for the grout to dry after it has been cut with thetrowel, so it can be wiped off clean with the burlap.
On the day after the repair work, the concrete surfaces shouldagain be wiped off clean with dry burlap to remove anyinadvertent dust; leave no built-up surfaces on the parentsurfaces. Employ, if possible, a used piece of burlap containingold hardened mortar to act as a mild abrasive. Use of fineabrasive stone if needed to remove any remaining built-up filmwithout breaking through the surface lilm of the original concrete.Such scrubbing should be light and sufficient only to removeexcess material without working up a lather of mortar orchanging the texture of concrete.
Following the final bagging or stoning operation, provide athorough wash down with stiff bristle brushes to remove allextraneous materials and spray the concrete surface with a finefog spray periodically to maintain a continually damp condition forat least three days after application of the pit repair grout.
Rust Stains:
All rust stains are to be removed employing the following'procedure:
03300-28
I
The rust stain shall be soaked for 10 minutes with a solution of0.055 lb. of sodium citrate in 0.33 lb. water (brushing the solutionat short intervals is satisfactory), Then the surface is sprinkledwith crystals of sodium hydrosulfite and covered with a paste ofFuller's Earth and water. On a vertical surface, the paste isapplied with a trowel, with the crystals jirst sprinkled on the pasteso they will be in direct contact with the stain. The paste isallowed to dry for 10 minutes then scraped off and the treatmentrepeated if necessary.
. Repairing of Formed Surfaces:
It is the intention of Specification to require form mixture ofconcrete and workmanship so that concrete sufiaces, whenexposed, will require no patching. Any concrete which is notformed as required and conforming to approved samples or forany reason is out of alignment or level or shows a defectivesurface, shall be removed from the job by the Contractor at hisexpense unless the Engineer grants permission to repair thedefective area. Permission to patch any such area shall not beconsidered a waiver of the Engineeis right to require a completeremoval of defective work if the repair does not, in his opinion,satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the surface.The Engineer shall be the sole judge of acceptability ofao0earance,
8.3 FINISHES OF UNFORMED SURFACES
8.3.1 Monolithic Concrete Floor Finish
Where monolithic concrete floor finish is shown on the Drawings,placing shall proceed continuously forthe full thickness of the courseor RCC slab without change in concrete mix. Mixing water shall bethe minimum required for proper area shall be kept damp for 7 days.l\4etal tools shall not be used in finishing a patch in a formed wail,which will be exposed.
9.2.5 Where as-cast finishes are specified, the quantity of patched areashall be strictly limited. The combined total of patched areas in as-cast surfaces shall not exceed 2 so ft. in each 1000 so.ft. of as-castsurface. This is in addition to form tie patches, if the project designoermits ties to fall within as-cast areas.
9.2.6 Any patches in as-cast architectural concrete shall beindistinguishable from surrounding surfaces. The mix formula forpatching mortar shall be determined by trial to obtain a good colourmatch with the concrete when both Datch and concrete are curedand dry. After initial set, surfaces of patches shall be dressedmanually to obtain the same texture as surrounding surfaces.
9.2.7 Patches in architectural concrete surfaces shall be cured for 7 days.Patches shall be protected from premature drying to the same extentas the body of the concrete.
9.3 TIE AND BOLT HOLES
fter being cleanedand thoroughly dampened, the tie and bolt holes shalpatching mortar. lf architectural appearance requifilled solid with
03300-29
c these holes may be filled partially creating the desired round clear holespattern on surfaces exposed to view.
9.4 PROPRIETARYIVIATERIALS
lf permitted or required by the Engineer, proprietary compounds foradhesion or as patching ingredients may be used in lieu ol or in addition tothe foregoing patching proc€dures. Such compounds shall be used inaccordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with prior approvalof the Engineer.
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
Where tolerances are not stated in ihe specifications or drawings for anyindividual structure or feature thereof, maximum permissible deviations fromestablished lines, grades and dimensions shall conform to the following. TheContractor is expected to set and maintain concrete forms so as to ensurecomplete work within tolerance limits. These allowable tolerances shall not relievethe Contractor of this responsibility for conect fitting of indicated materials. Thesetolerances are not cumulative.
10.1 Variation from the plumb (orthe specified batter for inclined walls.)
10.1.1 In the l ines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and in arrises:
10 .
a
In any '10 feet of length or height
In any storey or 20 feet length
' l\,4aximum for the entire length orheight.
10.'1.2 Fot exposed corner columns, controlconsPicuous l ines.In any bay or 20 feet maximum
lvlaximum for the entire length
1/4 inch
3/8 inch
1 inch
joint grooves and other
114 inch
112 inchor height
10.2 Variation from the level orfrom the grades
'10.2.1 In floors, ceilings, beams soffits andremoval of supporting shores.
indicated on the drawings.
in arrises measured before
In any '10 feet of length
In any bay or in any 20 feet length
lvaximum for the entire length
For exposed lintels, sills, parapets,consPicuous l ines.
'114 inch
318 inch
3/4 inch
horizontal grooves and
03300-30
rI
t ln any bay or 20 feet length
lvlaximum for the entire length
114 inch
112 inch
'l l4lnch
1 /2 inch
1 12 inch
z tncn
o
10.3 Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan andrelated position of columns, walls and partitions.
In any bay or 20 feet of length 112 inch
Maximum for the entire length 1 inch
10.4 Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves, flooropenings and wall openings. !1/4 inch
'10.5 Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in thethickness of slabs and walls.
Minus
Plus
10.6 Footings
10.6.' l Variation in dimensions in plan
Minus
Plus (plus variation applied to concreteonly, not to reinforcing bars or dowels).
1 0.6.2 lMisplacement or eccentricity
2 percent of the footing width in thedirection of misplacement but not more than(applies to concrete only,not to reinforcing bars or dowels).
10.6.3 Thickness
Decrease in specified thickness
lncrease in specified thickness
10.7 Variation in Steps
'10.7.1 In a fl ight of stairs
2 inch
5%
No l imit
Hrse
Tread
10.7.2 ln consecutive stews
Rise
I reao
+ 1/8 inch
+ 114 inch
+ 1/'16 inch
+ 1/8 inch
03300-31
10.8 Tolerances for Pre-cast concrete construction
Forms must be true to size and dimensions of concrete members shownon the plans and be so constructed that the dimensions of the finishedproducts will be within the following limits at the time of placement of theseunits in the structure, unless otherwise noted on structural-architecturaldrawtngs:
10.8.'l Overall dimensions of members
1 0.8.2 Cross-sectional dimensions
Sections less than 3 inch,
Sections over 3 inch andless than 18 inch.
Sections over '18 inch.'10.8.3 Deviations from straight line
in long seotjons.
Not more than
10.8.4 Deviation from specified camber. lvlaximum differential
adjacent units in erected
ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE
1'1.'1 GENERAL
betweenl0 feet span.Dosition' 1/4 inch.
' l l16 inchper '10 feet
' l l '16 inch
1 i8 inch
7/4 inch
1/8 inch
+ '1l'16 inch per
11.
11.1.1 Completed concrete work which meets all applicable requirementswill be accepted subject to the other terms of the ContractDocuments.
1 1.1.2 Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more of therequirements and which has been repaired to bring it intocompliance will be accepted subject to the other terms of theContract Documents.
'11.1.3 Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more of therequirements and which cannot be brought into compliance may beaccepted or rejected as provided in these Specifications or in iheContract Documents. In this event, modifications may be requiredto assure that remaining work complies with the requirements.
,I1.2 DIMENSIONALTOLERANCES
'11.2.'l Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines smaller thanpermitted by the tolerances of clause 10 shall be consideredp.otentially deficient in strength and subject to the provisions of subclause 1'1.4.
Formed surfaces re-suiting in concrete outlines larger thanpermitted by the tolerances of clause '10 mad, be rejected and theexcess material shall be subject to removal. if removal of thexcess material is permitted, it shall be accomplished in
\-\
03100-32
Imanner as to maintain the strength of the section and to meet allother epplicable requirements of {unction and appearance.Permission is required if excess material is to be removed inaccordance with this clause.
11.2.3 Concrete members cast in the wrong location may be rejected ifthe strength, appearance or function of the structure is adverselyaffected or if misplaced items interfere with other construction,
11.2.4 Inaccurately formed concrete surlaces exceeding the limlts oIClause 10 or of clause 6.1.6 of Section 'Formwork'and whichare exposed to view, may be rejected and shall be repaired orremoved and replaced if required.
11.3 APPEARANCE
11.3.1 Architectural concrete with surface defects exceeding thelimitations of Sub-clause 6.1.6 of the Section, 'Formwork' shall
' be removed and replaced.
'1 1.3.2 Other concrete exposed to view with defects which adverselyaffect the appearance of the specified finish may be repairedonly by approved methods.
11.3.3 Concrete not exposed to view is not subject to rejection fordefective appearance.
11.4 STRENGTH OF STRUCTURE'1 1 .4.1 The strength of the structure in place will be considered potentially
deficient if it fails to comply with any requirements, which controlthe strength of the structure, including but not necessarily limitedto the following conditions.
- Concrete strength requirements not considered to besatisfied in accordance with Clause 6 hereof.
- Reinforcing steel size, quantity, strength, position orarrangement at variance with the requirements as listedunder specification of 'Reinforcement' or in the ContractDocuments.
- Concreie which differs from the required dimensions orlocation in such a manner as to reduce the strength.Curing less than that specified.
- Inadequate protection of concrete from extremes oftemperature during eady stages of hardening and strengthdevelopment.
- Meohanical injury, construction fires, accidents ofpremature removal of formwork likely to result in deficientstrength:
- Poor workmanship likely to result in deficient strength,
Structural analysis and/or additionalwhen the strength of the structuredeficient,
a
c03300-33
testing may be required
12.
'11.4.3 Core tests may be required when the strength of the concrete inplace is considered potentially deficient.
1 1.4.4 lf core tests are inconclusive or lmpractical to obtain or if structuralanalysis does not confirm the safety of the structure, load testsmay be required and their result evaluated in accordance withBrit ish Standard BS 8110 or ACI Standard 318.
'11.4.5 Concrete work judged inadequate by structural analysis or byresults of a load test shall be reinforced with additionalconstruction if so directed by the Engineer or shall be replaced, atthe Contractor's expense.
'11.4.6 The Contractor shall pay ail costs incurred in providing theadditional testing and/or analysis required by this section.
'!.1.4.7 The Employer will pay all costs of additional testing and/oranalysis which are made at his request and which is not requiredby these Specifications, or by the Contract Documents.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
12.1 General
Exceot otherwise soecified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will be made for the undermentioned specified works related to the relevant items of the Bills ofQuantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in thequoted unit rate of the respective items of the Bills of Quantities.
The rates quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities shall includework to be executed under these specification in any floor and at anyheight except where otherwise specifically stated in the relevanl item ofBill of Qtlantities and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim orclaim any compensation on this account,
12.1.' l Providing, f ixing, striking, etc. offormwork.
12.'1.2 Providing, placing and fixing of anchor bolts or any other embeddedparts.
12.1.3 Providing and installing all type of joints in concrete structure,including expansion joints.
'12.1.4 Providing and fixing water stoppers.
12.2 Plain and Reinforced Concrete
12.2.1 lvleasurement
Concrete shall be measured as executedmade for the following:
- Volume of any steel embedded in
a
I03300-34
the concrete.
a
Volume occupied by water pipes, conduits etc. notexceeding 10 square inches each in cross-sectional area.
- Voids not exceeding 4 square inch in work given in squarefeet. lf any void exceeds 4 square inch, total void shall bededucted.
Voids, which are not to be deducted as specified above refer onlyto openings or vents which are wholly within the boundaries ofmeasured areas.
Openings or vents which are at the boundaries of measured areasshall always be subject to deductions irrespective of size.
Concrete work shall be classified and measured separately asiisled under items of Bil ls of Ouantit ies.
Junction between straight and curved works shall in all cases bedeemed to be included with the work in which they occur.
03300,35
,1.
sEcTtoN - 04000
BLOCK MASONRY UNITS
SCOPE
The work under this section of the specification consists of furnishing all plant,labour, equipment, appliances, materials and in performing all operations inconnection with supplying and constructing brick masonry, or concrete masonrycomplete in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and applicabledrawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. The scope ofthis section of speciflcation is covered with detailed specification as laid downherein.
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
Latest editions of the following ACI codes and ASTM Standards referred toherein, are applicable to these Specifications.
ACI Codes
ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry StructuresACI 530.1 Specifications for l\4asonr,
ASTN/I Standards
ASTI/I C 129 Non-Load Bearing concrete lvlasonry UnitsASTI\,I| C 90 Load Bearing Cbncrete Masonry UnitsASTM C 216 Facing Bricks (Solid lvlasonry units made from clay or shale)
ASTM C 67 Sampling and Testing Bricks
ASTM C 270 Mortar for Unit Masonry
ASTM C 207 Mortar for Unit l\4asonry
ASTI\,I| A 615 Deformed and plain billet bars for concrete reinforcement
OUALITY ASSURANCE
Products or materials certified l\jlanufacturers shall be used wheneverpossible in lieu of other supplier or manufacturer.
Provide the services of qualified masons with at least five yearsexperience in installations of a similar nature.
Furnish masonry units, cured by one process, of uniform color andtexture, without spalls, chips or other deficiencies that impair strengthand/or appearance, and conforming to the physical requirements of thestandard Building Code and to Florida Concrete and ProductsAssociation.
2.
6.
Perform laying, finishing and grouting of masonry workthe requirements of the American Concrete Institute,Code Requirements for l\,4asonry Structures,Specifications for Masonrv Structures.
in accordance withACI 530, Building
and Acl 530.1,
D.
04000 - 1
E, Provide mortar materials and mortar applioation in compliance with therecommendations of the National Lime Association and PortlandCement Association.
F. Job Mock-Up: Erect at the job site, one sample mock-up masonry wallpanel 4 feet long by 4 feet high, constructed to represent masonry workfor quality, appearance, materials and workmanship. Upon approval bythe Engineer, the panel shall become the standard of comparison for allmasonry work built of the materials represented in the sample panel. Donot move, alter or destroy the sample panel until all masonry work iscomDlete.
l. Color is to be within normal manufacturer's range represented by sampreto be approved by Engineer
4, PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Deliver masonry units and mortar materials to the site undamaged, onpallets, stacked to allow air circulation and covered and protected fromrain, ground water, soil-age, staln-age, or intermixture with earth or othermaterials.
Store mortar materials off the ground, under cover using tarpaulins, feltpaper, or polyethylene sheets, and in a dry location. Remove damagedmaterials from the site and reolace at no additional cost to the Owner.
SUBMITTALS
A Manufacturer's Data
A.
Submit in accordance with Section 01340 of the General Conditions, twocooies of product data, manufacturer's technical information andinstructions for each manufactured product and other data for each typeof brick or masonry as applicable and accessory required. Instructionsshall be included for handling, storage, installation, and protection ofunits and accessories.
Samples: Submit the following samples:
Submit three samples of each type of brick and accuracy required,also samples of the full range of exposed texture to be used in thecompleted work.
unit masonry samples for each type of exposed masonry unitrequired in sufficient quantity to show full range of exposed colorand texture to be expected in completed work. Submit colorvariations available for Engineer's selection.
Anchors, Ties, Joint Reinforcement Two of each type proposedfor use.
lvlortar: Two cured mortar samples matching Engineer's colorselection.
1 .
2.
3 .
4.
Certificate
Submit manufacturer's written certification that the concretemasonry units meet or exceed all the requirements set forth in thiSection.
04000 - 2
Submit the grout mix design.
Cement.
4. Reinforcing Steel.
D. Shop Drawings, Reinforcementlbending, and placement of walManual of Standard PracticeStructures.
E. Test ReportsReports for compressive strengthsof reinforcing steel.
Construction tolerances
Submit shop drawings for fabrication,reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315,for D€tailing Reinforced Concrete
and other
2.
of brick and mortafl and tensile tests
A. Variation From Plumb:'1. For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises, do not
exceed the following:
a. Ya" in 10 teel.b. 3/8" in any story height, maximum 20 feetc. Y2" in 40 {eel or more.
2. For external corners, expansion joints, controlconspicuous lines, do not exceed the following:
a. %" in any slory, maximum 20 feet.b. %" in 40 feet or more.
B.
3. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed 3/8" in 10 feet.
Variations From Levell
1. For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets,horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed thefollowing:
a. '4" in any bay, maximum 20 feet.b. %" in 40 feet or more.
For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8" behiveenadjacent floor elements in '10 feet or l/'16" within width of a singleunit.
Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and relatedportion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed the following:
1. /2' in any bay, maximum 20 feet.
2. %" in 40 feet or more.
Variation ln Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness ofwalls. do not exceed minus 1A" or olus y2" ftom dimensions shown.
Variation in l\4ortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed indicated bed jointickness by more than plus or minus '1l8",
2.
c.
o
D.
04000 - 3
with a maximum thickne
',
limited to %" Do not exceed indicated head joint thickness by more thanelus or minus 1/8"
Job Conditions
Protection of work: During erection, cover top of walls with waterproofsheeting at end of each days work. Cover partially completed structureswhen work is not in progress.
Do not apply uniform roof loading for at least 12 hours after buildingmasonry walls or columns.
Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonrywalls or columns.
Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masontto be left exposed or painted. lmmediately remove grout or mortar incontact with such masonry. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mudand mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and overwall surfaces.
Protect sills, ledges and projections from dropping of mortar.
B.
c.
D.
8. PRODUCTS
8.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
4.2
A. Provide concrete masonry units having nominal face dimensionsof 16" long by 8" high, smooth textured, sound and free fromcracks, chipped edges or other defects that would interfere withproper setting or impair strength or durability of the construction.Use units of special shapes and size for lintels, comers, jambs,sash, control joints, headers and other special conditions asrequired to complete the work shown. Where units are to beexposed on the interior of the building, use units free of surfacedefects that would be noticeable and objectionable at a distanceof 12-feet from the finished wall.
B. Nonjoad bearing concrete Masonry Units: Provide unitconforming to AST[,4 C 129, Type ll, and normal weight, withnominal face dimensions of I 'bv 16", thicknesses as shown onDrawing and with external corners bull-nosed.
C. Load Bearing Concrete lvlasonry units: Provide units conformingto A$TM C90, Type ll, of normal weight having strength of 2000psi.
D. Deliver units to the job site in an air-dry condition and protect themat the job from ground water and rain prior to and duringconslruction of the walls. Provide units that are suitably aged attime of delivery to meet linear shrinkage potential requirements ofASTM C 426.
Blocks
Building Bricks shall conform to the requirements of ASTIVI C 62. Size ofbuilding bricks shall be 8" x 16" x 8'and as approved. The Contractorshall submit samples of building blocks for approval prior tocommencement ofwork. Defective bricks shall not be used.
Mortar Materials
04000 - 4
a
tJ.
c.
D.
E.
Portland Cement ASTM C 150, Type ll, non-staining, without airentrainment and of natural color.
lvlasonry Cement ASTM C 91.
1. Premix Mortar for concrete Masonry: ASTM C 37, Type M.
l\,4ethods and equipment used for mixing mortar will besuch so as to accurately determine and control the amountof each separate ingredient entering into the mortar, Mortarshall be mixed only in sufficient quantities for immediateuse and shall be used within 30 minutes after mixing.Stiffened mortars shall be re{empered by adding water torestore the required consistency. Mortars not used within2-1/2 houts after initial mixing shall be discarded. Themixers shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed at the end
' of each day's work.
2. Mortar: ASTM C270 for Brick lvlasonry.
Mortar shall conform to the requirements of ASTI\4, C-270.Mortar shall be of type S having a minimum Compressivestrength of 1800 psi.
Proportioning for mortar shall be in accordance with therequirements of ASTM C 270. However it shall not be lessthan 1 part of cement to 3 parts of sand.
Aggregate:
1. For ftilortar: ASTII C'144
2. For Groutr ASTM C404.
Water: Potable water free of deleterious materials which wouldimpair the strength or bond. All water used in the manufacture ofbrick sand in the oreoaration of mortar shall be free fromobjectionable quantities of silt, organic matter, alkali, salts andother impurities. The water shall be tasted in accordance with BS-3148, where directed by the Engineer.
Hydrated lime: ASTI,4 C 207, Type S.
Waterproofing: Master Builders Stearox or equal.
Water Repellant lvlortar Mix: Equal to W.R. Grace Dry-Block forarchitectural units or equal
Colored Mortar Pigments;
1. Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,oompounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigmentswith record of satisfactory performance in masonrymortars.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a. Centurion Pigments by Centurion
b. True Tone L4ortar colors by Davis Colors,subsidiary of Rockwood Industries, Inc.
04000 - 5
F.
o
3.
4.
c. SGS lvlortar Colors by Solomon Grind-ChemServices, inc.
lntegral water repellant agent added to mortar (Type "S").
Color to be selected by Engineer.
8.4
8.6
ANCHORS AND TIES
A. Zinc coated steel or copoer coated steel. Provide anchors and tiesas indicated on the Drawings, or as required for installation ofvarious items. Provide anchors of the type best suited for thesituation.
HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT
B.
Dur-o-Wal Ladder, g-gauge, ladder type, CSR Rinker orHohmann & Barnard Lox-All No. 8, or equal
As shown on drawings and approved by Engineer.
MISCELLANEOUS
A. Reinforcing Barsr Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60.aEXECUTION
9,1 Construction
9.2
9.3
Construct all work plumb and true and built accurately to dimensionsshown, Provide and place such special units as required to form allcorners, returns, offsets arid maintajn proper bond. Where interiorconcrete masonry partitions meet other interior partitions or exterior walls,provide a masonry bond or the equivalent in approved metal ties.
Bond
Lay all masonry units, except architectural masonry units, in running bondby lapping units in successive courses a distance of one-half a unit. Layall courses levelwith joints of uniform widlh and finished flush. Providefull mortar coverage of the face shells in both the horizontal and verticaljoints. Point all joints solid with mortar on both sides of wall. Firmlycompactjoints in exposed work with a pointing tool when partially set.
MORTAR MIX
A. Proportion mortar by volume, in accordance with Florida ConcreteProducts Association "Mortar Requirements - Table 2" for Type Mand S mortar, as follows:
Mortar Type
Portland Cement
lvlasonry Cement
Hydrated Lime or Lime _Putty
Aggregate, Damp, Loose 2Y2 min.lo
M
1
1 (Type l l)
2500
%
3 max. combinedvolumes aoove
2500
Y2
Aver. Comp Strength at28 days
04000 - 6
2,500
tt_ Use all mortar and grout within 30 minutes of initial maxing and discardany that has begun to set. Re-tempering of mortar in which setting hasstarted will not be permitted. l\4ortar may be re-tempered as neoessary tokeep it plastic, providing it has not begun to set or older than 30 minutes.
Water Repellant Mortar Mix - Site Mixed: (Basis of Design -W.R. GradeDry-Block or accepted equal).
1. A jobsite mixed mortar containing admixtures consisting of liquid,integral color pigments, non-chloride and non-conosive setaccelerator, and/or corrosion-inhibitor as required for projectconditions.
2. PhysicalProperties:
a. Type: ASTM C 270, Type S.
b. Water Permeation: ASTM E 5'14-74, achieves Class Erating with.no watervisible on back of wall above flashingal end of 72 hours.
c. Flexural bond Strength: ASTIVI E 72 and C'1072 minimumflexural bond strength equal to mortar without admixture.
d. Compressive Strength - With life extending admixture:ASTM c 270 and C 780, minimum compressive strengthequal to mortar without admixture.
3. Product Water repellant mortar produced at jobsite with CSRRinker masonry cement, Dry-Block mortar admixture by W.R.Grace, and integral color supplied by CSR Rinker Demaco Corp.,color match to Architectural CIVIL
Water Repellant l\4ortar Mixi Plant-l\.4ixed.
1. A plant redi-mix mortar, delivered to jobsite, integrally colored ifrequired, with extended workability up to 48 hours, dependant onprevailing environmental conditions and containing integrally-added polymeric water-repellant admixture, life extendingadmixture, and corrosion-inhibiting admixture.
2. PhysicalPropertiesl
a. Type: ASTM C 1'142, type RS.
b. Water Permeation: ASTM E 14-74, achieves Class E ratingwith no water visible on back of wall above flashing at endof 72 hours.
3. Flexural Bond Strengthr ASTM E 72 and C 1072, minimumflexural bond strength equal to mortar without admixture.
4. Compressive Strength - with life extending admixturer ASTM C270 and C 780, minimum compressive strength equal to mortarwithout admixture.
Product Water repellant mortar produced with (Rainbow, Blue Circle)Plant - mixed color mortars (to match Architectural CMU) and W.R.Grace Dr-Block Admixtures.
CUT UNITS
ut all odd size masonry units in a finally exposed wall with suitablr drlven masonry saw. Chipping of units will not be permitted.
04000 - 7
c.
D.
9.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
Provide horizontal joint reinforcement throughout exterior masonry
9.6
9.7
walls, 16-inches on center vertically.
FRAMES, MULLIONS AND SPACES
A. Fill solidly with grout all hollow metal frames, mullions and spacesaround built-in items.
LINTELS
A. Provide masonry lintels where 6hown and wherever openings ofmore than 1 foot are shown.
B. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintel units with reinforcing bars placed as showi and filledwith grout of conslstency required to complete fill space betweenreinforcing bars and masonry unit. Texture and appearance tomatch the split face masonry units.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwiseindicated.
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonrywlrere shown. Build in related masonry accessory items as themasonry worK progresses.
B. Build in flanges of factory-fabricated expansion joint units.
C. Provide joint fillers where shown, and as specified in Section07920. Joint width for sealants shall be 3/8" unless otherwiseindicated.
PLACING
The methods and equipment used for transporting the bricks and mortarshall be such as will not damage the brick nor delay the use of mixedmortar. Bricks shall not be placed during heaw rains to washing away themortar from the brick. Mortar already spread which becomes diluted byrain shall be discarded and replaced before continuing with the work. Allbricks to be used in brick masonry shall be soaked in water for three tofour hours before they are used to ensure that each brick is thoroughlyand uniformly wetted. All bricks shall be free from water adhering to theirsurface p when they are placed in the brick masonry.
Bricks shall be laid "frog" upward with mortar joints and in stretcher bondor as approved by the Engineer. Both bed and verticaljoints shall be 3/8"in thickness completely filled with mortar as specified herein, and eachbrick shall be bedded by firmly tapping with the handle of trowel. Allhorizontal joints shall be parallel and all vertical joints in -alternatecourses shall be difectly over one another. Excess mortar at the outeredges shall be removed and joints drawn $traight. Work required to beembedded in the brier: masonry shall be installed as the work progresses.At the completion of the work all holes or defective mortar joints shall becut out and repainted.
hey shall be laid true to l ine, level and plumbs, All joints shall bely straight, parallel and sharp. Facing brick of irregular shape,
, damaged and defective edges and faces shall be rejected outright.
9.8
04000 - 8
o
Works done with defective edges and faces shall be rejected and thecontractor shall replace, without additional cost, all defective andunacceptable works.
Exterior faces of the walls shall be finished by striking the joints as thework proceeds. Tooling shall be done when the mortar is partially set butstill sufficiently plastic to bound. The joints shall be struck by raking thegreen mortar after the brick work has been laid and finish the joints witha pointing tool. Horizontal joints shall be struck to form a weathered jointand verticaljoints shall be struck with a V notch. Care shall be taken thatthe striking lools do not develop a cutting edge as the objeot of strikingthe joint is to compress the mortar into the joints.
9.IO CURING AND REPAIR
All brick cement masonry shall be waler cured and shall be kept wet forat least seven days by an approved method which will keep all surfacesto be cured continuously wet. Water used for curing shall meet therequirements of the specific€tions for water used in the manufacture ofbricks.
lf. after the completion of any brick masonry work. the units are not inaljgnment or level, or does not conform to the lines and levels, shown onthe drawings, or shows a defective surface, it shall be removed andreplaced by the Contractor, without additional cost to Engineer. Repair orpatching ol the defective area will not be acceptable unless allowed, inwriting, by the Engineer.
9.I'I PROTECTION
A. Protect partially completed masonry against the weather, whenwork is not in progress, by covering the tops of walls with strong,waterproof, non-staining membrane extending at least 2 feeddown both sides of walls and held securely
B. Protect expoGed masonry surfaces against staining. Removemisplaced mortar immediately.
9.12 REPAIR AND POINTING
A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped,broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not matchadjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoiningunits and install in fiesh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminateevidence of replacement.
B. Pointingr During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes,except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Poinlup alljoints or corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat,uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulkingor sealant compounds.
9.13 SCAFFOLDING
The Contractor shall provide safe scaffolding of adequate strength for useof workmen at all levels and heights at his own expense. Scaffoldingwhich is unsafe in the opinion of the Engineer shall not be used until ithas been strengthened and made safe for use of workmen. Cost ofscaffolding etc., shall be included by r without additionacost to the Engineer.
04000 - 9
(.)
o Damage to masonry from scaffolding or from any other cause shall berepair-d by e Contractor at his own cost.
9.,I4 DAMP PROOF COURSES
All damp proof courses unless otherwise specified shall be 2 inches thick,consisting of cement concrete having a 28 day minimum cute strength of21 Nlmmz, mixed with approved quality water proofing compound as permanufacture/s specifications and shall be laid at required levels as perdrawings and instructions of the Engineer. The damp proof course shallbe tamped, consolidated, leveled and edges and corners made to therequirements of the relevant drawings including finishing and curingcomptere.
No separate payment will be made for providing and laying damp proofcourse.
9.15 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
At the completion of the work, all holes, and defective mortar joints shallbe cut and re-pointed. Exposed masonry shall be proteoted againststaining or bther damage and excess mortar shall be cleared off thesurfaces as the work progresses. All exposed masonry shall be clean,smooth, fine and shall be of acceptable finish approved by the Engineer.
ANCHORAGE OF MASONRY
All masonry units shall be anchored to structural elements in accordancewith UBC-97 or as per detail shown on drawings
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
10.1 General
Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will be made for the undermentioned specified works related to the relevant items of the Bills of
. Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in theauoted unit rate of the respective items ofthe Bills of Quantitiee.
The rates quoted by the contractor in the Bill of Quantities shall includework to be executed under these specification in any floor and at anyheight except where otherwise specifically stated in the relevant item ofBill of Quantities and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim orclaim any compensation on this account.
'10.'1.1 Cutting & chiseling of masonry wherever required.
10.1.2Cement sand mortar used in laying bricks includingwastage.
10.1.3curing and repairing the masonry work, can{l strip andmaking olweep holes.
10.1.4A11 steel anchor bars/dovetail/wall ties for cavity wall and, anchors etc. in masonrywork,
. 10.1.5 Damp proof course of
9 .16
t0
,6t)04000 - 10
including water
10.2 Masonry'10.2.1 Measurement
In case of different thickness of slab in different areas or room orfor any other reason whatsoever, if chiseling of masonry lsreouiredi the Contractor shall do so at his own cost. No deductionshall be made for the area of cavitv in a cavitv wall.
Where, for any reason whatsoever, the height, of the wall is shortof ceiling height, the actual height shall be made good with 1:2:4nominal mix concrete. This concrete shall neither be measurednor be paid under item of concrete but will be paid for under itemof wall masonryr Similarly where the lintel heights are such thatthe Contractor has to chisel the masonry or provide cast-in-placeconcrete to make up the height of the course, no payment will bemade for chiseling, but where such cast-in-place concrete isprovided, payment for the same will be made at the unit rate formasonry.
Measurement of acceptably cgmpleted works of respective type ofbrick masonry will be made on the basis of number of cubic feetprovided & installed in position as shown on the Drawing or asdirected by the Engineer.
5.2.2 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofrespective type of brick masonry on the basis of unit rate per cubicfeet quoted in the Bills of Quantities against the respective itemand shall constitute full compensation for all the works related tothe item.
04000 - 11rffi,
sEcTtoN - 04100
BRICK MASONRY UNITS
1. Scope of Work
The work to be done under this section covers the brickwork including reinforcedbrickwork required to be constructed under these specifications and shall consist of thematerials herein specified. l\,4ortar shall be proportioned, mixed and placed inaceordance with the requirements stated herein. The requirements set forth hereinshall apply to all brickwork, except when such requirements are specifically modifiedby the Engineer in charge for any particular item of work.
2. Materials
All materials and operations of the Contractoi in constructing and completing brickworkshall be in complete conformity with the applicable requirements of the specificationsand shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.1 Cement
All cement for mortar shall .conform to the applicable requirements set forth inspecifications for Concrete - General.
2.2 Sand
Sand for mortar used in brickwork shall meet the requirements set forth in ASTMDesignation C174-81 "Standard Specilications for Masonry Mortal'. The maximumpercentage of deleterious substances shall not exceed the limits provided in fineaggregate requirements set forth in Specifications for Concrete General. The Finenesslvlodulus of the sand shall range between 1.91 to 2.78 and the grading shall be withinthe following l imits.
Sieve Size Percent Passing
Natural Sand
No.
No
No
NO
No
No
No
4
I
16
30
50
100
200
(4.76 mm)
(2.38 mm)
(1 .18 mm)
(600 mm)
(300 mm)
('179 mm)
(74 mm)
100
95 to 100
70 " 100
40"75
10 "35
25 max
10 "
04100-1
a
Sand shall be stored at the site in such a manner as to prevent its deterioration orO inclusion of foreign mafter. All methods employed by the Contractor for unloading,
loading, handling and storage shall be subject at all t imes to the approvsl of Engineer.Sufficient quantity shall be maintained at the site at all times to assure continuouswork.
2.3 Water
The water used in the manufacture of bricks preparation of mortar and curing shall bein complete conformity with the stipulations and requirements set forth in specificationsfor Concrele General.
2.4 Bricks
Bricks shall be first class made from good loam or clay. The earth shall be free fromobjectionable quantities of lime, gravel, coarse sand, roots and other organic mafter.The salt contents shall not exceed 0.3 percent and calcium carbonate contents shallnot be more than 2 percent.
All bricks shall be manufactured by Trench Kiln method or other standard methodapproved by the Engineer. The moulds to be used in the manufacture of bricks shall bethoroughly sanded before each use and shall be sufficiently larger than lhe size of thebricks to allow for shrinkage of nominal size 9" x 4-112" x 3" (229 mm x 117 mm x 76mm). Maximum iolerance in length shall be + 6 mm and in breadth/width the toleranceshall be + 3 mm. The frog shall be 6 mm deep on upper face. The bricks shall bethoroughly burnt without being vitrified and shall be regular, uniform in shape and sizewith sharp and square size, parallel faces and of deep red or copper colour. The brickshall be homogeneous in texture and emit a clear ringing sound when struck and shallbe free from flaws, cracks, chips, stones and modules of lime. A brick in an oven driedcondition shall not absorb water more than 1/6th of its weight when immersed for onehour in water at 21 to 27 degrees centigrade and shall not thow any signs ofefflorescence on subsequent drying.
The bricks shall be sorted out and arranged in stacks of one or two thousands or asdirected by the Engineer-in Charge. Each stack shall be '10 courses high and twobricks thick so that at least one end of every brick is visible. At least 0.6 meters spacebetween the stacks shall be left for the purpose of inspection. For the purpose ofinspection and tests the sample bricks shall be selected by the Engineer or a personauthorized by the Engineer for this purpose. These samples shall be furnished by thecontractor without charges. The sampling shall conform to ASTM Designation c67-8'1.For the modulus of rupture, compressive strength and absorption determinations atleast 10 bricks shall be selected from each lot of '10,000 bricks or a fraction thereofcontained in the lot. In no case shall less than 5 bricks be taken. Each specimen shallbe marked so that it may be identified at any time. Markings shall not cover more than5 percent of the superficial area of the specimen.
The bricks shall comply with ASTIVI Designation C67-81. Physical requirements of thebricks shall be as below:-
04100-2
aBrioks
Minimum compressivestrength (brick Jlaiwise)
(Kg.cm2)
Gross Area)
Maximum WaterAbsorption by 5-
hour Boil ing(Percent)
lvlaximumCo-efficient
Individual 175 25.0 0 .90
Average of 5Bricks
150 22.0 0.88
(The saturation co efficient is the ratio of absorption by 24-hours submersion in coldwater to that after 5 hours submersion in boiling water).
lf 10, bricks per thousand are defective or of density less than '1.72 (+ 0.05) or thebricks are out of dimension the whole lot shall be rejected and the contractor shallrbmove the rejected lots from the site.
The testing shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own cost under the supervisionof the Engineer or his authorized representative at a laboratory approved by theEngineer.
2.5 Brick Tiles
Materials and manufacture of burnt clay tiles shall comply with the requirementsspecified herein for bricks except that the frog will not be required. Nominal size of tilesshall be 9" x 4-112" x ' l-112" (229 mm x 117mm x 38mm).
2.6 Reinforcing Steel
The brickwork shall be reinforced where shown on the Drawings. Reinforcing steelshall comply with the applicable requirements of specifications for reinforcing steel asper section 04200.
2.7 Damp Proof Concrete (DPC)
DPC shall be 50 mm thick or otherwise specified on the drawings. lt shall be in fineaggregates in (112:4). Two coats of hot bitumen s ied on the DPc asspecified before the brick work oroceeds.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 Placing
l\ilortar for all brickwork shall be as specified in contract Agreement or shown on theDrawings. Where dirqoted by the Engineer for increasing workability, hydrated limeputty approved by the Engineer shall be added to the mortar, but shall not exceed 25percent by volume of dry cement. Methods and equipment used for mixing mortar shallbe such as will accurately determine and control the amount of each ingredient --__entering into the mortar and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. [.4ortay'+-1.- ].shall be mixed only in sufficient qualit ies for immediate use and all mortar not useA/ i.f \:),within 30 niinutes ;fter addition oi water shall be wasted. Re-tempering of morta rrfff( IX lli
f \ " . / l04r00-r \i:r/
a
not be allowed. lvlixing troughs and pans shall be thoroughly cleaned wand washed atthe end of each day's work.
The methods and equipment used for transporting the bricks and mortar shall be suchas will not damage the bricks nor delay the use of mixed mortar. Bricks shall not beplaced during rains sufficiently heavy or prolonged to wash the mortar from the bricks.Mortar already spread which becomes.diluted by rain shall be removed and replacedbefore continuing with the work. Freshly laid brickwork shall be covered withpolyethylene or tarpaulin sheets to avoid dilution and removal of mortar by rain.Workmen shall not be allowed to walk on the brickwork before it is fully set. All bricksto be used in brickwork with mortar joint shall be moistened with water from three tofour hours before these are used. The method used for moistening shall ensurethorough and uniform wefting of bricks. All bricks shall be free from water adhering totheir surlace while placing in brickwork.
Brick masonry shall be laid where possible form one face only. Each br;ck shall be setwith both bed and vertical joints filled with mortar. The frog shall face up and the bricksshall be bedded-in by firmly tapping with trowel handle. Bricks courses shall be carriedup as neatly as possible in a uniform manner during construction. All unavoidablechanges in slope shall be raked back at a slope of tvvo horizontal to one vertical. Allanchors, reinforcement, hangers, sleeves and similar items required to be embeddedin the brick masonry shall be installed as shown on the Drawings or as directed by theEngineer during construction. The exposed face of all brick masonry shall have thesmoothest finish and shall be kept clean and free from mortar streaks. Where eversuch streaks are formed these shall be washed off immediately and shall not beallowed to harden. Horizontal joints shall be parallel and vertical ioints in alternatecourses shall be directly over one another.
The thickness of the vertical joints shall be approximately 6 mm and the thickness ofthe horizontal joints shall be '10 mm. Except where otherwise specified on the Drawing,excess mortar at the outer edges shall be removed and joints drawn straight with thetrowel edge and a straight edge. At thb completion of the work all holes or defectivemortar joints shall be cut out and repointed.
All brick work shall be bonded where it abuts other brickwork, concrete walls andcolumns. Brickwork of intersecting walls shall be interlocked and straight abutting jointswill not be permitted. Where brickwork abuts concrete wall, ties engaging in dove tailslots shall be provided at every fourth course. Eight centimeter long dove tail slots castin cement concrete members al every fourth brick course height shall be provided orM.S bar ties shall be provided in place of dove tail slots where shown on the Drawings.
Brickwork shall be wedged to the underside of floor and roof slabs. Top most joint shallbe filled with well compacted mortar. Scaffolding holes shall be along headers and notmore than one brick in length. Scaffolding holes shall be neatly bricked in when nolonger required.
3.2 Repairing of Brickwork
After completion of brick work if any brick is out of alignment or is not level or does notconform to the lines and grade shown on the Drawings, or shows a defective surface, ifshall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense, unless theEngineer grants permission in writing to patch the defective area.
04100-4
o
3.3 Curing
All brick work in cement mortar shall be cured by water curing. Brickwork shall be keptwet for '17 days by covering with water saturated material or by a system of perforatedpipes, Technical sprinklers, porous hose, bonding or by any other method approved bythe Engineer. The method employed shall ensure continuous curing of all surfaces.Water used for curing shall meet the requirements specified for water used in concreteand cement mortar manufacture.
3.3 Brickwork in Arches
Brick shall be properly made or cut and rubbed to proper lines shown on the Drawingsor as directed by the Engineer. Template shall be approved by the Engineer prior tocommencement of brlckwork in arches. The joints in brickwork shall ngt exceed 6 mmin thickness. Where half brick rlngs are shown on the Drawings or allowed by theEngineer, header bricks or lacing courses shall be executed as directed by theEngineer. centering shall be approved and struck as directed by the Engineer
4 Measurement and Payment
l\jleasurement will be made of the number of cubic meters of brickwork acceptablyconstructed in accordance with the dimensions, lines, grades and thjckness shown onthe Drawings. The thickness of brickwork shall be a multiple of 115 mm. Noconsideration on account of mortar in the joints shall be made for determination ofthickness. In oase of brickwork built in with brick on edge the thickness shall bemeasured as 75 mm or multiple of 75 mm. No deduction shall be made in brickwork foropening not exceeding 0.35 square meter in area and for plates,6hings, re]ieving,arches, l intels sil ls etc. '150 mm deep and fire place flues.
For arches built in cut and rubbed bricks shall be measured separately. The contentsof arches will be deducted from brickwork. No deduction will be made for cambers ofthe arches. Width of the cavity shall not be included while determining thickness ofcavity walls. Payment will be made for the number of cubic meters of brickworkmeasured as provided above at the respective unit price per cubic meter for itemsprovided in BOQS and shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materialsexcept cement and steel reinforcement which shall be provided by the departmentformwork scaffoldings, dowels where required, tinishing, curing, labour, ptant,equipment and all other work related to the item except D. P.C, plastering and steelreinforcement which shall be paid separately under respective items of BOQS.
04100-5
o sEcTtoN 04200
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
product data, mixes, etc., in accordance withSubmit shop drawings,Section01340.
Submit complete shopdrawings.
Submit mill tesl certificate tor reirforcing steel.
PART 1 - GENERAL
,I.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all materials, equipment and labor required to complete thereinforced unit masonry construction in accordance with the drawings andspecifications.
1,02 RELATED WORK
Section 04000, Unit Masonry
1.03 SUBMITTALS
aB.
c.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
c.
drawings, including bar list and placement
a
General: Refer to Section 04000 or 04'100 for masonry materials andaccessories not included in this Section
Reinforcing Steel: AST[, Designation A 615, Grade 60, unless otherwisesoecified.
Construct all exterior/interior walls of reinforced concrete masonry inaccordance with drawings as follows:
1. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTI\il C 90, Type l, normalweight unitswith minimum compressive strength of 1800 psi Blocks or Bricks
2. Premix l\4ortar: ASTM C 387, Type lvl.
3. Vertical Reinforcing: Provide as shown on the Drawings.
4. Concrete Grout for Filling Cells: 3/8-inch pea-rock mix withminimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi.
5. Horizontal Reinforcing: g-guage ladder type at 16" o.c or as shownon drawings and approved by the Project Manager.
a04200-1
tPART 3 - EXECUTION
3,OI PLACINGREINFORCEMENT
c.
F.
c.
1.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust. mill scale, ea(h or other materialswhich will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement barswith kinks or bends not shown on Drawings or final shop drawings, orbars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes.
Place reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and securevertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may beplaced as the masonry work progresses. Where vertiaal bars are shownin close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less thanthe nominal bar diameter or'l-inch, whichever is greater.
For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance betweenvertical bars as shown, but not less than 1-112 limes the nominal bardiameter or '1-112 inches, whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties asshown.
3,02 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
Perform general installation of unit masonry in accordance with therequirements specified in Section 04000 or 04'100
Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support ofreinforced masonry elements. Design, erection, support, bracing andmaintenance of formwork is the Contractor's responsibility.
Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown andsufficiently right to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any).
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member hashardened sutficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonabletemporary loads that may be placed on it during construction. Do notremove forms and shoring supporting the weight of concrete in beams,slabs and other members until concrete has attained its specified 28 daycompressive strength.
B.
E,
D. Splice reinforcement bars only as shown. Do not splice at other pointsunless approved by the Engineer. Provide lapped splices. Unlessotherwise shown. ln splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, tiesplices with wire.
Provide not less than minlmum lap shown, or if not shown, as required bygovernrng code.
Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimummortar cover of s/8-inch on exterior face of walls and 1/2 -inch at otherlocations.
Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated.
B.
D.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT I\4ASONRY
General:
Do not wet concrete masonry units (C[.4U).
04200-2
a 2.
3.
Walls:
1 .
2.
Place CMU with full-face shell mortar beds, Fill vertical headjooints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face ofunit to a dlstance behind face equalto not less than the thicknessof longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross-webs of startingcourses in mortar. Maintain head and bed ioint widths as shown.or if not shown. provide 3/8-inch ioints.
Where solid Cl\4U units are shown, lay units with full mortar headand bed ioints.
Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in running bond with verticaljoints in each course centered on units in courses above andbelow. unless otherwise indicated- Bond and interlock eachcourse at corners and intersections, and use special-shaped unitswhere shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, controljoints, lintels, bond beams and other speoial conditions.
Maintain vertical .continuity of core of cell cavities, which are to bereinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensionsindicated and to provide minimum alearanae and grout coveragefor vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free of mortar.Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores oroells.
c.
3. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, usespecial units or modify regular units to allow for placement ofcontinuous horizontal reinforcement bars. Place small meshexpanded metal lath or wire screening in mortarjoints under bondbeam courses over cores or cell of non-reinforced vertic€l cells, orprovide units with solid bottoms.
4. Option: Where all vertical cores are not shown to be grouted,Contractor may elect to fill all vertical cores with grout, in whichcase, requirements for mortar bedding of cross-webs and closingof core spaces below bond beams will not apply.
columns, Piers and Pilasters:
1. Use CMU of the size, shape and number of vertical core spacesshown. lf not shown, provide units which provide minimumclearances and grout coverage for number and size of verticalreinforcement bars shown
2. Provide pattern bond as shown, or if not shown, provide alternatehead joints in vertical alignment.
3. Where bonded pilaster construction is shown, construct wall andpilaster units together to the maximum pour height specified.
Grouting:
Use fine grout for filling spaces less than 4-inches in bothhorizontal directions.
Use fine grout for filling spaces less than 4-incheshorizontal directions.
D.
04200-3
O 4. Grouting Technique: At the Contractoas option, use either low-liftor high-lift grouting techniques subject to the requirements whichfollow.
Low-Lift Grouting:
Provide a minimum clear dimension of 2-inches and clear area of8sq. in. in vertical cores to be grouted.
Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend verticalreinforcement above elevation of maximum pour height asrequired to allow for splicing and support it in position at verticalintervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet.
Lay C[/U to maximum pour height. Limit pour height to 5 feet. lfbound beam occurs below the 5 feet height stop pour at coursebelow bond beam.
Pour grout using container with spout or by chute and rod orvibrate during placing. Place grout continuously. Do not interruptpouring of grout for more than one hour Terminate grout pours 1-1/2 inches below too course of pour.
Bond Beams: Terminate grout in vertical cells 1-1l2 inches belowbond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcement in bond beamswith corners and intersections. lapped as shown. Place grout inbond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam.
High-Lift Grouting:
1. Do not use high-lift grouting t€chnique fqr grouting of CMU unlessminimum cavity dimension and area is 3 inches and '10 sq.resPectively.
Provide cleanout holes in first course at all vertical cells which areto be filled with grout Use units with one face shell removed andprovide temporary supports for units above, or use header unitswith concrete brick supports, or cut openings in one face shall.
Construct masonry to full height of maximum grout pour specified,prior to placing grout.
4. Limit grout lifts to maximum height of 5 feet and grout pour to amaximum height oJ 24 feet, tor single Wythe hollow concretemasonry walls, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Place vertical reinforcement before grouting. Tie verticalreinforcement to dowels at base of masonry where shown andthread C[ilU over or around reinforcement. Support verticalreinforcement at intervals not exceedinq 192 bar diameters nor 10feet.
E ,
F,
1 .
2.
3.
4.
I
2.
3.
Where reinforcement is prefabricatedplacing, fabricate the units with verticallateral ties of the size and spacing shown.
into cage units beforereinforcement bars and
04200-4
o 7.
8.
11 .
Place horizontal beam reinforcementlaid.
as the masonry units are
Embed lateral tie reinforcement in mortar ioints where shown asmasonry units are laid.
Where lateral ties are shown in contact with vertical reinforcementbars, embed additional lateral tie reinforcement in mortar joints.Place as shown, or if not shown, provide as required to preventgrout blowout or rupture of CMU face shells, but provide not lessthan No. 2 bars or 8-gage wjre ties spaced 16 inches o.c, formembers with 20 inches or less side dimensions, and 8 incheso.c. for members with side dimensions exceeding 20 inches.
Preparation ot Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and cleanout the grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loosepieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces.Clean reinforcement and adjust to proper position. Clean topsurface of structural members supporting masonry to ensurbbond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes andbars closures to resist grout pressures.
Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted hasattained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry unitsand braking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required,before starting grouting operations
Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternatemethods are acceptable to the Engineer.Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in oneworking day with not more than one hour interruption of pouringoperation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 5 feet. Allow notless than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour beh,veen lifts of agiven pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift durlng pouring operation.
Place grout in lintels or beams over openings in one continuouspour.
Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top ofpour, fill bond beam course to within f-inch of vertically reinforcedcavities, during construction of masonry.
9.
10 .
c
13.
14.
15.o
o
16. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry,extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1-1l2inches of top course offirst pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units andplace reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if moreDOUrS are reourred
04200-5
1.
sEcTtoN - 0s100
STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS
SCOPE
The work covered by this section, consists of supply of all material, labour,plant, equipment and appliances including welding, bolts, nuts, washers,anchor bolts, embedded parts etc, fabrication, erection and painting inaccordance with the specifications and as per drawings and as directed by theEngineer.
DRAWINGS
Design drawings shall be prepared by the Engineer and supplied to theContractor. These shall contain main dimensions, sizes of members, typicaldetails of joints.
Workshop drawings shall then be prepared by the Contractor from the designdrawings supplied and submitted to the Engineer for approval. All submittalshall be made as per the requirements of section 05'100.
3. MATERIAL
Except otherwise stated in the drawings, the material specifications shallconform to the following. Wherever necessary the Contractor may useequivalent alternative material subject to approval afthe Engineer.
3.1 Structural Steel
Structural $teel for structures shall conform to the requirements ofASTM A-36 or equivalent
3.2 Steel Forging
Steel forging shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A235.
3.3 Steel Casting
Steel casting shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A27.
3.4 Welding
Welding Electrodes for manual shlelded metal afc welding shallconform to AWS A 5.1 latest edition or the A 5.5 latest edition.Equivalent locally manufactured electrodes may be used subject tothe approval of the Engineer.
3.5 Common Bolts, Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers Bolts and Nutsshall conform to the requirements of AST| A 307.
3.6 High Strength Bolts
High strength carbon steel bolts including nuts and washersnform to the requirements of ASTI\,1 A325 latest editions
ts t 818.2
05r00-1
shall
I Washerg
cut Washers: Shall be of structural grade steel and shall conform tothe dimension of the manufacturer's regular standard for plainwashers for the size of bolts used.
Cast lron
Shall conform to the requirements of latest edition of ASTM A 48.
FABRICATION
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer about any problems or doubts/errorsdiscovered in the drawings for clarification/rectification well in time to preveniany fabrication errors. Fabrication shall not be commenced until approval hasbeen obtained from the Engineer. .
4.1 Straightening of Material
Rolled material, before being worked upon must be straightenedwithin tolerances by ASTM specifications A6 Straightening,necessarily shall be done by mechanical means or by the applicaflonof a limited amount of localized heat, The temperature of heatedareas, as measured by approved methods, shall not exceed 'l100EF
for A 514 steel or '1200EF for other steels.
4.2 Cutting
As far as possible cutting must be done by shearing, Oxygen cuttingshall be done where shear cutting ls not possible and shall preferablybe done by lvachine. All edges shall be free from gauges, notches olburs. lf necessary the same shall be removed by grinding.
4.3 Holes Punching Dril l ing.
Holes shall be punched where thickness of the material is not greaterthan the diameter of bolt + '1l8". Where the thickness of the materialis greater the holes shall either be drilled or sub-punched andreamed to size. The die for all sub-punched holes and the drill to allsub-drilled holes shall be at least 'll'16" smaller than the nominaldiameter of the rivet or bolt. Holes for A514 steel plates over 112"thick shall be drilled.
4.4 Weldino
4.4.1 General:
The execution and inspection of welding will be done inaccordance with the provisions of the American weldingsociety code for welding in Building construction, D1.0.No welding for piping/electrical supports shall be madetransversely to any tension flanges of trusses, beams or
3.8
3.9
4.
o
I
o
columns.
05100-2
I4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.5
Automatic sub-merged Arc Welding:
For all built-up members, i.e. sections fabricated fromolates and flat bars or compound rolled sections, plateand box girders, where long continuous, welding is to bedone, should be executed by Automatic submerged ArcWelding process in accordance with relevant AWSspecifications.
Maximum and minimum size and lengths of filletweldsshall be in accordance with AISC specifications.
Sudace to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag,rust, grease, paint or any other foreign matler except millscale which, withstands vigorous wire brushing.
Tolerances
A variation of I mm is permissible in the over all length ofmembers with both ends finished for Contact bearingThe bearing surfaces prepared to a common plane bymill ing.
l,4embers without end finished for contact bearing whichare to be framed to other steel parts of the structure shallhave a variation from detailed length not greater ihan 1/8
t
SURFACE PREPARATION/PAINTING
Suf€Ce Prqparation
a) All structural steel material i.e. rolled steel sections, plates, pipes,flat bars; chequered plates shall be cleaned free from loosescale, rust, burrs slag, etc. by means of sand blasting
Painting
a) lmmediately after surface preparation all material shall be givenone prime coat of rust preventive paint.
b) After fabrication one shop coat of prime paint and then one coatof enamel paint shall be applied.
c) One final coat of enamel paint shall be applied after erection of allcomponents.
d) The type of primer and enamel paints to be applied shall be asspecified on the drawings or as approved by Engineer'
e) All other requirements for the specified paint system shall beaccordance with the paint manufacturer's specificationrecommendations.
The Contractor shall use the best quality of the type ofspecified and shall get the same approved by the Engineer.
5 .1
5 .2
a
in
o05100-3
s) Steel shall be painted in shop or prime coated (one coat) and withnot less two field coats.
Paint shall not be applied when the steel is damp, air is misty, orwhen in the opinion of the Engin€er, conditions are unsatisfactoryfor the work.
Painting shall be done in a neat manner and may be applied withhand brushes or by spraying (without the addition of a thinner).Aluminum paint shall preferably be applied by spraying. By eithermethod adopted the coating applied shall be smoothly anduniformly spread 8o that no excess paint will collect at any point.
All surfaces which will be inaccessible after fabrication orerection, with the exception of contact surfaces, shall prior toassembly, receive the full prolective treatment specified for thecomponent of the structure including any additional priming coatand finishing coats, which for accessible surfaces would beapplied subsequent to erection
The cleaning and painting of all structural steel parts thall besubject to detailed inspection and approval of the Engineer.Contractor shall be responsible for all defects or faults and thecorrection theregf at his own expense during fabrication, erectionor subsequently discovered before or during the Period ofMaintenance
Steel work/Surfaces not to be Dainted
i) Steel work to be encased/embedded in concrete orsurface in contact with concrete or grout shall not bepainted, but shall be given a cement wash after sandblasting.
ii) [4aohined flnished surfaces shall not be painted but shall' be coated with rust preventive compound, (approved by
the Engineer) immediately after finishing. Such surfacesshall also be protected with wood pads or other suitablemeans for transportation. Unassembled pins, keys, andbolt thread shall be greased and wrapped with mojstureresistant PaPer.
o
D
n l
K)
INSPECTION AND TEST9
6.'1 lvlanufacturer's Work Test, Cerlificate for all material used shall befurnished by the contractor for Engineeas scrutiny and approval.
6.2 Rolling tolerance of all shapes and profile according to AISC shall be inaccordance with the provisions of the American Society for Testing andMaterials Designation A.6. These shall be checked by the Contractorbefore being worked upon and shall be rejected iffound not within limits.
6.3 The Contractor shall arrange for analysis and test of all material rolledlocally at a testing laboratory selected by the Engineer,
6.4 lnspection of Welding.
05100-4
o The inspection of welding shall be pertormed in accordance with theAmerican Welding Sociely specifications, as directed by the Engineer.
6.5 Rejection
Materials or workmanship not in reasonable conformance with theprovisions. of these specifications shall be rejected at any time during theprogress of the work or the completion and erection at site.
7. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT
7.1 General
7.1 . ' l
7 .1 .2
7 .1 .3
7 .1 .5
Except otherwise specified herein oi elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will (be, made for theunder mentioned-specified, works related to the relevant items ofthe Bill of Quantities. The cost thane of shall be deemed to havebeen included in the quoted unit rate of the respect" -e items of theBill of Quantities.
The rates quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities shallinclude works to be executed under this specification in any floor andat any height.
Nuts, bolts, screw, rivets, heads, fillets, welds weldingrods, locks, rollers, rolling tracks etc.
Antl-corrosive prime coat.
Cleaning with sand blasting.
Painting.
All metal embedded parts, metal fittings and fixturesrequired for the operational process.
05100-5
t .
sEcTloN - 05400
MANHOLE, CATCH PITS AND VALVE CHAMBERSWITH C.I COVER AND FRAME
SCOPE OF WORK
This section covers standard, drop, and special sewer manholes. The work to bedone under thls section of the specifications includes furnishing all plant, labor,equipment, appliances, material and performing all operations required inconnection with construction of manhole, valve chamber, or Grease trap etc,including provision and installation of cast iron cover with frame, ladder rungs,valves, etc., complete.as specified herein, or as shown on the drawings, or asdirected by the Engineer.
MATERIALS
Concrete Materials, handling, forms, finishing, curing, and other workas specified in Section 2'100 or 2200 Concrete.
Reinforcement As indicated on drawings,Portland cement ASTI\il C'150Sand Concrete sand (fine aggregate) sieved through I mesh
screenMortar
Non-shrinkable
Mortar
GasketsMastic
Flexible joint
Bricks
Wall/slab thickness
One part Portland cement, 3 parts sand, 1/4 part hydratedlime, ASTM C-207Premixed or job mixed; job mixed shall be one partshrinkablecorrecting aggregate, one part Portland cement and onepart sand.
Enough material shall be applied to fill the joint so that aminimum of % inch bead is visible, to be smoothened offafter completion.Preformed "0" ring: butyl rubber or bituminous polymersare acceptable. Natural rubber is not acceptiable.Bricks shall be l$class burnt bricks as per requirements ofspecifications No. 4200.Thickness shall be in accordance with those indicated ondrawings.
APPLICABLE SECTIONS OF SPECIFICATIONS
The followlng specification sections shall be followed for carrying-out civil worksassociated with this seotion.
s.No.
1.2 .3 .4.5.6.7 .
Section
EarthworKFormworkRe inforceme ntPlain and Reinforced ConcreteBrick MasonryPlumbingCast lron Cover with Frame and
g\
05400-1
Ladder Rungs
4. CONSTRUCTION
Manholes, Valves chamber or Grease trap etc. shall be of Reinforced CemettConcrete/Brick l\.4asonry of the sizes, thickness and class of concrete as shownon the applicable drawings. Where soil is alkaline sulfate resistant cement shallbe used for concrete work. The work of excavation, backfilling, disposal ofsurplus/rejected earth, plain and reinforced cement concrete, Formwork,reinforcement, benching, pipe connections and provision and installation of C.l.cover with frame, ladder rungs, valves etc., are to be done under this section andshall be executed in accordance with the specifications as stated above. C.l.frames, valves and ladder rungs shall be well set in place at the time of pouringconcrete.
Ail mortar shall be used within 40 minutes after mixing. Mortar, which has begunto take on initial set, shall be discarded and shall not be mixed with additionalcemenl or new cement.
l\ilanhole inverts shall be constructed of concrete conforming to the requirementsof section 3'100 & 3300, with eiception that the concrete shall have minimum 28-day strength of 3000psi.
In no case shall the invert section through a manhole be greater than that of theoutgoing pipe. The shape of the invert shall conform exactly to the lower half ofthe pipe it connects. Side connections shall be connected with as large radiuscurve as possible. All inverts shall be troweled to a smooth clean surface.
All mahholes under construction shall be covered in an appropriate manner toprevent the entry of any storm water run-off, trench water, sand, earth or anyother foreign substances at any time during cgnstruction or while the manhole isunattended.
CONCRETE MANHOLE SECTIONS
Manhole bases shall be pre-cast or cast-in-place reinforced concrete, seton a firm foundation. Flow channels and benches shall be shaped withconcrete.
Riser and base sections shall have cast or augured cut-outs of therequired diameter for connections and outlet pipes; maximum size of cut-outs shall be equal to the outside pipe diameter plus four (4) inches. Aclearance of at least nine (9) inches of concrete shall remain betweenadjacent connection and outlet pipe holes and betvveen riser joints andholes in pre-cast risers and bases. Lesser clearance will be consideredonly if additional reinforcing steel is provided and details are submitted foraooroval
For manholes on sanitary and combined flow sewers 24 inches andsmaller diameter, the Contractor shall install a lubricated, rubber gasketentry seal into the manhole wall to effect a watertight connection betweenthe connecting sewer pipe and the manhole.
Entry pipe shall be cut flush with the inside wall ofthe manhole,
Manhole risers shall be constructed of pre-cast concrete elements wherefeasible, otherwise of brick masonry. Risers and cone tops shall befurnished with manhole steps 12 inches on center. Manhole steps shall
4.1
aligned on vertical section of sidewall having no pipe entV, with st9{-/'.- .:}::'J;:.::."::ffi';"1'"'?"ii;:?HiliJl''
Iro P'Pe er'Iv' -" .r.G
)t' t ' .=u'
a 4.2 CIRCULAR BRICK MANHOLE SECTIONS.
Manhole brickwork shall be plumb except for th€ eccentric top section,true to line with level and accurately spaced courses, with each coursebreaking joint with lhe course below. Joints shall not be less than 318inch nor more than /2 inch with a minimum of one header course to everysix (6) stretcher courses. Each brick shall be placed with a tull joint in afull bed of mortar, shoved up against adjacent brick so that the mortarrises between and completely fills vertical joint. Exterior surfaces of brickmanholes shall be completely coated with a'lz inch mortar parging and
. made watertight. Brick Masonry wall shall be nine (9) inches thick;thickness shall be increased to 13.5 inches when manhole depth exceeds8 feet.
Brick masonry shall not be placed when the ambient air temperature isbelow 40 deg. F and when it appears probable that temperatures below40 deg. F will be encountered before mortar can set, unless adequateapproved means are provided for protecting the work from freezing. Workshall be protected by heating and maintaining the temperature of themasonry materials at not less than 40 deg. F. on both sides of themasonry for not less than 72 hours. Work with, or on, a frozen material isprohibited.
During hot weather, masonry shall be protected from direct rays of thesun. All finished work shall be covered and kept damp for a period ofseven days after placement.
. Mortar shall be freshly mixed for prompt use; no mortar shall be usedafter setting or beyond 40 minutes after the addition of water. Re-tempered mortar and freeze preventive chemical additives are prohibited.The mixing machine, batch size, and mixing time shall be approved bythe Engineer. When hand mixing is done, mixing shall be accomplished ina clean, leak proof; nonporous mortar box constructed for the purpose.
Proper size manhole steps shall be aligned ori section of side wall that isvertical to frame and cover, with step legs embedded 7-318 inches into thebrick work.
The Contractor shall fumish manhole frames drilled with two 3/4 inchesdiameter holes, 180 degrees opposed in frame flange. With frame inproper position at required grade, corresponding holes shall be drilledwith a minimum of tu/o (2) inches into the brick masonry upon which theframe sits. Steel dowels shall be inserted through these holes to preventlateral movemenl of frames during backfill and paving operations. Dowelsshall be No. 5 re-bars, three (3) inches minimum length, of approvedequivalent. A mortar bed shall be constructed around the frame flange.
4.3 COMBINEDCONCRETE/BRICKSECTIONS.
Where approved by the Engineer, manholes may be constructed from acombination of brick masonry, and cast in place reinforced concrete. Aftthe point where the different materials join, a watertight joint shall beprovided that leaves interior walls straight and smooth.
o
05400-3
f!*rtr!{!ry-., -
DAMP.PROOFING
Surfaces to receive damp-proof material shall be dry. Before backfilling is started,the exterior surfaces of manholes shall be painted with two heavy coats of coal tarpaint.
STUBLINES
Stub-lines for futurc connections shall be Drovided in manholes at the locationsindicated on drawings and shallterminate in a belland plug.
COVERS
Covers shall be set and securely fastened in place with concrete. The covers forsewer manholes shall be set at levels designated by the Engineer; but in generalshall be as follows:
fn paved areas, the cover shall be 118 to 'll4 inch above the surface ofsurrounding pavement.In graveled traffic ways or parking, the cover shall be set from '1'14 to 3/4inch above surrounding surface.In traffic ways of un-surflaced streets, the covers shall be setapproximately levelwith the ground suface.In grassed areas and the un-traveled portions of streets, the covers shallbe set from I lo 2 inches above the sudace.ln ditches or other drainage ways, the covers shall be set high enough tobe above the water in rainstorms.
6.
8.
t.
l .
9.
MANHOLE STEPS
N4ild steel steps (ladder rungs) ot y4 diamelet shgll be built into the walls ofmanhole bases as shown on drawings, with legs embedded at least 3-3/8 inchesinto the concrete and at least 7318 inches into the brickwork. First i.e. topmoststep shall be 18" below the top of manhole. Intermediate steps shall be placed @12" c./c, while the lowerniost step shall be, maximum 2'0" above the invert ofmannote.
MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
I\,,IEASUREI\4ENT
Measurement of acceptably complete works of manhole, valves chamberetc., will be made on the basis of actual quantities of manholes, valvechambers or Grease trap etc., constructed and installed in position asspecified herein, as shown on the drawings and/or as directed by theEngineer.
PAYI\,,lENT
Payment will be made for acceptable actual measured quantities ofmanholest valve chamber etc., on the basis of unit rate quoted in therelevant items Bills of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation forthe works related to the item.
9.'t
9.2
o05400-4
t .
2.
4.
5.1
4.
1.
sEcTtoN 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
SCOPE
1.1 Provide miscellaneous metals, sections, shapes and sheets, littings, fasteners,wirework, etc., not specified elsewhere in these Specifications and as shownon the Drawings.
RELATED WORK
2.1 Section 09900, Painting
SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, indicatingfabrication, assembly and erection details, sizes of members, profiles,fastenings, supports and anchors, pattems, clearances and connection toother work, before fabrication begins.
Submit complete materials list of all items proposed to be provided underthis section.
3 .1
4 .1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Standards:
and Erection of Structural
MATERIALS
G€neral: Provide material that is free from defects impairing strength,durability or appearance, that is of best commercial quality for purposes specified,and that has structural properties to safely sustain or withstand strains andstresses to which normally subjected. Throughout the facility, provide materialshaving the same inherent texture and color of exposed surfaces for like locations.lnsofar as practicable, provide non-conosive, non-siaining and concealedfagtenings. Where fastenings must be exposed, match materials, color andfinish as material to which applied, countersink and finish flush. Grindexposed welds smooth to form a neat uniform fillet without weakening basemetal. Remove all slag from welds before applying shop coating. Form molded bentor shaped members with clean, sham arrives, without dents, scratches, cracks orother defects. Provide all anchors, bolts, shims and accessory items asrequired for building into or fastening to adjacent work. Unless otherwisespecified, use only galvanized ferrous metals.
Steelr Provide miscellaneous steel plates, shapes, profiles, bars and
2.
3.
Uniform Building Code.
AISC Specifications for the Design, FabricationSteel for Buildings.
American Welding Society Code AWS D1.1.
OSHA Standards.
connections conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 36, duly painted in,z:i;i;-approved manner or else galvanized by the hot dip method aftets2- \Nfabrication in accordance with the requirements of ASTI\4 A 123. (:( A{" \)\
05500_ l \ : \ . r i , l', l__, ./
5.2
5.4
Steel Pipe: Provide steel pipe for miscellaneous members and connections thatconforms to the requlrements of ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 4Qor 80 as shown on drawings, galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
Anchor Bolts And Fasteners: Use Type 316 stainless steel wedge anchors, asmanufactured by Phillips Drill Company or equal for securing equipment andassemblies. Use adhesive anchors consisting of self contained vinylester adhesivecartridges and Type 304 stainless steel anchor rods equal to HVA adhesiveanchoring system, as manufactured by Hilti, or equal, of the size and aX thelocations shown on the Drawings. Provide all other fastenings, bolts, nuts, washersand anchors as shown in the Drawings. Zinc coated fastenings \,l/ill not beapproved except at wood nailers, or when other types of corrosion resistant materialsare not available. Use fasteners of adequate strength. for purpose intended.When steel anchors are indicated, use a one-piece design with expander ringconsisting of steel zinc-coated and chrome plated, as manufactured byMcCullough Industries, Inc., Kwick Bolt, or equal.
Welding Electrodesr Provide welding electrodes for structural steelconforming to AWS A5.5, E70XX. Use 4043 filler metal for aluminum. Use E308electrode where the base metal is Type 304 stainless steel and Type E 309 where thebase metal is Type 316 stainless steel or where siainless steel is welded to carbonsteel.
Steel Pipe Guards: Provlde galvanized steel pipe guards as detailed on theDrawings, including pipe sleeves, concrete fill, crushed fill and grouting to secureparts. Use schedule 40 steel pipe conforming to AST[/ A 53.
FABRICATION
Insofar as possible, f it and shop assemble fabricated material ready forerection. Provide welding equipment and perform welding in compliance withAmerican Welding Society's code for Welding in Building Construction, latestedition. Construct all work to be square, plumb and true, accurately fitted withtight joints and intersections. Finish exposed work smooth with welds groundsmootn.
Painting and Protective Coating:
'1. Except for galvanized surfaces, properly clean all ferrous metal andcoat surfaces with one shop coat of primer compatible with coatingsystem specified in Section 09900, Painting. Coat anchors that are builtinto masonry with asphalt paint unless specified to be galvanized. Do notcoat metal work to be encased in concrete unless specified or notedotherwise. Clean castings that are to be left unpainted and coat wilh acoal-tar-Ditch varnish.
2. Provide products fabricated from rolled, pressed or forged steel shapes,plates, bars and strips with hot-dip galvanizing or zinc coatings incompliance with ASTI\4 A 123. Provide assembled steel products withhot-dip galvanizing or zinc coatings in compliance with ASTI\,4 A 386.
Provide shop ooating of galvanized or zinc coated surfaces only wherespecifically specified shown on the Drawings. Chemically treatsuch surfaces prior to applying the coating to provide a bond for
6.
6 .1
6.2
oforto
paint.
05500-2
7 . ERECTION
Where the contact of dissimilar metals may cause electrolysis, separate thecontact surfaces of the metals using not less than one coat of zinc chromateprimer and one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented asphalt paint gn eachsurface; or where deemed necessary by the Engineer, use not less than onecource of asphalt saturated cotton fabric cemented to both metalg with flashingcement. Clean finished works and remove excess cement.
Adequately anchor all work in place at proper elevations, planes andlocations. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary torsecuring miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction includingthreaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, holdfasts, wood scre!!s, and otherconnectors as required.
Cutting, Fitt ing and Placement:
'1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fiftirig required for installation of miscellaneousmetal fabrications.
2. Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, and make plumb,level. true. and free from rack, measured from established lines and levels.
3. Provide temporary anchors in form work for items which are to be built intoconcrete or similar construction.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints.
Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot beshop welded because of shipping size l imitations.
Grind exposed joints smooth, and touch up shop paint coat. Do not weld,cut, or abrade the surface of exterior units which have been hot-dipgalvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed fieldconnecttons.
7.2
7.1
7 .4
4.
6 .
Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shieldedmetal-arc welding, appearance and quality of weld made, and methods incorrecting welding work.
Touch-Up Painting: lmmediately after erection, clean field welds, boltedconnections, and abraded area of shop paint and paint exposed areas withsame material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provideminimum dry fi lm thickness of 2.0 mils.
0s500-3
1 .
2.
sEcTtoN 05500
STEEL WORKS, STEEL GATE, WINDOWS AND GRILLS
SCOPE OF WORK
The work covered by this Section of the Specifications consist of furnishing,transporting and storing all plant, equipment, appliances labour and materialin performing all operations in connection wilh the fabrication, welding,erecting and painting of steel units complete in strict accordance with thedrawings and/ or as directed by the Engineer.
MATERIALS
All materials shall be new of the best standard commercial quality and shallbe approved by the Engineer.
CAST IRON
Cast iron should be ot good grey metal, sound. free from all f laws such aspitt ing due to impurit ies or sand from the pattern, cold shuts (i.e., irregularit iesdue to casting at too a low temperature, blow-holes etc. lt should have a cleansmooth surface, true to pattern.
WROUGHT IRON
Wrought iron should be of good tough metal with an even silky fibrous grainwhich wil l be apparent if twisted and bent. A good iron must be neither coldshort (i.e., britt le when cold due to production from an inferior core) nor hotshort (i.e., a tendency to cracking at the surface edges when working at redhot due to the presence of sulfur).
DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall prepare all necessary shop and erection drawingscovering the steel to be furnished under these Specifications. No fabricationand erection shall be taken in hand unti l these drawing have been approvedby the Engineer.
All work under this Section shall dri l l , tap, cut and fit the work included hereinas required, to accommodate work of other trades in conjunction with it.
The Contractor shall furnish all information and instructions required for workby other trades. Samples of material specified shall be submitted for approvalwhen required by the Engineer.
FABRICATION
All works shall be equal to the best modern practice in the manufacture andfabric€tion of structural steel noh,vithstanding any omission from thesespecifications or drawings. Allfabrications shall conform to BS-449.
Before being laid out or worked in any way, the steel shall be straight and freefrom kinks and bends. lf straightening is necessary it shall be done by methodsthat will not injure the metal. Shearing and cutting by torch or electric shall beperformed careful, and all portions of the work whicompletion shall be finished neatly.
o.
05600-1
',
8.
9.
All holes shall be cylindrical, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,perpendicular to the member and clean cut without buried or ragged edges.Holes in the material shall be drilled to full size and shall be accurately andcarefully placed. The length ol bolts shall be in 1/4 of an inch variation, and whenin the steel gate, the bolts shall extend attests 1/4 of an inch beyond the nuts.
WELDING
Welding shall be done by qualified and licensed welders under the supervision ofexpert Fabrication Engineer. All the welding shall be executed according to BS-
All defective and damaged works shall be rejected at the sole risk and cost of theContractor.
Where welding is required in the works as per drawings or as required by theEngineer, the welding shall develop the full strength ofthe adjoining steel.
ERECTION
The method of erection and propping the frames and windows, shall beaccording to the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer shallinspect and approve all the equipment tefiporary works and other remisesproposed to be adopted for the erection and safety of the steel sections. Thecontractor shall be responsible for the safety of damage to any person or to anypart of the building while the work is in progress.
All steel sections shall be accurately assembled and erected as shown on theDrawings, on the scheduled dates in complete harmony and coordination withthe progress of other construction works in the building. All of the material shallbe handled carefully so that no part will be bent, broken or damaged otherwise.Hammering that will injure or distort the members will not be permitted.
Prior to erection of the steel, all shoe plates, down holding bolts etc.,., shall befixed/grouted dead accurale in levels and alignment as per details shown on thedrawings or as directed by the Ehgineer.
STEEL GRILL/RAILING
Grill and railings shall be of design and type shown in the drawings or of thepattern approved by the Engineer., MS. Flats of approved size shall be welded tosteel fame of similar section which shall be fixed /screwed to windows/ventilatorframes. Grills and railings shall be installed on the inner or outer side ofthe frameas indicated and shall be painted with two coats of primer and three coats ofapproved quality enamel paint.
G.I. ROLLING SHUTTERS
Rolling shutters shall be mounted on the face of the wall, operated by hand andshall conform to the design and size shown on the drawings.
The Contractor shall submit the shop drawings for approval to the Engineerbefore starting the fabrication of Rolling Shutters. The shutters shall bemanufactured from 20 guage G.l. Sheets having track channels of 2" wide onboth sides. The top covering case shall be fabricated from 24 guage G.l. sheets.Best quality imported springs shall be used for rolling the shutter. Adequatenumber of holdfasts 10" long shall be
10.
05600-2
1',t.
columns and beams for the installation of rolling good, including installing andflxing of rolling shutters is inclusive of the cost of shutters.
Spray painting with approved shade of enamel paint shall be done over a coat ofred oxide primer before installing the rolling shutter and a final coat shall be doneafter installation as per directions and satisfaction of the Engineer.
MANHOLE COVERS
Cast iron Manhole Covers of approved quality and patern will be used.
STEEL LADDERS
The Steel Ladder shall consist of mild steel flats in strings and 25mm dia. mildsteel bars in rungs. The mild steel rungs shall be rjveted and welded in 25mmdia. holes in the flats. The ends of each climb of the ladder shall be embedded inthe concrete.
All components of the steel ladder shall be first painted with ttwo coats ofapproved red oxide primer and then with three coats of black enamel paint. Thesteel ladder shall be fabricated and installed as per drawings and as directed bythe Engineer.
LOCKERS
Steel Lockers shall be manufactured form MS sheet of 14 gauge and shallconform to BS Specifications '15 and 449. All the welding work in the locker shallconform to as specified there-in-before. The locker shall be fitted with best qualityPak-made locks and be finished duly painted with approved quality enamel paintas described here-in-before except that painting shall be carried out by spraying.
ALUMINIUM RAILING
Aluminum Railing for fixing in staircase or Balcony shall be manufactured of 1-1\4" x 1-1\4" hollow square aluminum section having a 3/4" dia. L4S bars insertedwithiir. These will be embedded 3" in the steps at distances a indicated in theDrawings. 1-1\4" x 1-'l\4" MS Flat section shall be welded at the top having holesdrilled at 1L6" center to center to screw for attaching the wooden handrail ofspecified hard wood. Wooden hand-rail shall be polished/painted as perdirections of the Engineer,
STEEL GATE
Steel Gate shall be manufactured of the type and design of steel grills describedhere-in-before. All the MS sections and plates shall be approved by the EnginPainting to gates shall be carried out after installation as describedbefore.
KITCHEN HOOD
Kitchen hood shall be manufactured with laminated chip board (20mm thick) wit26 gauge galvanized iron sheet as lining. The related shop drawings of kitchenhood shall be submitted by the Contractor, before starting the work for theapproval of Engineer,
At the bottom opening of the hood 25mm size angle iron shall be fixed along theentrance perimeter. The exit opening of hood shall pass through walls or ceilingsas directed by the Engineer and the height of exit above roof shall be 600 mm.
12.
13.
14.
'15.
16 .
o A(05600-3
17.
The cost of cutting holes through walls or ceiling and making good he same shallbe inclusive of the cost of kitchen hood. A canopy shall be installed over the exitof hood to protect the kitchen from rain water.
The entire body of the hood shall be hanged by angle iron frame and holdfastsfitted with the walls and ceiling.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bill of Quantities or herein, all the workand costs involved within the scope of this Section of Specifications shall bedeemed to be in collusive of but not limited to the followings:
i. Contractor's establishment charges, overhead charges, profit, interest.
ii. ' All other expenses, charges, iaxes speclfied in the Conditions of Contract.
iii. Labour and all costs in connection therewith.
iv. Use of plant, equipment and machinery and all costs in connectiontherewith e.9., mobilization, transporting, fuel, energy, grease, oil,installing, operation, storing, watching, retiring, replacing, handling,maintaining, idle stand, parking, removing damaged, destroyed andsalvaged items.
v. l\4aterial and goods, e.g. marketing, selecting, conveyance, loading,unloading, storing, watching, returning, handling, hoisting, lowering,cutting, bending, placing, binding wires, supplying splice, reinforcing steel,jointing, fixing, wastage, removing destroyed, damaged salvagedmaterial.
vi.. Cost of all laboratory and field tests and collection of samples stipulatedin these soecifications.
The measurement for payment of steel items thall be by weight in TONNES orotherwise stated, of miscellaneous metal works acceptably provided, fabricated,painted and installed.
The payment of Kitchen Hood acceptably provided, fabricated and installed shallbe made as per bottom area of hood above burners.
The measurement of payment of aluminum railing with one of tr,vo wooden hand-rails shall be by actual area measured in square meter, acceptably provided,fabricated and installed.
0s600-4
o sEcTtoN . 06100
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
SCOPE
1.1 GENEMLThe work covered under this section of Specifications consists of provlding allmaterial, labour, plant, equipment, appliances and pedorming all operations inany floor and at any height connected with the fabrication and erection of allwoodwork, mill work, construction assembly, surface finish treatment andbuilding in of all cabinet type items, supports etc. of wood or metal andincidentals, associated woodwork appurtenances, procuring and applyingoreservatives, installation of "Finish Hard Ware" in connection with finishwoodwork as per details shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
1 .
All wood work required to be furnished and installed intreatment of exposed interior surfaces or spaces. that isfinished and building structure is hereby classified as "Mill
connection with finishcut, fitted, built-in and
aAll finished mill work that is constructed, assembled and provided with surfacefinish treatments in a shop outside building structure is hereby classified as'CABINET WORK" Reference to surface Finish Treatment includes the filling,staining, shellacking or waxing of all cabinet type wood work, unless noted tocontrary.
1,2 GENERAL APPLICABLE REQUIREIMENTSIn connection with general requirements of the General Conditions of theContract, contractor's specific attention is directed to the paragraph on lvlaterialsand workmanship, Construction procedures, Protective Measures, TemporaryConstruction. Utilities and furnish and/ or perform all work and / or servicesrequired therein, and in particular in relation to "Protective measures" involvingtemporary railings, field office, stairways, toilet enclosures, ladders and the like instrict accordance with first class building construction practice and all applicablelocal building, fire and sanitary code requirements. In all instances compliancewith aforesaid requirements shall be subject to Consultant's satisfaction andapproval. Where external corners occur provjde heavy tape gesunder wood protection.
MATERIALS
2.1 Timber and Lumber wood
o
All lumber and wood for rough carpentry shall, unless shown on drawingsor approved otherwise be new lumber, S4S, well-seasoned, air dried firstquality native partal or deodar, or any other specie conforming torequirements thereof or equivalent kind and quality. Wood for blocking,grounds, nailing strips, and/or other woodwork incident to carpentry andjoinery and/or for use of other trades unless specified otherwlse, shall besecond quality partal or deodar, perfect sound and free from lose knots,clusters or surface knots that would interfere with or preclude the soundattachment thereof and/or sacrament to the work.
Unless specified therwise, general lumber gradingconform to British Standards 1186 Part-'l and/or
06100-l
requirements shall
o quality requirements. The moisture content of lumber shall be more than10%.
2.1.1 Hard Wood:
Hard wood shall comprise of Oak, beech, Walnut lvlahogany,Teak, lroko and Sheesham.
2.1.2 Soft Wood:
All soft wood shall consist of pines, spruce, hemlock and douglas.fir or cedrous deodar (referred in the document as deoder), woodlocally known as 'Partal' to be used in shutter core where
. specified.
2.1.3 General Characteristics:
All the timber shall be in accordance with the requirements ofBSI No: 1186, 'Quality of Timber and Workmanship in Joinery'.
The whole of the timber shall be from the heart of sound and fullygrown tree, uniform in substance, straight in fibre, first classquality properly s€asoned, free from large or loose dead-knots,open shakes and excessive sapwood. The scantlings of alltimbers shall be bright, sound and square edged. The moisturecontsnt of timber shall not be more than '10 (ten) percent in caseof soft wood and 7 (seven) percent in case of hard wood.
2.1.4 Preservation of Wood:
Prior to installation of all finish wood works in their respectivepositions. Preservatives shall be applied to safeguard the woodwork against fungus termite and bores.
The preservatives shall be of the best available quality asapproved by the Engineer. The method of application shall bestrictly in accgrdance with the manufacturer's instructions. Thetreatment and application of all the preservatives shall complywith the reouirements of BS-CP 98r1964.
2.1.5 Adhesive:
The adhesives shall conform745 "Animal Glues for Wood"be considered approved forapproved by the Fngineer.
2.1.6 Nails and Screws
to the requirements of BSI No.manufactured by Mls Hoest shallthis Project or as directed and
O
All nails and screws shall comply with requirements of BNO. '1202 and BS NO. 1210 respectively.
Ply Wood
The ply wood shall comply in all respects with BSI No. 1455:1963. All theply wood shall only be obtained from KDC Board (Pvt.) Limited, Jhelum oras approved by the Engineer. All plywood shall be manufactured with
06100-2
2.3
phenol formaldihide or any other approved water proof adhesive but notwith urea formaldihide.
Ply wood used for doors, and other similar works shall be to the thicknessand size as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Thegrade shall be first quality and the face and back shall be free from endjoints, dead knots, overlaps, patches and other similar defects. Thesurfaces shall be free, smooth for painting or polishing.
The veneer shall be of the required thickness and quality including baseveneer and shall be impregnated with an approved adhesive and machinecomoressed. Such machine pressed veneered wood shall be fixed on allsides of the inner core wood (soft wood or approved quality) after it hasbeen treated with water resistant not setting glue.
Medium Denslty Fibre (MDF) Board
Medium density tibre board to be used on the project shall be LASANImanufactured by Al-Noor MDF Board Industries of thicknesses asspecified in the drawings. Board shall be manufactured with water proofresinous glues and shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer. All boardsrequired for the exterior surfaces of cabinets shall be laminated withformica in approved colour and texture in factory as specified elsewhere.
Veneer Laminated Particle board (Laminated Vin board)2.4
SAMPLES
All samples of the material used for the work under this Section of Specificationshall be approved by the Engineer and same type of material shall be usedthroughout the work. lf the Engineer desires to get the material.tested, this willbe got done by the Contractor at his own cost from a laboratory approved by theEngineer.
FABRICATION
'Unwrought' timber shall be used. Sawing shall be done with sufficient oversizemargin to finally meet the requirements of specified sizes and dimensions of thefinished work.
All framing shall be joined and glued properly as shown on the Drawings or asdirected by the Engineer. All joints shall be secured with sufficient number ofnaits. The Contractor shall perform all necessary mortising, tanning, grooving,matching, tangoing, housing, rebating and all operations required for the correctjointing. The Contractor shall also provide all metal plates, screws, nails andother fixing material that may be ordered by the Engineer for the properexecution of the joinery work. Fabrication that develop defects due to badworkmanship or unsound materials not conforming to these specifications andthe directions of the Engineer, shall be cut out and replaced at Contractor'sexpense before the expiry of the maintenance period.
5. PROTECTION OF MATERIALS
All materials and assembled units shall be orotected from weather and stored insuch a way as to prevent decay, warping and attack by fungus and termites.
4.
(\406100-3
IGENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP ETC.
a. g!!!!4!,-p3[cl!!s-.!L-Ei!!!si
Perform all cutting and fitting of work of other trades as required to securework herein specified, including that for any plumbing, air conditioningand electrical work, and do all required patchjng after other trades.
b. Grounds and Blockinq:
All wood grounds, blocking centers, nailing strips, cants, all wood grids forframing etc., provided as required to secure carpentry and of sizesrequired.
Grounds sized and dressed to proper dimensions. Where not otherwiseindicated, shall be 314" x2" in size, set to line, square at angles, blockedout as necessary and securely fastened at intervals not exceeding 16".Grounds against concrete shall be secured in place with expansion bolts.Grounds that are not satisfactory shall be taken down and approvedgrounds reset at contractor's expense. Grounds provided behind all woodtrim in every instance.
Nailers and canta provided at walls for naillng base flashing. Nailers 2"thick and secured with steel strap anchors as shown. Nailers for baseflashing given a heaw coat of creosote wood preservatjve and / or ofother approved types of bitumastic paint on all surfaces and ends beforesetting in place. Any surfaces of wood cut after treatment shall besimilarly thoroughly coated.
c.
6 .1 .
Rouqh Hardware:
All nails, bolts, screws and any other roughsacrament devices required to securely fasten allfurnished and installed for any work herein.
builders' hardware,work in place shall
orbe
MILL AND CABINET WORK
Soecie of Woodl
Shall be Deodar for all items of finished wood andto have paint finish.
Qualitv and Workmanshio:
All wood for interior finished mill and cabinet work shall be thoroughly air-cured and if possible kiln dried stock, satisfactory to Engineer.
All material specified herein shall be product of one mill insofar aspracticable. Contractor shall submit for approval the name of Sub-contractor for mill and cabinet work called for on scale drawings. Only firstclass cabinet type workmanship will be admissible in execution of thiswork, performed by artisans skilled in this trade, so as to provide cabinetwork of the highest grade, quality, finish and installation as specified andrequired:
Care shall be exercised by careful screening to avoidcolour and graining of finished wood for all wood
06100-4
strongsurfaces of
6.4.
Paneling, wall facing etc., so that any one room or wall surface willpresent a reasonably uniform appearance. All cutting, framing and fittingshall be done as required for accommodation of work of other trades.
Use of wood chips, shims or other shrinkable material for leveling orplumbing will not be permitted in any form.
Mortise and tenon joints set in any approved type of water and moistureproof glue with wedges and/or pinned. Shop melters 4" or more to beglued and doweled and / or locked with a metal ring. Melters less than 4"shall have concealed spleens.
Insofar as practicable, all mil lwork, paneling etc., assembled in shop.back painted and finished throughout before delivery to building.
Edge banding shall in no instance be less than 3/'16'thick. All veneeredwork put together with phenolic resin glue by hot plate process andfinished veneered wood facing provided with some form of protectlvefinish to be incorporated ln the final finish prior to delivery to job, if notfinished in shop.
In addition to machine sanding, all interior trim, paneling and wood workshall be smoothed by hand, using "00" sand paper to give all wood workthe required smooth surface for exoosed finished treatment and free frommachine and tool marks, abrasion, raised grains and other undesirabledefects. All wood work shall be fitted to plaster or other finished work in acareful manner so as not to injure these surfaces in any way. Whereplaster or other work is damaged or disturbed it shall be retorted to itsoriginal state and/ or made good without cost to the Employer at theContractor's expanses.
Centerinq, Blockino etc.:
Centering, blocking, grounds and furring, furnished and installed for allabove items of wood work as sDecified hereinafter.
Solid Wood Stock & Veneer etc.:
a. ll&egslectsSelect quality, kiln air dried to within 5% of moisture content,straight and true, free from defects that would impair appearanceof finished wood, selected for colour and graining to matchselected veneers.
Veneers:
Flat sliced with minimum heart pattern to match approved samplesand cut to eliminate all defects and any imperfection that wouldprovide an objectionable appearance in Engineer's opinion and tomaintain a uniform grain and /or figure throughout, and cut fromsame flinch of any individual cabinet item surface or door facing..Door surface facings in single lengths, in no intense applied orjointed horizontally.
All veneering for doors and panel and for other veneeredmembers and where one length of material joints another, s (.i
06100-5
perfectly matched, and edges of doors and similar members facedto match finish in spaces where edges will show when open.
WOODEN DOORS
6.1 Materials
6.2
6.1.1 First class Deodar wood as approved by the Engineer shall beused for door frames and door shutters except the core ofshutters which shall be partal wood or as specified and shown ondrawings.
6.1.2 . Architraves, beads, lippings shall be of Deodar wood ofspecified sizes and fixed as per details shown on Drawings.
Ground, Blocking & Nailing Strips
Ground. blocking and nailing strips shall be provided as necessary toreceive the work included herein and as required for the work of othertrades.
Except as otherwise shown or specified, ground blocking and nailingstrips shall be secured in place as follows:
6.2.1 To steel-- by means of 3/8" diameter bolts spaced not over 3 feet.
6.2.2 To brick wall --- by the use of cut nails spaced not more than 1.5feet apart and driven directly into the block.
6.2.3 To poured concrete --- by means of 1/4' diameter galvanizedexpansion bolts spaced not more than '1.5 feet part or by anyapproved method.
Exterior and Interior Wooden Door Frames
All exterior and interior wooden door frames shall be fabricated ofwooden sections of first class deodar wood frame as shown onorawngs.
All exposed surfaces of frames and architraves/beads shall be paintedwith synthetic maft finished enamel paint of approved shade as per theinstructions of the Engineer.
The door frames shall be secured in place by means of 4 inches screwsand matching Rawal plugs and built into the plastered masonry after thesame has dried. 4 number screws in each jamb and 2 number for upto3.5 feet width and 3 number for upto 5 feet width of doors in the headshall be used.
Door Shutters/Panels
The shutters/Panels will be fixed to thefitlings as per hardware schedule.
6 .3
o
6.4
06100-6
frames with quality
6.4.1 All doors. shutters/Danels shall be fabricated in a workman likemanner strictly to the correct sizes and shapes as shown on theDrawings or as directed by the Engineer.
6.4.2 The door shutters/panels shall be built in sections, properlyjointed and glued together. The surfaces shall be prepared forpainting or polishing.
6.4.3 Paneled DoorsAll door shutters/panels shall be paneled, fabricated from firstclass wood as shown on drawinqs.
Flush Solid Core Shutters. The door shutters shall be 1-112" thick flush type with
commercial ply, factory finished and approved by the Engineer.The thickness of ply shall be at least 'll8". The shutter framesshall be made with best quality Deodar wood. The lock rail shallbe 6'and hinge style along with top and boftom rails shall be 4"wide. lnside this frame '1-112" wide Deodar wood stripsforming 4" squares shallbe used.
The shutter frames before pressing the ply wood may bechecked by the Engineer at the factory or Contractor'sworkshop. The Contractor is obliged to inform the Engineer forchecking the same before pressing.
All flush doors so manufactured shall be allowed to season toremove excess moisture from glue before cross banding andany face veneers are applied.
Cross banding on flush doors shall be 1/16" thick and be plateddrled before applying to cores to remove excess moisture. Aftercross bandings have been applied to cores and before applyingface veneers, they shall be sanded to ensure a smooth surfacebefore applying face veneers.
Veneers for flush doors shall be sliced and in no case not lessthan 1/28" thick after sanding.
Finishing of shutters shall be done after pressing the ply wood,and fixing Deodar wood strlps of l-112" x 112" cross section attop and bottom of the shutters. Finishing procedure shall be asspecified in the relevant section of these Specifications underheading "Painting".
Doors shall be provided with Brass fittings of specified pattern.Each door shall have 3 butt hinges 5" long. Tower bolts anddoors stoppers shall be provided as shown in the drawing and /or as required by the Engineer.
6.4.4 Each door shall be constructed so as lo permit the installationof hinges, knobs and locks in the position shown on theDrawings)
Completed doorswarp. All edgesclose fitting, hard
shall be sound, rigid and free from defects andshall be aligned and smooth, joints shallwood doweled or mortised framed and
06100-7
o
strength to maintain frame and of strength to maintain thestructural properties of the member connected. All adjoiningfaces and edges shall be flush and smooth. Edges shall berectangular End solid.
6.4.6 All exposed surfaces of wooden frames and wooden shuttersshall be painted with synthetic matt finished enamel paint ofapproved shade as per the instructions of the Engineer.
6.4.7 Chamfers shall be made as shown on the drawings or asdirected by the Engineer.
6.5 Fitt ing. Hanging and trimming
All the doors shall be fjtted, hung and trimmed as hereinafter specifiedand as indicated on the Drawings.
Doors shall have a clearance of 1/8" at sides and top unless otherwisedirected by the Engineer and shall have 3/'16" olearance at bottom. Doorsshall be hung and trimmed with hardware as specified. All the locks shallbe installed at the same height and shall be located at height as directedby the Engineer. Where directed by the Engineer margin for carpet shallbe incorporated in the door shutter.
6.6 Hardware
Hardware shall be of best quality local or imported make extra heaw dutyas specified on drawings and first class finished material except doorlocks and door closures which shall be imported as per the approval ofthe Engineer or as shown on drawings in hardware schedule. TheContractor shall obtain prior approval from the Engineer for quality,shape, pattern, and brand of all the hardware materials by providingsamples and catalogues, etc., and shall provide and fix only the approvedhardware materials.
Hardware shall be carefully and securely fitted. Upon handing over thework, hardware shall be demonstrated to operate freely. Keys shall beplaced into respective locks and upon acceptance of the work keys shallbe tagged and delivered to the Engineer.
6.7 Fly Proofing
All external doors and windows will have fly-proof shutters 1-112" thick inDeodar wood. They will be provided with brass fittings.
The external fly-proof doors will also be provided with a strong goodquality spring for automatic closing. The gauze used for fly-proofing shallbe of aluminum of 256 mesh per square inch of approved make.
6.8 Quality Assurance
6.8.1 Tolerances: Doors shall be fabricated to following tolerances
- Size: Plus or minus 1/16 in overall -- dimensions lvlaximum Warp: 1/8"- Squareness: Maximum diagonal difference 'll8"
(between length of diagonal measured on face ofa06100-8
o from upper right corner to r left corner and length ofdiagonal measured ftom upper Ieft comer to lower rightcorner).
6.7.2 Manufacturer's Qualifications: The manufacturer of doors hereinspecified shall have been in business of manufacturing doors oftype specified for minimum period of five years.
Submittal
6.8.1 Provide manufacturer's literature completely describing products.
6.8.2 Provide shop drawings showing door types, details and locations,referred to the door type and hardware group shown on door andhardware schedules.
6.8.3 Provide certificate stating that doors were constructed with timberof the species specified (having moisture content and meetingequilibrium and relative humidity requirements.
6,8,4 Submit samples of plywood for selection of colour and grain
6.8.5 Procurement of materials shall be made only after the shopdrawings and samples have been approved by the Engineer.
6.9 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
6.9.1 Deliver and store products in waterproof, protective containers withseals unbroken and labels intact untiltime to use.
6.9.2 Keep products dry, stack products off ground on level platforms,fully protected from weather, including direct sunlight.
6.9.3 ldentify type, size and location of each door before delivery In oroerto permit installation at correct location.
6.10 lnstallation
6.'10.1 Install doors at correct openings and assure smooth swing andproper closer with frames.
6.10.2 Installfinish hardware in accordance with manufacturer directions.
7. WOODEN RAILING
l\4aterial for wooden hand railing in stairs shall be superior quality teak wood/deodar wood &11/2 inch dia. mild steel oipes. lt shall be fabricated and installedin accordance with the design shown on the drawings/details and as per theinstructions of the Engineer. Sample of railing shall be fabricated & mock upsamples installed at locations designated by the Engineer for approval, prior tostarting work at site. Shop/detail drawing indicating the basic details at variouslocations including details at turnings shall be submitted by the Contractor forEngineer's approval. Hand railing shall be installed to line level and plumb. Thesurface of railing in stairs shall be prepared for polishing. The railing shall bepolished/painted with clear lacquer and the steel surfaces shall be painted with
6 .8
a
a Hmatt finished enamel paint.
06100-9
8. WARDROBES/CUPBOARDS
Wardrobes shall be made in places specified for them on the plan. Other thanblock masonry all the work shall be included in the item of wardrobe. lt willcontain one RCC slab of thick- ness 3" both sides plastered or fair faced fixedabove for making a cabinet for heavier articles like boxes etc. Below that a 1:brass pipe shall be fixed for hanging the clothes. In the bottom of wardrobe twoplanks of chipboard 3/4'thick clad with commercial ply both sides shall be fixedat an interval of 1 ft from the bottom. The shutters shall also be of 3/4" thickchipboard cladded with commercial ply having a 1" wide frame of best qualitydeodar wood all around the shutter. These shufters shall be fixed in Deodarwood frame of 2' x 1-112" croas section fixed on the face of wardrobe. Theinternal surface of the wardrobe shall be plastered and painted with enamel paintof aoDroved make and shade on all wooden and concrete surface. All brasshardware of approved quality viz. handle, locks and hinges etc., shall be used.For payment of wardrobes, the front shutter area shall be measure and paid insquare meter.
L HOLLOW METAL STEEL DOOR FRAMES
Door frames shall be 14 guage mild steel sheet to exact profiles with prime coat.Except as otherwise indicated, corners of frames shall be welded together androunded.
Door frames shall be provided with steel sheet reinforcement for all hardwareincluding door checks and closures. Reinforcement plates shall be at least asthick as diameter of screws used for securing hardware.
Frames shall rest on concrete slabs floor have temporary bottom spreader barsand be secured with concealed clip, angles and wall anchors.
Frame Anchors:
Door frames shall have not less than three (3) Tee wall anchors and one (1) clip-angle type floor anchor perjamb as per manufacture's recommendations.
Wall anchors shall be adjustable welded tee or strap anchors of 8 inches lengthfor masonry constructions.
Wall anchors at construction other than masonry as indicated shall be of specialdesign for anchoring to column and RCC walls as per the instructions of Architector Engineer.
DEFECTIVE WORK
In the event of non-conformance to specification and drawings, the wood worksshall be rejected by the Engineer and the Contractor shall remove andthe rejected work by new work of same specifications.
MOCK-UP SAMPLE
After approval of shop drawings and tests etc., the contract shall submit atown cost one mock-up sample of each type of wood works complete with afixing, fixtures accessories prior to the actual fabrication of the bulk.
o
10.
O
11 .
06100- 10
12.
The samples shall be returned to the Contractor forafter installation of at least 8070 of the works.
incorporation in the works
SURFACE PREPARATION
The surfaces of all wood works shall be prepared in the manner as directed bythe Engineerfor polishing or painting.
1. Prior to application of any linish treatment all wood surfaces shall bethoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter, dirt, oil , grease, cement plasterstains, finger marks and the like. Should badly .disfigured or damagedsurfaces be encountered, that are unsuitable to receive finish treatments,attention shall be called to Engineer before proceeding and await hisconclusion.
2. All exposed surfaces of any wood work, shall be entirely smooth andunblemished when erected.
3. Sand paper thoroughly using a fine grade of sand paper and then sand asecond time, moistening sand paper with best quality refined linseed oil.
4. Where crevices, deep open wood pores and any other defective surfaces arepresent, that are " re-feaslble", they shall be filled with approved " Stopping
PRIME PAINTING AND OR FINISHINGContractor shall have option of finishing any portions of this work either on siteand/ or in a shop. All priming and back painting shall be completed by theContractors. All mill work primed and painted done coat of lead and oil paint,sanding and shellacking all knots, as specified for wood finish (Painting) and leftin an approved condition to receive required finish treatments as specified, byPaintino Contractor.
REFITTING AND CHECKINGlmmediately before building is occupied, the Contractor shall examine all doorsand other movable parts of all case and cabinet works, to see that all are inperfect opera|ng condition. All edges of doors, including the bottom edges ofdoors before and after refitting, shall be sealed with approved water resistantmaterials.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED PRODUCTS, INTERIOR WOOD WORK ETC.It shall be the responsibility of the contractor and he shall be held accountable forthe explicit protection of all finished cabinet work, interior trim and decorativetreatment until. Final Inspection and acceptance. Engineer and/or Employerreserve the right to order replacement at no additional cost to contract sum, forany and all work so injured, and/or damaged a to be unsightly after repairing and/ or refinishing. Authorization to repair and / or reflnish shall not constitute waiverof Employer's right to require replacement of any item of work if unsatisfactory tohim after such repairing and / or refinishing.MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT
13.1 General
13 .
14.
15.
Except otherwise soecified herein or elsewhereDocuments, no measurement and payment will
the Contmade foro $Aq.f-:t,fE
14.
06100-11
under mentioned specified works related to the relevant items of theBill of Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have beenincluded in the quoted unit rate of the respective/items of the Bills ofQuantities.
The rates quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities shallinclude work to be executed under these specification in any floorand at any height except where otherwise specifically stated in therelevant item of Bill of Quantities and the Contractor shall not beentitled to any claim or claim any compensation on this acco!nt.
13.1.'l Glazing (all types) where required and all finished hardwarefittings in carpentry and joinery works, including lockingarrangement (L-drop/sliding bolt), kick and push plate,architrave, beading, maklng groves, handles, lockingarrangements etc.
13.1.2 Prime coat, painting with synthetic enamel painvlacquelpolish in carpentry and joinery workslhand railing.
'13.1.3 Anti termite treatment to wood works and adh€sives.
13.1.4 Steel balusters, steel base and steel strips for wooden railingand steel reinforcing member in paneled doors.
'13.1.5 Mild steel door frames, anti-rust oaint and all additionalstrengthening measures including Concrete Class 'D' f i l l ing.
13.2 Wooden Door
13.2.1 l\,4easurement
13.3
Measurement of acceptably completed works of all types ofwooden doors will be made on the basis of net actual area insquare feet fabricated and installed in position as shown onthe Drawings or as directed by the Engineer Net area will bemeasured in accordance with plastered masonry openingbetween jambs and plastered head and bottom of shutter.
13.2.2 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of alltypes of wooden doors on the basis of unit rate per squarefeet quoted in the Bill of Quantities against respective itemand shall constitute full compensation for all the worksincluding all hardware & fittings as per details mentioned inVolume lll ofTender (Contract Document related to the item.
Door Locks
13.3.'1 Measurement
Measurement of acceptably completed work of door locks willbe made on the basis of actual number of door locks providedand installed in position as shown on the Drawings or as
i:,:r;*irected bv the Ensineer.
o06100-12 ...
I13.3.2 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofdoor locks on the basis of unit rate per number (each) quotedin the Bill of Quantities. Payment shall constitute fullcompensation for all the works related to the item.
a
a
06100-13
a sEcTtoN - 07100
WATER PROOFING/EXPANSION JOINT FILLING
1 , SCOPE
The work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations inany floor and at any height in connection with installation of insulation, water-proofing & built up roofing, including water proof treatment to foundations andbasement structures complete in strict accordance with this section of thespecifications and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms andconditions of the contract
SUBMITTAL
2.1 Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submittedthe details for construction.
2.2 Samples of all materials proposed for use undersubmitted to the Engineer for approval.
2.
showing layout and all
this section, shall be
3. MATERIALS
3.'l Bitumen shall be 80/100 grade and Special Industrial Bitumen (SlB)HYCARB A-10 of National Petrocarbon Ltd.
3.2 Polyethylene building film visqueen standard or approvedshall be 0.006" thick (6 mil)
The fi lm
3.3 Cement and aggregates shall be in accordance with specifications for "Plainand reinforced concrete".
Not Used
Brick tiles shall conform to specifications for "Brick lvlasonry" and concretechequered tiles shall conform to relevant specifications provided in Section-6600.
Sealant to be used in expansion joints and flashings shall be 2 partpolysulphide orapproved equivalent.
PVC Geo-membrane as per ASTM standards or approved equal. Thethickness of membrane shall be 0.25 mm minimum or as shown ondrawings.
Mud Plaster shall be composed of stiif clay.
Puddled earth shall be composed of stiff clay to which nt ofchoooed rice husk/bhoosa shall be added.
4. DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
Materials shall be protected from damage during loadingstorage. Non-staining materials shall be used for blocking and packing
3.4
3 .5
3.6
3 .7
3.8
3.9
O07100-1
ry and,
EXECUTION
5.1 PREPAMTORY WORK
5.'1.'l All scuppers and roof drains shall be placed and metal flashingflanges etc. shall be provided in time to be installed along withthe roofing assembly.
5.1.2 All surfaces, to be treated shall be dust free and dry. Applicationof roof finishes shall not start unless the preparatory work hasbeen inspected and approved by the Engineer.
APPLICATION
5.2.1 Roofing shall not be applied during rain or while surfaces aredamp, it shall be applied only to surfaces that are clean and dry.
5.2.2 lilopping of surface wlth bitumen shall be performed so that thesurface shall be completely covered, Coats of bitumen shall be asspecified in drawings. All bitumen shall be applied with mopsexcept that the hot surfacing application shall be poured from aotoDer.
5.2.3 Polyethylene sheet shall be laid in position wherever shown indrawings or specified herein. Where joint is necessary at the sideor end of the sheet, this shall be a double weld folded joint madeby placing the edges together and folding over twice continuouslytaking the top edge prior to the application of mud plaster. TheContractor shall protect the sheets from damages during layingand subsequent operation and shall replace at his own cost alldamaged sheets to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5.2.4 Not Used
5.2.5 PVC Geo-membrane sheet shall be laid in position wherevershown in drawings. Where joint is necessary at the side or end ofthe sheet, this shall be in strict compliance to recommendationsfurnished by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall protect thesheets from damages during laying and subsequent operation andshall replace at his own cost all damaged sheets to thesatisfaction of the Engineer.
5.2.6 The clay containing sand not less than 5% shall be reduced to finepowder and mixed with water in a pit adding fibrous material suchas chopped rice husk/bhusa in the proportion of 60 to 70 lb/ 20Cft. ol clay. The mixture will be allowed to mature for 7 daysduring which period it will be worked up from time to time so as tomake it into a homogeneous mass. It will then be thoroughlymixed to the required consistency of mortar and applied to thereouired slopes.
5.2.7 Brick tile of approved size shall be laid, grouted and pointed flushin cement mortar. The top surface shall be smooth and accuratelyleveled in accordance with the specified slope. No broken orcracked tiles all be used.
O07100-2
a 5.3 WATER PROOFING & BUILT UP ROOFING
5.3.1 Over Roofs.
The water proofing treatment to reinforced cement concrete roofslabs shall be done in the following manner as indicated on thedrawings or as direcied by the Engineer.
a) One layer of torch applied 4mm bituminous waterproofingmembrane thick properly lapped and sealed as per therecommendations of the approved manufacturer over primingcoat.
b) One layer of '1" poly urethane sheet lapped and joints sealed.
c) One layer of Polyethylene sheet
d) 4" thick average (3" thick min) puddle earth (mud plaster) laid inslope.
e) Brick tiles set in 1:3 cement sand mortar and pointed in 1r2cement sand grout.
WATER PROOFING TREATMENT IN FOUNDATION SUB-STRUCTURES, UNDER FLOORS.
a) Bitumen Painting
All concrete surfaces directly in contact with earth shall bebitumen painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of any accretion,dust, dirt etc. by scraping, wire brushing or as directed by theEngineer. The surface shall be primed with a coat or asphalt oilused at the rate of not less than 2 gallon /100 square feet. Twocoats of hot bitumen paint shall be applied at the rate of 20lbs/'100 Sft. each coat. The first coat shall be allowed to dry forabout 6 hours before applying the second coat. During operationof painting great care shall be taken to avoid air bubbles. Themanufacturers shall be taken to avoid air bubbles. Themanufacturer's instructions and Engineer's directions shall befollowed.
b) PVC Geo-membrane (Water Proofing l\4embrane)
PVC Geo'membrane shall be laid in position wherever shown onthe Drawings.
The material shall be lald over the prepared surface at the levelsand position in the areas shown on the Drawings. Where joint isnecessary at the side or end of a sheet, this shall be as per therecommendation of the manufacturer. The Contractor shall protectthe film sheets from damages during laying and subsequentoperation and shall replace at his own cost all damaged filmsheets to the satisfaction of the Enoineer.
5.4
07100-3
thehisa lvlanufacture/s recommendations and instructions along with
sample of material shall be submitted to the Engineer foraoDrovat.
PVC Geo-membrane on vertical surfaces shall be protected by theconstruction of 4rl2 thick masonry wall and on horizontal surfacesit shall be protected/covered by placemenvlaying of 2" thickcement concrete 1:4:8.
5.5 Not Used
5.6 CURING
- Tiles after laying, grouting and flush pointing shall be kept wet throughoutfor at least 7 days.
MEASUREI\4ENT AND PAYI\,,IENT
6.'l General
Except otherwise specified herejn or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will be made ior lhe undermentioned specified works related to the relevant items of the Bills ofQuantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in thequoted unit rate ofthe respective items of the Bills of Quantities.
The rates quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities shall includework to be executed under these specification in any floor and at anyheight except where otherwise specifically stated in the relevant item ofBill of Quantities and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim orclaim arty compensation on this account.
6.'1.1 AII preparatory work, scrapping, scratching, cleaning, cant strips,gEvel strips, etc.
6.1.2 Formwork
6.'1.3 Geo-membrane, mud plaster, eic. in roof treatment.
6.1.4 Coats of biXumen.
6.1.5 Polyethylene sheet including laps/overlaps.
6.'1.6 Class'C' cement concrete cant strip, brick or concrete
tiles. 6.2 Water Proofing & Built-up Roofing
6.2.1 lvleasurement
lvleasurement of acceptably completed works respective type of. water proofing & buiFup roofing over will be made on the basis of
net actual area in square feet provided and installed in position asshown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
6 .
o07100-4
6.2.2 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity oJrespective type of water proofing & built-up roofing on the basls oiunit rate per square feet quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shallconstitute full compensation for all the works related to the item.
Bitumen Painting/Coating
6.3.1 l\4easurementMeasurement of acceptably completed works oi bitumenpainting/coating will be made on the basis of net actual area insquare feet provided and applied in position as shown on theDrawings or as directed by the Engineer. Area receivingpainting/coating shall only be measured once, irrespective of thenumber of coats applied.
6.3.2 Payment
Payment tlvill be made for acoeptable measured quantity ofbitumen painting/coating on the basis of unit rate per square feetquoted in the Bills of Quantities. The unit rate shall include all costof surface preparation and shall constitute full compensation for allthe works related to the item
07100-5
a
o sEcTtoN 07r65
VAPOR BARRIER
1 . DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Install vapor barrier under all floor slabslocations shown on the Drawing.
and concrete pads, and at other
c
2. MATERIALS
A. Vapor barrier shall be 6-mil (0.006") polyethylene film or equal as approved bythe Engineer.
3. EXECUTION
3.0.1 JoB coNDtTtoNS .
A. Proceed with vapor barrier work only after substrate construction and penetratrngwork have been completed.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
A. Examine the substrate and the conditions under which vapor barrier work is to beperformed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions havebeen corrected.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Vapor banier shall be applied parallel with direction of concrete pour, lappingadjacent sides and ends 6 inches minimum.
B. Seal alljoints with continuous approved 2 inch wide plastic tape.
a
o07165-1
o sEcTtoN 07920
CAULKING AND SEALANTS
2.2
2.3
a
1 .
2.
2 .1
4.
6.
SCOPE
Provide sealants and caulking as required, in the locations indicated on the Drawingsand as specified herein.
DEFINITIONS
Sealanl A weatherproof elastomer used in fi l l ing and sealing joints, havingproperties of adhesion, cohesion, extensibility under tension, compressibilityand recovery, designed to make joints air and, watertight, designed generallyfor application to joints at exterior of structures and to other joints subject tomovement.
Caulking Compound: A material used in fi l l ing joints and seams, havingproperties of adhesion and cohesion, not required to have extensibil i ty andrecovery properties, and usually applied at joints at interior of structures, notsubject to movementor weathering.
C. Compatibility: Before purchase, confirm that the specified sealants
Caulking: The term is used here to denote theregard to type of material.
RELATED WORK
process of jilling the joints, without
Section 07510, Built-Up Roofing System B. Section 07600, Flashing and SheetN4etal
SUBMITTALS
4.1 Submit product data, samples, certifications, manufactureas comprereinstructions for preparing surfaces, mixing, applying and curing the products,etc., in accordanae with Section 01340.
4.2 Submit a two year guarantee on sealant type caulking work against jointfailure, which is defined as leaks of air or water, evidence of loss of adhesionbetween sealant and joint edge, evidence of loss of cohesion, fading of sealantmaterial, or migration of sealant.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Store and handle materials so as to prevent the inclusion of foreign matter ordamage of materials by water or breaking. Store in original containersready for use and remove and discard any materialshowing evidence ofdam
GENERAL
Joint Types: For horizontal joints, use self-leveling compounds and, for alljoints, use non-sag compounds, unless ofierwise indicated or specified.
B. Color: For concealed joints, use sealant with manufacturer's standard colorwhich has the best overall performance qualities for the application indjcated.For exposed joints, use specified sealant with color selected from manufacture/sstandard colors, unless specialorcustom colors are required or specified.
oth
pqqt8/ \-r,,
r\ /*-sx_-/.7
0'7920-l"ra-A\l'At'r )'l\i".''f'
6.2
compatible with the materials of the joint surfaces, .ioint fillers and other materials inthe joint system where they are to be applied.
MATERIALS
Primer: Where primer is required by sealant manufacturer, provide acompound designed to insure the adhesion of sealant, as manufactured by thesealant manufacturer and selected for comoatibilitv with both the sealant andsubstrate.
Exterior Sealants:
l. Vertical or Inclined Joints: One component low modulus. non-sag,polysulfide or polyurethane sealant with Shore A .hardness of 15 to35, minimum elongation of 100%, meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25,
' Grade NS Bostik Chemcalk 100 or equal or OnqPart Joint Sealant Based onMorton Thiokol's LP Liquid Polysulfide Polymer or equal. For extrememovement joints, use sealant with minimum elongation of 1200o/o.
2. Horizontal Joints: One component, self-leveling, polysulfide or polyurethanesealant with Shore A hardness of 15 to,l5, meeting ASTI\4 C920, Type S,Class 25, Grade P, Bostik Chem Calk 950 or equal or One-Part Joint SealantBased On Morton Thiokol's LP Liquid Polysulfide Polymer or equal. Forhorizontal joints exposed to fuel or gas spillage, use one component, coaltar extended, fuel resistant polwrethane sealant with Shore A hardness of15-35, meetlng ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade P/NS, Use T,and equalto Bostic Chem-Calk 950 or equal.
lnterior Sealants and Caulkingl
L General Use: One component, acrylic latex caulking, meeting ASTI\4. C834 with minimum 75% recovery per ASTM C736 Bostik Chem-Calk 600
or equal.
2. Exposed Joints with Litt le Movement: One component. non-sag, mildewresistant, silicone sealant with Shore A hardness of 25 to 30, meetingASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 General Electric Silicone Sanitary1702 Sealant or equal, or Bostik Silicone Rubber Bathroom Caulk orequal, or one component butyl rubber sealant, gum grade, for maximumjoint movement of i5%, meeting Federal Specification fiS-'1657, BostikChem-Caulk 300 or eoual.
3. Non-Exposed Acoustical Joints: Sealant as specified in 2. above or onecomponent acoustical caulking, non-drying, non-hardening, syntheticrubber, normally not paintable.
Sealant Backer Rods: Compressible rod stock of either polyethylene foam,polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam or neoprenefoam as recommended for compatibility with the sealant by the sealantmanufacturer.
Joint Fillers: Either resilient, non-extruding, pre-molded cork units, complyingwith FS HHF-341, Type ll, Class B or exuuded or molded closed-cell neoprenegaskets, complying with ASTM D1056, Class SC.
B.
c.
D.
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
Joints:
1. Thoroughly clean all joints of loose particles by blowing out or vacuuming thejoints, and ensure that the surfaces to be contacted by sealant are dry, fully freeof laitance, loose aggregate, form release agents, curing compounds, waterreoellants and other surface treatments.
2. Install joint packing sized to require 20 to 50 percent compression uponinsertion, and placed so that sealant depth is approximately 1/2 joint.width. In joints not of suficient depth to allow packing, install polyethylenebond breaking tape at back of joint. Lengthwise stretching of packingmaterials shall be avoided.
3. Where required to protect adjacent surfaces, apply masking tape in continuousstrips in alignment with joint edge and immediately remove after joints havebeen sealed and tooled.
4. Where required by sealant manufacturer, prime joints to receive sealant inaccordance with manufactureas instructions. Brush primer uniformly uponall surfaces ofjoint and allow sufficient drying time before caulking.
APPLICATION
Sealantl
1. l\jlix and apply sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
2. Do not use material which has exceeded the manufactureds recommendedpotential open time (POT Life).
3. Apply sealant and caulking material under pressure to fill joints completelywithout air pockets or vojds and tool joints concave with solventrecommended by manufacturer.
Locations:
1. Apply sealant around penetrations of f loor slabs and exterior walls forpiping, conduits, ductwofk and similar items, 6t top of slabs and exteriorface of walls, around exterior perimeter of door frames and windows,louvers and vents, and at other exterior locations shown on the Drawings.
2. Apply caulking compound at interior locations shown on the Drawings.
Thresholdsr Set thresholds in full bed of caulkinq sealant with excess materialremoved.
Protectionl
7 .1
B.
c.
D,
1 . Cure sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to obtainmaximum bond to surfaces, cohesjve strength, and durability at earliestoossible date.
Repair and replace sealants damaged or showing evidencedeterioration before time of final acceptance.a I01920-j
a
E. Cleaning: Clean adjacent surfaces free of sealant and soiling resulting fromthis work as work progresses, using solvent or cleaning agent asrecommended by the manufacturer. Leave all finished work in a neat and cleancondition.
0'7920-4
1.0
sEcTloN _ 08520
ALUMINUM DOOR. WINDOWS AND MISC. WORKS
SCOPE
The work covered under this section comprises of the following:
1. Fixing in position aluminum doors, windows, screen, partition walls andcurtain walls etc. complete with handles, locks, nylon wheels,vinyl weather strips etc. as shown on the drawings and specifiednereun0er.
2. Fixing glass of specifjed quality and thickness to windows and doorin accordance with section 0gg0q
GENERAL COMPLIANCE
Windows shall conform to the requirements of the Uniform BuildingCode for wind pressure and infiltration.
Des ign Requ i rements : A l l doors , w indows, ra i l ings , Handra i l s ,e tc . to comply w i th BS 4873 "A lumin ium a l loy w indows" o requ iva len t in respec t o f mater ia ls , work s izes and manufac ture .All seclional dimensions shown on drawings are only indicative. Thecontractor, shall be responsible to determine the adequacy ofthese with respect to actual structural and performancerequirements. All extrusions shall be of adequate strength, not onlyto meet the structural performance, but also to minimize the risk ofdistortion in the finished surfaces.
Work Sizes
"All dimensions given on drawings are between structuralopenings and/or between finished surface and allowances shallbe made for variation due to constructional tolerances. Theco$tractor, shall be responsible to measure actual f inal dimensiongfrom the Site before fabrication of doors, windows and otherassemblies/units.
Weather Tightness: Weather tightness and operations shall suitthe weather conditions prevail ing in the area of installation. All doorsand windows wil l be fabricated as completely air and water t ightunits including gaskets for glazing, weather stripping, latches, locks,bolts for fixing etc.
Air Tightness: The fixed glazed windows shall be as far as possible'100o/o air t ight under all weather conditions.
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6 Acoustic Performance:
Windows when installed shall28 dB over a frequency range
3.0 I\,'IATERIALREQUIREMENTS
Aluminum Sections
Al l a luminum sec t ions sha l l beconforrning to lnternational
08520-1
provide an average sound reduction ofof 100-3150 Hz.
extruded AlumiStandard for alloy quality
extrusion, Temper T-5. Samefollows:
Aluminium
l \4agnes ium
Silicon
lrgn
Ultimate Tensile Strength
Yield Tensile Strength
Hardness , Br ine l l
Elongation(ln 5cm sample 1 .6mr-rithick)Fatigue Strength(500 mill ion cycles)
Electrical Resistivity at 68 'F
of the properties of this alloy are as
97.50/o
0.4 5-0 .9o lo
0.2-0.9%
max.0.357o
27,000 psi(186 MPa)
21,000 psi (145 MPa)
60 (500k9 load , l0mm ba l l )
120/D
'10,000 psi (68.9 [/]Pa)
3.16x10-6 Ohm-cm
Wall thickness of frames shall be minimum 2.5 mm for curtain wall and1.6mm for Doors & Windows, unless shown otherwise in drawings or calledfor in BOO.
Provide Aluminum systems capable of withstanding loads and thermaland structural movement requirements indicated without failure, basedon testing manufacturer's standard units. Failure includes the following:
a) Air infiltratjon and water penetration exceeding specified limits.b) Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused
by thermal and structural movement to glazing units.
A luminum sec t ions o f THER|EC, LUCKY, CHAWLA, o r PAKISTAN CABLESapproved equivalent shall be used.
E9l1g-!!!-N-qtlshall conform to BS 4190 "Black hexagon bolts, screws. andnuts . Spec i f i ca t ions" . Bo l ts sha l l be o i l p ro tec ted on the th readed par ts .
Washers shall conform to B5 4320 "Specification for metal washers forgenera l eng ineer ing purposes" .
G lass o f requ i red th ickness sha l l con form to BS 952-1 "G lass fo rglazing. Classification" and shall perfectly f lat or parallel surfaces, free fromdistortion specks bubbles and flaws of every kind. Glass shall be o{ Safetyclass (SG) quality.
Clear glass shall also be free from tints and shah transmit 85% of the diffusedlight fall ing on it.
Tinted and lvlercury glass shall be of approved colour and shade.
The qua l i t y , k ind , th ickness and s ize o f the g lass sha l l be as shown on thedrawings or called for in the Bil l of Quantit jes or as approved by the Engineer.
clazing shall conform to specification Section 08800.
Wi re oauze sha l l be 24 AWG, 12x12panels of doors and windows.
meshes per square inch , fo r open ab le
08520-2
Hardware lron-monoerv and Fixtures lron mongery, f itt ings, handles andlocks sha l l be o f b ronze, s ta in less s tee l and a luminum as shown on thedrawings or as s ta ted in the B i l l o f Quant i t ies . Where spec i f i c makes ortype are no l g iven , these shot : be o f bes t qua l i t y ava i lab le in the marke tand as approved by the Engineer.
S t ruc tura l S i l i con-Sea lan t Jo in ts : Prov ide sys tems w i th s t ruc tu ra l s i l i con-sea lan t jo in ts comply ing w i th ASTI \ .4 C1 '18 ' l "S tandard Spec i f i ca t ionfor S t ruc tura l S i l i con Sea lan ts" and the fo l low ing requ i rements .
a ) S t ruc tura l sea lan t w i ths tands tens i le & shear s t resses imposedby the sys tem wi thout fa i l ing adhes ive ly o r cohes ive ly . When tes tedfor adhes ive compat ib i l i t y w i th each subs t ra te and cond i t ionrequ i red , p rov ide sea lan t tha t _ fa i l s cohes ive ly be fore i t fa i l sadhesively. Adhesive and cohesive failure are defined as follows:
i. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pull i-J away from asubs t ra te c lean ly , leav ing no sea lan t mater ia l beh ind .
i i. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within a joint butdoes not seDarate form each substrate because sealant to substrate bondstrength exceeds sealanfs internal strength.
b) colour: As selected by the Engineer form the full range of colours.
c) Provide sealant with modules of elasticity that will not allow movement of morethan 25 percent of joint width, lass movement is required by structural-sealant glazed system design.
Weather Strippino:
All opening section must be weather stripped with Neoprene glazing gaskets orsimilar apprqved and polypropylene pile weather stripping around door6 to ensureadequate weatherproofing. Aluminium glazing beads are to snap on type withoutvisible fixing and must be adjustable to allow for varying thickness of glass. No PVCweather stripping is acceptable.
Thermallv Broken Construction: Provide systems that isolate l\4etal exposed toexterior from Metal exposed to interior with a materjal of low thermal conduction.
Wind Loads: Prov ide sys tems inc lud ing anchorage, capab le o f w i ths tand ingwind load design pressure calculated according to requirements of authorit ieshaving jurisdiction or the "American Society of Civil Engineers" ASCE 7. MinimumDesign Loads for Buildings and other Structures, whichever are more stringentbut not less than 110 km/hr.
a) Deflection of framing members in direction normalto wall plane is l imited to 1/175of clean sDan or 3/4 inch, whichever is smaller unless otherwise indicated.
b) Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide system that does not evidencematerial failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to functionnormally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2percent of "ear span.when tested according to ASTM E330 "Standard TestMethod for Structural Pedormance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights andCurtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference".
j) Test pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind load design pressure.
jj) Duration: As required by dejgn wind load velocity,exposure category.
08520-3
o
Hurricane Resisiance Test Performance: Provide systems that pass largeqnd small missile-impact tests, as required by .systems locqtion abovegrade, and cyclic pressure Tests according to following testing requirements:
ASTM E1233 Test l\4ethod for Structural Performance of ExteriorWindows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Air Pressure Differential.
ASTI\4 E1386 Test Method for Performance of Exterior WindowsCurtain Walls, Doors, and Storm Shutters lmpacted by Missile(s) andExposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials
ASTIV E1 996 Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows,Curtain Walls, Doors, and Storm Shutters lmpacted by windborne Debrisin Hurricanes
Seismic Loads: Provide systems, including anchorage capable ofwithstanding the effects of earthquake motions calculated according torequirements or ASCE 7 "lvl in Design Loads for .Buildings and OtherStructures".
Dead Loads: Provide system members that do not deflect an amountwh ich w i l l reduce g laz ing l ine be low 75 percent o f des ign d imens ionswhen carrying fulldead load.
a) Provide a min 1 18 inch clearance between members below and topof glazing or other fixed part immediately_
b) Provide a min 1/16 inch clearance between members and open ablewindows and doors.
Live Loads: Provide systems including anchorage, that accommodate thesupporting structure's deflection from uniformly distributed and concentratedlive loads indicated, withoutfailure of material or permanent deformation.
Aj-t_]lfiltqtiqLProvide system with permanent resistant to air leakagethrough fixed -glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 Cfmisft(1.09 rn'il1 m') of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E283"Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage ThroughExterior- Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified PressureDifferences Across the Specimen" at a static air pressure difference of1.57 psf (75 Pa).
Water Penetration: Provide system that do not evidence water leakagethrough fixed glazing and frame areas when tested accorcling to ASTM E331"Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air PressureDifference" at min differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-actingdesign pressure as determined by ASCE 7, Minimum Design loads forBuildings and other structures", but not less than Water leakage is deflned asfollows:
Uncontrolled water infiltrating systems or appearing in systems normallyexposed, and inlerior surfaces, from sources other than condensation.Water controlled by flashings and gutters that are drained back to the'exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not waler
ide system that accommodates structuments including, but not limited to sway and deflections.o
08520-4
Condensat ion Res is tance: . Prov ide sys tems w i th condensat ionresistanc€ factor (CRE) of not less than 45 when tested according toAAMA 1503.1.
Averaqe Thermal Conductance: Prov ide sys tem wi th average U-values of not more than 0.63 Btu/sq.ft x h x degree F when testedaccording to Ml\4A 1503.1.
Field Measurements: Verify dimension by field measurements beforefabrication. Co-ordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress toavoid delaying the works.
Glazino Gasketsl. Manufacturer's standard press-glazing system oiblack, resil ient glazing gaskets, setting to block and shims or spacersfrom an elastfometer of type and in hardness recommended by systernand gasket manufac turer to comply w i th sys tem psr fo rmancerequirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corner sealed withsealani recommended by the gasket manufaoturer.
Spacers . Set t ino b looks . Gaskets . and Bond Breakers :Manufacturing standard permanent, non-migrating types in hardnessrecommended by manufacturer, compatible with sealantS and suitable forsystem performance requirement.
Secondarv Seam:For use as weather sea l , compat ib le w i thstructural sil icone sealant and other system components with which itcomes in contact, and that accommodates a 50 percent increase ordecrease in joint width at the tine of application, when measuredaccording to ASTM C719 "Standard Test Method for Adhesion andCohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cvclic lvlovement(Hockman cycle)". .Miscellaneous ltemsFraming system gaskets, sealants, and joint f i l lers as recommended bymanufacturer for joint type.
PVC weather strip shall be used to render joints between the wall and outerframe, and between the moving panel frame and the feceiving l lmbof thefixed frame etc.
Frame sections shall be joined by appropriate manufacturers stagrdetails.Special nylon rollers for friction free operation of sliding windows shabe provided.
Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed towi ths tand normal thermal movement , w ind load ing and impact load(where app l icab le ) , w i thout fa i lu re inc lud ing loss or g lass breakageattributed to the following:
Manulaclurer, fabrication and installation, failure of sealants orgaskets to remain water t igh t & a i r t igh t ; de ter io ra t ion o f g laz ingmaterials; & other defects in construction.
Door lea f sha l l be removab le f rom the inner s jde o f the f rame fo rease o f ma in tenance and c lean ing .
A luminum Louvers sha l ldrawings but anodic fi lm
conform to the construction details shownshall conform to that for aluminum windows.
tn
08520-5
4. SUBMITTALS
4.1 The Contractor shall submit, for approval, samples of each type ofdoor and w indow showing the qua l i t y o f mater ia ls , workmansh ipand f in ish . The samples o f i ron mongery , f i t t ings and f i x tu resshall also be got approved before purchases are made by theContractor.
4 .2 The samples o f g lass fo r each type o f g laz ing a longwi thspecifications of the manufacturer of special quality shall besubmitted for approval before firm orders are placed for supplies.
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
FABRICATION
The aluminum doors and windows shall be manufactured by an approvedmanufac turer in th is t rade. They sha l l be fabr ica ted as comple te un i t ,fu l l y a i r t igh t and water t igh t inc lud ing rubber gasket fo r g laz ing andnecessary holes forfixing.
l f requ i red , the Cont rac to r sha l l p rov ide shop d raw ings based onArchitectural drawings for the approval before orders are placed with themanufacturers.
The manufac turer sha l l use the la tes t and approved method o fjointing employed in the manufacture of high class work viz. mechanicaljointing, reinforced with concealed welding thall be used in themanufacture of doors and windows.
PREPARATION
Coordination and Measurements: Measurements shall be taken at the buildingto assure proper erection of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking inthe field all dimensions, whether or not shown on the Drawings, upon Mrich the accuratefitting together and build-in of this work may depend, or which would affect theproper installation of the work.
INSTALLATION
Windo\ /s shall be securely anchored into place in properly prepared openings. Theopenings must be square, plumb and level to prevent distortion of windows. The windowframes shall not be distorted by erection screws or fiftings and shall not interferewith the operating mechanism.
The fixlng of doors and windows to concrete openings shall be carried outin an approved method as indicated in the drawings or as directed.Provision of necessary groove or rebate and holdfasts in the concrete shall bemade in the formwork and no holing or dri l l ing shall he allowed in theexposed concrete finishes. These shall be erected in position after thebuilding structure is completed and by using proper holdfasts as showndrawings or counter sunk bolts and screws as directed in accordancesite 'reouirements.
B. Caulking shall be as specified in Section 07920 Caulking and Sealants.
08800 Glass and Glazi
t
5.1
5.2
t . 5
C. Windows shall be suitable for feld glazing as specified in Sectionwith snap-in rolled aluminum glazing beads fumished byaluminum windows. Installation of bead in field shall bemanufacturer's instructions.
the manufacturer of the
O08520-6
in accordance with t
5.4 HANDLING
Care sha l l betransportationinstalled onlyproperly braced
CLEANING
taken in hand l ing , a luminum, doors , w indows, e tc . , dur ingand site. These shall be stored under cover and shall beby sk i l led mechan ics , se t p lumb, leve l , in a l ignment andto prevent distortion.
and door f rames and the bu i ld ing shou ld bemastic for total weatherproofing.
A. Metal surfaces of windows shall be cleaned on both the inside and outside of allmortar, plaster, paint and other foreign matter to present a neat appearance andprevent fouling of wealhering surfaees or weatherstripping. ln addition, windowsshall be washed off with a stiff fiber brush, soap and water, and thoroughly rjnsed withclearwater. Where aluminum windows have become stained, or discolored, they shall becleaned or ha\e finish restored in accordance with recommendations of theArchitectural Aluminum Manufactureas Association. Stained, discolored orabraded windows that cannot be satisfactorily repaired shall be replaced with newwindows at no additional cost to the Owner.
5 .6 Pro tec t ion :
a) The jo in t be tween w indowcaulked with approved building
b) After installation, doors, and windows shall be protected fromconstruction hazards that wil l interfere with their operation or damagetheir appearance or f inish. They shall be cleaned on inside and outsidegf all mortar, plaster, paint of other foreign matter to present a neatappearance. Hardware and moving parts shall be lubricated.
6. GLAZING
The work of f ixing glazing to doors, windows shall be carried out with thetype and qua l i t y o f g lass spec i f ied fo r each door and w indow and asindicated in the drawings or as directed in accordance with section 08800.
The glazing of glass should be in accordance with the recommendations ofOS 6262 "Code of practice for glazing for buildings."
The sizes of glass indicated on the drawings are approximate only, and theac tua l s izes requ i red sha l l be de termined by measur ing the f rames toreceive the glass. All glass shall be factory labeled on each pane and thelabel shall not he removed unti l f inally approved. Glass wil l be fixed withbest quality mastic compound of approved make suitable for the type ofg lass or w i th spec ia l bead or mou ld ing as shown on the drawing or asdirected. Special rubber l ining and weather proof brush joints for slidingsurfaces shall be Drovided where indicated.
Glass shall be fixed using flexible compounds, sealents, preformed stripor gaskets as per recommendation of the door/wlndow manufacturer. Thedesign shall allow for an edge clearance of at least 3mm (1/8") all aroundunless any-dimension exceeds 1500rnm (60") when the clearance shall beatleast 5mm (3/16') edge cover shall be adequate to retain the glass in positionunder the design wind loading. The rebate depth edge clearance plus edgecover shall not be less then 1'lmm (7116") fot 6mn glass. The width of therebate platform must accommodate the glass, the front and bacompound, a r id .g laz ing bead. The bead depth shou ld no t be less th€ i
08520-7
a the rebate depth. Setting blocks, distance pieces, and location blocks shallbe used as appropriate. Glass shall be protected against damage. Afterinspection, any labels, and paint spots shall be removed and glass shall bewashed clean. Damages or broken glass shall be removed and replacedbefore acceptance at no extra expense. After the installation of glass it shallbe cleaned using a soft cloth with water and mild soap or l iquid detergent,followed by rinsing with clean water and drying.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
All aluminum windows as shown on the drawings shall be fabricated withheavy duty high strength aluminum extruded sections of aluminum alloy 6063-T5 conforming to BS EN 573 "Aluminum and aluminum alloys, Chemicalcomposition and form of wrought productsi ' or ASTM '13-221 "StaidardSpecification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,Profi les, and Tubes". Aluminum extrusions shall be hard colour anodized indark bronze with an average anodic fi lm thickness of 15 microns_ Theanodic treatment should conform to B.S. 3987 "Specification for anodicoxidation coatings on wrought aluminum for external architecturalapplications".
ALUMINUM DOORS
Aluminium doors shall be open able Luster Gold / Brown / Silver or any otherapproved shade anodized/powder quoted, of heavy duty deluxe size section of100 x 40 x 1.6mm wall thickness extruded by 6063-T-5 Alloy, having 15micron anodic fi lm thickness manufactured by the approved manufacturerglazed with 5 mm thick distortion free imported glass of best approvedquality complete using all required approved accessories viz door locks, doorhandles, f loor hinges for doors, gasket for glass fixing, sealant, syntheticrubber for doors, screws and rowel plugs for f ixing etc. of the bestapproved quality complete in all respects as shown in drawings andspecifications and approval, of the Engineer. (Shop drawing to be gotapproved by the Engineer before starting fabrication work). Door comersshall be able to withstand a minimum of 14 MPa (2000 psi) tension wilhoutnoticeable deformation. Welded corners without structural assemblv shall not bepermitted.
ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Aluminium Curtain Wall shall be of Luster gold I brown I silver or any otherapproved shade anodized/powder quoted (as approved by the Engineer)Heavy Duty Deluxe Size Section of '120 mm x 64 inm x 2.5 mm (WallThickness), extruded by 6063-T-5-Alloy having 25 micron anodic fi lmthickness manufactured by the approved manufacturer, glazed with 12 mmthick distortion free tempered plain imported glass of best approved quality tobe installed / f ixed with Galvanized Steel Brackets, steel clamps, steelheadings (as per approved shop drawings requirement) of at least 6 mmthickness fixed at slab, sill, and head to tie up Curtain Wall Section' wjthspecialized Hilty bolts of 50 mm length 12 mm dia. (or as specified by thmanufacturer) with galvanized steel washers of 5 mm thickness completewith all required accessories viz. Gasket for Glass fixing,
I8.
Sealant for covering gaps and for rain protection and screws etc. completein all respects as shown in the approved shop drawings and specifications.(Shop. drawings and calculations catering for dead load, live load, hurricane-resistance performanoe, seismic load, air infiltration, water penetration,
o08520-8
10.
movements and structural support movements etc. to be submitted forapproval of the Engineer before start of the fabrlcation work).
MEASUREMENT
The. measurement for doors, windows, ventilators and curtain walls shall bemade in Sq. Ft / M. from sil l to bottom of l intel after plastering and Jam toJam
I1. RATE AND PAYMENT
Rates for all the items under this Section shall cover the cost offurnishing all the materials labour, scaffoldings arid appliances at Siteand per fo rming w i th the i r ins ta l la t ion in accordance w i th ins t ruo t ions .I t i s par t i cu la r ly ment ioned tha t the ra tes Cur f i x ing doors and w indowsetc . sha l l inc lude f i x lng o f a l l f in ished hardware i ron monger / f i t t ingssuch as locks , peg s tays , hand les , push p la tes , k ick ing p la tes , doorc losers , P ivo t Mach ine , g laz ing , f lex ib le compounds, rubber l in ing andappliances at site and performing all operations in accordance with thedrawings and BOQ.
I
o08520-9
2.
1.
sEcTtoN - 08800GLAZING
SCOPE
The work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labour,equipment, tools, appliances, scaffolding and providing in any floor and at anyheight glass, gaskets, sealants, compound and other materials required forperforming all operations in connection with the installation and setting of all typesof glass and glazing complete in every respect in accordance with the Drawingsor as directed by the Engineer. The scope of this section of Specifications iscovered with detailed Specitications as laid down herein.
GENERAL
2.1 Each type of glass shall have the manufacturer's label on each pane,. and the labels shall remain on the glass until final cleaning.
2.2 Glazing sealant shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for theparticular application.
2.3 Spacer shims (distance pieces) shall be plasticised polyvinyl chloride(PVC). Thickness shall be equalto space shown on drawings betweenglass and rebates bead or cleat. Depth shall give not less than 1/4"cover of glazing sealant.
2.4 Contractor shall submit samples for each type of glass, minimum 4'x4' in size with protective edges. Samples of glazing sealant minimum0.1 liter of specified types shall be submitted.
2.5 Contractor shall submit 1 feet long sample of each type of glazinggasket.
2.6 Contractor shall also submit orinted materials manufacturedsinstallation instructions for specified ghang gaskets, compoundssealants and accessories including description of required equipmentand procedures and precautions to be observed.
DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
Contractor shall deliver materials in manufacture/s original,unopened containers clearly labeled with manufacture/s name andaddress, material, brand, type, class and rating as applicable.
Contractor $hall store the materials in odginal unopened containerswith labels intacvprotected from ground contact and from elementswhich may damage glass.
Contractor shall handle the materials in abreakage ofglass and damage to surfaces.
IO prevent
MATERIALS
4.1 General
:Glass shall be free from allflaws of any kind and shall
blemishes, bubbles,be properly cut to fit the
3 .1
o
i t \+
other
4.
08800-l
reDates so
have a uniform clearance of 1/16" round the panesedges of glass and the rebates. All glass shall be bestreputable manufacturer as approved by the Engineer.
Glass
Glass for doors, windows, and ventilators and louvers shall be clearplain or mercury glass smm thick (frosted in toilets ventilators orwhere ever required) of best quality avaibble in the country approvedby the Engineer. This shall comply with BS 952.
4.3 Glazing Sealants and Compounds
Contractor shall provide material coloured to match frame in whichglass is installed. Provide only compounds known to be fullycompatible with surfaces, which they will contact as f6llows.
between thequality from
4.2
4.3 .1
4.3.2
4.3.3
Two component polysulfide glazing sealant.
One component acrylic glazing sealant.
Acrylic-latex glazing sealant consisting of modifiedlatex rubber and acrylic emulsion, non-hardening, non-staining and non-bleeding.
Cleaners, Primers and sealer as recommended by thesealant manufacturer.
discard and replace glass with edge
4.3.4
4.4 Accessories
4.4.1 Glazlng Sealant
It shall be tape or ribbon of polymerized butyl or mixture ofbutyl and polyi-solbutylene compounded with inert lillers andpigments, solvent based 95 percent solids thread or.fabrjcreinforced. paintable. non-staining.
4.4.2 Setting Blocks
It shall be chloroprene (Neoprene.l 70 to 90 urometerhardness, compatible with sealant used, channel shapedand of the necessary height for proper perimeter clearance.
4.4.3 Channels, Gaskets, and spaoer's
It shall be choloroprene (Neoprene), 40 to 50 urometerhardness compaiible with sealant used.
INSTALLATION OF GLAZING
Glazing shall comply with the recommendations contained in the"MANUAL of GLAZING' of the Glass lvlarketing Association or asspecifically recommended otheMise by the glass and glazing materialsmanufacturers.
Examine each piece of glass anddamage or face imperfection. Allwater tight on completion.
5 .1
5.2
a08800-2
glazing shall be wjnd tight and fully
c . 5
5.4
5.5
Clean glazing channels and other framing members indicated toreceive glass. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to thesubstrate, Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever elastomericsealants are to be used. Apply primer and sealer to joint surfaceswherever recommended by the sealant manufacturer and as shown onthe drawings.
Trim and clean excess glazing maierials from surrounding surfacesimmediately after installation and eliminate stains and discolorations.
Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance withmanufactureas instructions to obtain high early bond strength internalcohesive strength and surface durability.
While glazing operation is in progress great care shall be taken toavoid breakage or damage to the glass and adjoining glazing. TheContractor shall make good at this own cost, all glass broken by hisworkmen while cleaning or carrying out other operations. On thecompletion of the glazing work, all glass that has been set by theContractor shall, if it becomes loose, within the maintenance period, berefixed at Contractor's expense.
No glazing shall be considered complete until and unless paint andother stains have been removed from the surface of the glass adchecked by the Engineer for water tightness.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING OF GLAZING
6.'l Remove all smears, labels and excess glazing sealant, leave cleaninside and outside free from scratches. The Contractor shall beresponsible for the protection of installed glass. Before finalacceptance, damaged or broken glass shall be removed and replacedwith new glass at no additional expense to the Employer.
6.2 All glass surfaces shall be washed clean both inside and outside withintwo weeks prior to final acceptance by the Employer.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No measurement and payment will be made for the work involved withinthe scope of this section of soecifications related to the relevant items ofBills of Quantities. The cost, thereof, shall be deemed to have beenincluded in the quoted unit rates of the relative items in the BOQ andthe percentage quoted by the tenderer.
6.
7.
08800-3
sEcTtoN 09200
PLASTER AND STUCCO
I
2.
1.
3.
SCOPEThe work under this section of the Soecifications consists offurnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances, and materialsand in performing all operations in any floor and at any heightconnection with providing and installation of cemenl plaster, andspecified external rendering complete in strict accordance with thissection of the Specifications and the applicable drawings and subjectto the terms and conditions ofthe Contract.
GENERAL
2.1 Except as may be o therw ise shown on sur faces spec i f ied , a l lplaster work, both internal and external shall be ordinaryPortland Cement plaster of the required thickness as shown onthe drawings.
2.2 Plastering shall not commence unti l all electric conduits,drainage and sanitary pipes, inlets to tanks, brackets, clamps,doors and window frames and all sorts of inserts and embeddeditems are fixed in position. lt shall be the responsibil i ty of theContractor to make sure that all such work is carried out by othercontractors before stading of plaster work. Chiseling and repairingof cement plaster shall not be permifted without the approval of theEngineer.
2.3 Sample of materials shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approvalDrior to use in the works.
MATERIAL
3.1 Cement fo r p las te r sha l l be Ord inary Por t land Cement (B .S'12 or P.S 232) or sulphate resjsting cement (B.S 4027 or P.S.612) as specified and shall conform to requirements specified in thesection "Plain and Reinforced Concrete".
3.2 Sand for plaster shall comply with the requirements of BS 1199, BS1200 or the draft Pakistan Standard .Sand for Plaster' as directed brthe Engineer.
3.3 Water for plaster shall conform to requirements specified in the sectionfor "Dlain and reinforced concrete".
3.4 All materials and workmanship for plaster, not explained in theseSpecifications, shall comply with the requirements of relevant BS CP211 and CP 221 as directed by the Engineer.
4. PROPORTIONING AND MIXING
l\,4easurement of materials by volume shall be by containers ofknown capacity to maintain consistent proportions. No lumpy orcaked material shall be used. Mixing equipment boxes and tools
hall be clean. Materials shall be proportioned as specified on thengs, in the Bil l of Quantit ies or as directed by the Engin
4 .1
09200-l
Mixing shall be continuous unti l all ingredients are evenly distributedand thoroughly mixed.
4.2 Only l imited water shall be added for proper workabil ity and suchquantity of mortar shall be prepared which can be consumed inthirty minutes after preparation. Preparation of mortar in bulkquantity for use during the entire day or for any other time more thanthat stipulated above is expressly prohibited. Re-tempering shall notbe permitted and all mortar which has begun to stiffen shall bediscarded.
4.3 Plaster ingredients shall be thoroughly mixed either by hand on aclean cement concrete platform or by a mechanical mixer, as directedby the Engineer.
PREPARATION OF SURFACE TO BE PLASTERED
Concrete surface to be plastered shall be cleaned to remove all grease, fromoil and other surface impurities, which will otherwise adversely affect theadhesion of plaster to the surface concerned. The surface of all-concreteceil ing, beams and columns shall be l ightly hacked by approved means togive the required key for plastering.
All masonry surfaces to be plastered shall be cleaned to remove all matter,which will otherwise adversely affect the adhesion of plaster to the surfaceconcerned. The surface shall be washed with clean water and kept damp for24hours before further treatment. The Surface thus prepared shall be treateduniformly with cement and sand slurry. The slurry to be used shall be one partcement to one part sand by volume with water added to make a stiff creamymix. The slurry shall be applied with a stiff brush on surface, which haspreviously been well wetted. The surface so treated shall be left to cure for 3days.
APPLICATION OF PLASTER
6.1 The plaster of thickness less than the specified thickness shall berejected. lf the plaster is to be more then %" thick, it shall be done in twocoats. The surface of first coat shall be made rough before the secondcoat is apDlied.
The plaster shall not have wavy surface and shall be perfectly in plumbThe edges and corners shall represent a straight l ine. The plaster shabe kept wet continuously for at least ten (10) days. No extra paymentshall be allowed for jambs, junctions, corners, edges, round surfaces orfor more than one layer of plaster required due to any unevenness inthe work done by the Contractor. The plasterwork is to cover aconduits, pipes etc fixed in the walls and ceil ing. Wherever specifiec.metal lath shall be nailed firmly before plastering is commenced. Theplaster surface shall be tested frequently with a 10 feet straight edge andplumb bob.
6.2 Plaster containing cracks, blisters, pits, discoloration or any defectsshall not be acceptable. Any such plaster or loose plaster shall beremoved & replaced with plaster in conformityand as additionally directed by the Engineer.
6.
09200-2
e specifications
',
Contractor shall cut out and patch all defective work at his own cost. Alldamaged plaster shall be patched as directed by the Engineer. Patchingplaster shall match appearance of and shall b€ finished level with adjoiningplaster.
METAL LATH (Wire Mesh)
Metal lathing (metalwire mesh) shall be fabrioated from sheet steel and shall beof uniform quality and free from flaws broken strands, cracks and corrosivepitting, shall be rectangular and true to shape and shall comply with BS-1369.
All lathing shall be galvanized. Where plastering material depends entirely onthe lathing for its key, these shall be not less than two complete meshopenings per 1-1l8"in one direction and the width of the aperture shall not beless than 3/16".Sheets shall not be less than '1.6 kg/sq.m when fabricated, using 0.7mm thick steel sheet. Where used on smooth surfaces lo form a key itshall be not less than 1.2 kg/sq.mm when fabricated, using 0.5 mm thicksteel sheet. Tying wire shall be 1.2 mm diameter galvanized annealed ironwire.
Sheets shall be welded to angle iron frame as shown on drawings.
ANGLE AND BEADS
Angle beads, stop beads, depth gauge beads, edging profiles, plaster dividingprofi les, interior angle profi les, plaster borders and the Iike shall all bemanufactured from sheet steel and galvanized after fabrication, all beads snailbe perforated at edges to ensur€ good adhegion of the plaster work. Thicknessand dimensions shall suit particular locations and plaster thickness.
All angle beads, stop beads, depth gauge beads and the l ike are to be fixed inaccordance with the manufacturer's instruction, at all corners, stops, joints, etc.
8 .
as per directions of Engineer ln-charge.
9, INTERNAUEXTERNALPLASTER
9 .1 Where specified in the Drawings external surface shall have anavetage 112" thick plaster f inish UNO, consisting of a base coat of1:4 cement sand mortar in Grey cement UNO and the tinish coat ofsmooth plaster as shown on the Drawings or called for in BOQ andas directed by the Engineer.
Where specified in the Drawings all internal plaster shall have anavercge 112" thick UNO consisting of base coat of 'l:.3/lA cemenlsand mortar in grey cement UNO and finish coat of smooth piaster asshown on the Drawings or called for in BOQ and as directed by theEngineer.
Stucco Plaster
Wherever specified in the drawings external stucco plaster shallconsist of '1:2, one part white cement & 2 parts approved shade ofmarble chips zero size mixed with approved pigment to achievedesired shade. Wherever shown on drawings, groves shall beprovided with aluminum UN channels. The contractor thall prepare
9.2
9.3
mockup samples of stucco plaster for the approval of Engineer. The ---:
plastei shait be applied witn macninei-" ana irl" it"r .yefl', ^\\oe2oo-3 \1, +q I\ ,
.
' ' - , /
surface/texture/shade shall be as per the approved sample, directionand approval of the Engineer-lncharge.
10 . CLEANING AND PROTECTION
10 .1 Rubbish and debris shall be removed as necessary to make wayfor work of other trades and as directed by the Engineer. As eachroom or space is completed all rubbish, debris, scaffolding and toolsshould be removed to leave the room clean.
Prior to plastering all aluminum windows, finished metals should becovered by sheet of plastic or tarpaulin to protect it from damage.
10.2
10.3 Protect finished plaster from injury bypro tec t wa l ls , f loors and workp las te r mate r ia l s .
any source. contractor shall alsoo f o ther t rades f ro m
1 ' l TOLERANCES
Surfaces of plaster work shall be finished wjth a true plane to correctl ine and level with all angle and corners to a right angle unlessotherwise specified and with walls and reveals plumb and square.
Maximum permitted tolerances shall not exceed 1/8" in 6 feet variationlrom plumb or level in any exposed line or surface and 1/'16" variationbetween planes of abutting edges or ends.
09200-4
sEcTroN 09510
SUSPENDED CEILING
o
PART ,I - GENEML
I.O1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Scope: the work lncluded in this Section consists of furnishing andinstalling acousticaltiles system wherever required indicated on drawingswith the following components and all necessary fasteners andaccessories.
'1. Runner and cross tees. hangers and fastening devices.
2. . Perimeter moldings.
3. Panels.
I.O2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Suspended tile ceiling system shall consist of a 2ft x 2ft flat panel system.
B. The ceiling system shall be ceiting tile suspended by means of a semi-exposed grid.
1.03 ENVIRONMENTALREQUIREMENTS
A. The material shall be installed only in areas free^ of excessive humidity,70o/o rclative humidity 60'F to 85'F (15'C to 29'C), chemical fumes orvibration.
B. The materials should be Dermitted to reach room temperature and hav€stabilized moisture content. They should not, however, be installed inspaces where the temperature of humidity conditions vary greatly fromthe temperatures and conditions that will be normal in the occupiedspace.
C. All plastering concrete or any other wet work should be complete and dry.All windows and doors should be in place. The heating, ventilating,and air-conditioning systems should be installed and operator wherenecessary to maintain proper temperatures before, during, and afterinstallation of suspended ceiling material.
SUBMITTALS
Samples of acoustical material and suspension members andmanufacture's literature for the proposed installation shall be submitted, inaccordance with Section 0'1340, to the Engineer for approval prior tocommencing work.
09510- I
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
PART 3. EXECUTION
3,01 INSTALLATION
E.
Panels shall be patterned Gypsum Board with Aluminum lamination/foilon back or Metal 2'x2', 1/2-inch thick, or as approved by the Engineer,Tees Suspension system shall be G.l Steel minimum '18 Gauge thickfinished with white pqwder coated finish or Aluminum, direct hung toframing, or as approved by Engineer. Framing shall be 'l inch high and %inch wide,Mouldings: Perimeier moulding shall be G.l Steel minimum 18 Guagethick angle moulding and finished in exposed surface with white powercoated or Aluminum as approved by the EngineerColour Finish on grid shall be White or as approved by EngineerWires: Hanger wires shall be No. 8 guage (4 mm), galvanized spaced @18" c/c and at reduced spacing of 12" above the light fixtures.
Tees: Tee grid shall be installed true and level and to the patterns shownon the Drawings. Grid shall be tied to the required plane and to atolerance of 1/8" in 12 ft. Runner tees to be spaced not over 4 ft withcross t€es not over 2 ft o.c.
Hangers and lvlouldings: Hangers shall be 4 ft o.c maximum along themain runners with hangers set at each corner of all panels containing lightfixtures, Perimetei mouldings shall be installed at all locations whereacoustical ceilings are interrupted or about vertical surfaces.
PART 4 . METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A Measurementsr
All work shall be measured net as fixed with no allowance for cutting and waste,laps, seams, turning etc.
B. CLARIFICATION OF RATES
The Rates, Inter-alia, include particularly:
a. Fixing complete as specified in any position.b. All cutting and waste.c. Cutting holes for pipes. etc.d. Wooden frames, where provided shall be paid separately.
o
11a-*q
09510-2
L
sEcTtoN - 09700
FLOOR AND WALL FINISHES
SCOPE
The work under this section of the Specification consists of furnishing all plant,labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in anyfloor and at any height in connection with the installation of cement concreteflools and tloorlinishes including bases, skirting and external surlace treatments,complete in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and theapplicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.
SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall submit at least 3 range samples of all the items/each type ofstone/tile to be provided under this section showing colour, grade, finishing andtexture to the Engineerfor approval. Conhactor shall provide samples from eachspecified manufacturer and in sufficient variation for each type of item. TheEngineer shall make his selection only when all related samples have beensubmitted and he is satisfied that the samples submitted are the maximumrange available against any item. All submiftals shall be made as per therequirements of section 01340.
MATERIAL
3.1 CEI\4ENT
Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement conforming to B.S. 12 or PS232 as specified in Section 03300.
3.2 SANDAll fine sand shall be obtajned from sources approved by the Engineer.The grading shall conform to B.S 882 Grading Zone I and 2 oJ which thegradation limits are as follows:Percentage (by weight) passing Grading Zone I
B.S. Sieve3/8" (9.53 mm)
3/16" (4.765 mm)No. 7No. 14No.25No.52No. '100
Coarse aggtegate shall be crushed or uncrushed grav€l or crushedstone, angular or rounded in shape and shall have granular, crystallineor smooth surfaoe free from friable, flaky and lamjnated pieces, micaand shale. lt shall not_contain matters injurious to concrete. All coarseaggregate shall conform to BOSS NO.882 an graded follows:
100
90-10060-9530-7015-U5-200-10
crading Zone 2100
90-10075-10055-9035-598-300-'10
f+l-:- )
a09700-l
t B.s. sieve1" (25.40 mm)3/4" ('19.05 mm)3/8" ( 9.53 mm)3/'16"(4.765 mm)
% Passing by weight
The aggregate shall be stored ondirected by the Engineer.
10090-10020-550-10
properly constructed paving or as
There shall be a physical partition between the stockpiles oI coarse andfine aggregate. lf required aggregates shall, be washed and screened tothe satisfaction of the Engineer. Sieve analysis of all the aggregates to beused in the works shall be carried out as and when required by theEngineer. All aggregate shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Any aggregates not found to be of the specified/approved standard shallbe rejected by the Engineer and all such rejected material shall beremoved from site without delay.
Floors, sub-base or base constructed with rejected aggregates shalldismantled and rebuilt at the expense of the Contractor.
BRICK BALLAST
Brick ballast to be used as soling shall conform to specifications of "StoneSoling".
WATER
Water used for mixing concrete, curing or any other operation of theworks specified herein shall be fresh, clean and free from organic orinorganic mafters in solutions or in suspension. Only water of theapproved quality shall be used for all constructional purposes:
CLEANING COMPOUND
The compound used for all cleaning of terrazzo shall be an approvedneutral chemical cleaner free from acid and alkali or any other materialthat will affect the colour or otherwise damaoe the terrazzo and shall notaffect the conductivity of terrazzo floors.
DIVISION STRIPS
Division strips shall be of marble or plate glass as approved by theEngineer. Standard division strips for floor finishes shall be not less thansmm (3/'16") in thickness and shall not be less than 1-3l4" in depth.
MARBLE CHIPS
Marble chips shall have an abrasive hardness of not less than '16,
determined by the test of wear resistance in National BureauSlandards Reports l\,4BS 98. Size shall vary from No. 0 to 8.
DE
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3 .8
asof
o09'700-2
€-001.60
-:suo4ecutceds 6ulAr\ollol olu.rJo]uoc Jjeqs pue s6ur/{\eJp uo perjpods se ezls Jo eq lleqssel[ urelacrod saln]ceJnueut pe^o.ldde oql uloll pezel6unpue paurunloc ̂uuBnb urnruJoJd oq lleqs sglrl utelectod
'setdutBsred se ,BZL Sg ol LrrJojuoc lleqs pue s6u|/viptp ol.lluo polJpeds se sozrs Jo aq lleqs sol[ eL]I ]e.lnlcejnueutpe^oJdde oql Jo euo utotJ polulJd Jo peinoloc/ ellLl,^ uleld 'Illenb urnrurord 'lecol 9q lleqs selB clule.lec
a
z e|t
I et €
s='It Ntv-tfcrod / s3ltl. ctt{vrlc 9t e'Jeoul6u3 aql iq polcoltp se Jo s6ut/l^eJp uo
u,roqs se sezs pe[ceds Jo euols epr^oJd lleqs ]olce./poc aql .ssoul3 .{lnroJun ,o eq lleqs secord lv IJo^\ srll roqonoJqt oJn[el pue e6uBJJnoloc luelsrsuoc sJnsuo pue Lrienb el6urs e uroJl gd^l euols qgee utelqo
'popeler eq lleqs suols poJeqleo l llv socej.tnsraqlee/v\ ro u.ro/r^ pepunor u.to4 oeJl oq lleqs ll JQqles 4 eLl] ol ocuelstsalqr ̂o.rlsep ol ourpuel suollgolodujr ro spalep le.tnlcn4s Joqlo pue qgeJc'suees 'uorle6er6es 's ̂e[ 'suls ulo4 eoJJ pue 'alqeJnp pue punos'preq 'pulsro lelv\)eqc punoJe pue ur sauenb uJoq qqelle^e ̂llegol'iqllenb pe^oJdde lseq oql lo oq lleqs ourppelcDfo/v\ buteEl roj euols
eNtocvtc/)|uoM 9Ntcvl lol lNols zte.ololcuoc
lusursc t:z:, ur eq lleqs oll ?ql ]o gseq aLlI Jnoloc pue ezts p9 o.tddeJo sdrqc alq.relu luourec Z:, lo pasoduoc ssaulcltll ,,2/L lo ourddolozzerJel lunululu.] e q]r/r^ (uJnururu,r) sseu)clq] u! ,,tig eq lleqs puE,,zlx,,zL eq lleqs s"[I L€g-sd o] oulu/Joluoc ad,{l posseJduoc ^llectueqeoul'epeJ6 lsJlJ oq lleqs selll ozzexol areq^ eslo eslMleqlo pelou ssolun
sf'll.L ozzvuull. t. t e
reoutbuf eql Iq po^o]ddB pue tolcaluoC eql Iqpe urqns eq ol oldures Jod sB aq llEqs opeqs pus lnoloc 'ozts i]lunoCaql ur alqelrp^e ,{yrenb lseq peuodur oq llells }eeqs/ssl[ uh Cnd
sf-ltl. 'l,\Nn c^d 0t e
'6uUJnqlaue gcelns aq] uo rull] peqsruu ̂)pqs Jo ̂Icel e s eol .lou ozzeJJeloql Jnolocsrp lou lleqs leualeuJ e llEruesotd eql poulceds sE '6uUjnq IqpoqsrurJ sr]oou al.|l JaUe sJnoq gl ^lsleulxoldde 's]noq Z/L-Z lo poued e]ol eJnle.rodurol uJooJ le Jele^'\ ut uolsJeu.rull Iq paJtedult aq lou llt/tr\ rlc!rl/,i\qslulJ JooJd-Jele/v\ e ocnpoJd lleqs Jooll ozzeJJa] Jo,lugutlesl o^lleNasald
lVlU lvl,\ f^ltv^ufsfud60
O
o
t
'13.2.1 Ceramic / Glazed tiles shall be of prime quality and may beof glazed, glossy or mat finish of color, size and pattern asspecified and approved by the Engineer.
Acid Resistant Porcelain Lining Bricks shall be of prime --".--.qualjty and make as approved by the Engineer and of anyr.; r-\:-\
a
Test DescriDtion Standard Test Method lnternational StandardISO 13006:1998 (E)
Length & Width BS EN tSO 10545-2 +l- 0.60k
Thickness BS EN tSO 10545-2 +l- 5.0o/o
Rectangular Squareness BS EN tSO 10545-2 +t- 0.6%
Straightness of Sides BS EN tSO't0545-2 +l- 0.5o/o
Surface Flatness BS EN ISO 10545-2 +/- 0.5%
Water Absorbtion BS EN tSO't0545-3 <=0.5olo
L4odulus of Rupture: N/mm2 BS EN tSO 't0545-4 >=35
Breaking Strenght BS EN tSO 10545-4 >= 1300 N
Resistance to deep Abrasion BS EN tSO 10545-6 <= 1 75lM l\,13
Linear Thermal Expansion BS EN tSO 10545-8 <=9 X 10 '6 0 k-1
Thermal Shock Resistance BS EN ISO 10545-3 No visible de{eot
Frost Resistance BS EN tSO 10545-12 No visible damage
Resistance to Chemicals BS EN ISO 10545-13 No visible etfect
Resistance to Stains BS EN tSO '10545-14 Manufacturer to State class
Color Resistance to UV light DIN 51094 No change in color
:-,t'
' 3 .13 .4
oeToo-4 A{. ) )
3.13 .5
3 .1 3 .6
3.13.7
3 .13 .8
3 .13 .9
3 .13 .10
of the following sizes and types as may be indicated in thedrawings/Bill of Quantities:
For flooring: 8' x 4" x 3/4" or 1/2" thick, glozed or non-skid(Mat Finish).
For cove moulding: 3" wide x 4" long x 6' high, 112" or 314"thick plain or glazed.For dado: 6" x 4" x 112" thick, plain or glazed IndustrialTiles
High Quality, vitrified tiles ( 15 or 20 mm thick) having highload bearing capacity, as manufactured by National TilesCeramics Limited or apprgved equivalent.
Joint Fil l ing
Joint Filler shall be while Fondant) Cement grout, whichshall bond to dry tile, shall be non-shrinking, stain resistant,permanent in colour, and shall not inhabit fungus andbacterial groMh. lt shall be odourless and nontoxic, ofsmooth consistency for easy preparation and neat, rapidInstallation, and shall contain non-metallic material. Groutshall be water resistant and shall not wash out underwater.
Epoxy Adhesives and Joint Sealers
Epoxy Adhesive and Joint Sealers shall be obtained fromSIK JFOSROC or any other approved manufacturer. DryBond from National Tiles 8, Ceramics Limited or approvedequivalent may also be used. The ratio and application ofadhesives and sealers shall be as per the manufacturer'sdirections
Portland Cement
Portland cement shall be that manufactured in Pakistanconforming to the specifications set forth in Section-5.
Aggregate
Coarse & fine aggregate shall conform to the specificationsset forth in Section-s.
Samples and Tests
Samples of all materials consisting of actual tiles showingfull range of colours, texture & patterns available for eachtype & composition of tiles indicated shall be submitted tothe Engineer for approval and materials conforming toapproved samples be used throughout the work.
Rejocted materials shall be removed from the immediately.Tests of materials, if required by the Engineer, shall bedone at the cost of the Contractor.
a09700-5
At least one approved sample each of all the materialsshall be kept at site the offiae Of the Engineer for reference& record.
3.14 CEMENT CONCRETE TILE/PAVERS
Cement Concrete tiles shall be of approved shade, shape and size,checkered, mechanically vibrated and compressed type conforming toPS-531, as shown on the drawings and approved by the Engineer.Manufacturer of concrete tiles and pavers shall be subject to the approvalof the Engineer. Paving stones/ blocks shall be machine casted and shallhave average strength of 7000PSl as per BS 6717 Part 1, 1993. Thetoping shall be rough monolithic made in natural grain texture ofpermanent finish. The product shall be abrasion resistant, anti-skid with
. good inter locking arrangements. The paving stones / blocks and cobbledstones shall be product of reputed manufacturers, i.e. l\4/S Grand Works,1,4/S lzhar Ltd., M/S Tough Tiles or equivalent as approved by theEngineer.
3.15 MARBLE AND GMNITE TILES
3.15.1 l\ilarble shall be compact, dense, metamorphic rock of lime stoneorigin from quarries in Pakistan. lt shall have specific gravity of about2.7 and density of 170 lbs. per Cft. lt must be evenly grained withsugarjar l ike appearance when broken.
Granite shall be of approved quality, colour and grain it may beimported or local as approved by the Engineer.
3 .15 .2 S ize & Th ickness
Generally marble or granite tile shall be of size and thickness asshown in the drawings or BOQ. The type of marble or granite shall beindicated in the drawings or BOQ.
3.15.3 l\.4ortar
The ratio or cement sand mortar far laying and embedding tile workshall be (1:3) and shall be of specified thickness as shown ondrawings or as directed.
Epoxy Adhesive
Epoxy Adhesive shall be obtained from SIKA FOSROC or any otherapproved manufacturer. The ratio and application of dry bond mortarshall be as per the manufacture/s direciions.
Portland Cement
Portland cement shall be that manufactured in Pakistan conforming tothe specifications set forth in Section 03300.
Aggregate:
a)
b )
3.15.4
Course and fine aggregate shall conform to the specifications se forth
o in Section-5.
09'100-6
3.'15.6 Samples and Tests
The Contractor shall produce samples of marble tiles to be used forthis item of work for selection, testing and approval. The samples shallbe in finished sizes and shapes and adequate in number for testing inthe laboratory as and when ordered. The tests for marble shall be asper ASTM Standards for the determination ofl
Weight %age Al portionModulus of RuptureCompressive StrengthResistance to AbrasionFlexural Strength
ASTM C-97-47ASTM C-99ASTM C-'t70ASTM C-241-51ASTM C-880-78
The Contractor may also be required to produce samples of finisheditem of tile work fixed in position before he is allowed to proceed withthe work on a particular item.
3.15.6 Quality of Marble / Granite Work
All Marble / Granite tiles shall be machine cut in oroper dimensionswith following maimum tolerances for minimum size of 'l2"x12" tile.
ThicknesswidthLengthSurface
+2mm+1mm+1mm+1mm
4.
All the four angles of tile shall be exactly right angled (90 Degree) withsurface tolerance as stated above. For a specific area, tiles of similarshade and texture shall be used. All marble tiles shall be chemicallvpolished while Granite shall be factory polished.
3.16 Artificial Stone
Artificial stone shall be of best quality, shade, color and textured size withhoned finish as per drawings and subject to the approval of Engineer.
EXECUTION
4.1 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING
The materials for C.C flooring shall be same as already speciliedclause 3, "Materials".
4.1.1 Composition of Concrete
Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, sand, coarse,aggregate and water, all well mixed and brought to the properconsistency. The Contractor shall, mix the ingredients as indicated
' on the Drawings. The proportions of the various ingredients shallbe determined from time to time during the progress of the workand tests shall be made of samples of the aggregates and theresulting concrete. The mix proportions and appropriate water-cement ratio will be determined on the basis of the production
"f_\.
s\
09700-7
concrete having required workability, density, impermeability,durability and required strength.
4.1.2 Mixing Concrete
The concrete ingredients shall be mixed in a batch mixer for notless than 'l-1l2 minutes after all ingredients, except the full amountoI water, are in the mixer. The Engineer reserves the right toincrease the mixing time when the charging and mixing operationsfail to produce a concrete batch in which the ingredients areuniformly dishibuted and the consistency is not uniform. Theconcrete shall be uniform in composition and consistency frombatch to batch except when changes in composition or
. consistency are required. Water shall be added prior to, duringand following the mixer charge. Excessive over-mixing requiringaddition of water to preserve the required concrete consistencywill not be permitted. The concrete indredients shall be mixed byvolumetric measurement in purpose made boxes approved by theEngineer.
4 .1 .3 Construction
The base course of the floor shall comprise of stone ballast of 2inches (approx: 50 mm) mesh size UNO or as showing ondrawings. The base course shall be thoroughly compacted bysuitable power rammers to the total consolidated thickness asshown on the Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. Theinterstices shall be filled with smaller size stones. The base courseshall be blinded with sand and the whole surface watered. Overthe well-compacted base course, a layer of concrete of therequired grade and thickness shall be laid, in panels of the sizesas indicated on the Drawing and as approved by the Engineer.
After the C.C bed has been cured, as directed by the Engineer, itshall be roughened and well watered before floor finishing is laid.The floor finish shall comprise of cement concrete of requiredgrade and shall be laid in panels to the required thickness asshown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Theconcrete after laying will be thoroughly rammed and mortarworked up to the top and smoothed with a steel trowel. The edgeof each section into which the floor is divided should be defined bywooden screeds of the approved width and of a depth equal to thedepth of the floor concrete.
Freshly placed concrete floor and completed floor portions asfinished shall be protected to prevent loss of water by coveringwith damp hessian, water proof paper, damp sand or otherapproved material, and shall be kept constantly damp for a periodoffour days or longer after concreting as directed by the Engineer.The concrete shall be allowed to dry out slowly over a period ofthree days after wet curing is completed.
The expansion jojnts shall be filled in with hot bitumen, of theapproved grade, as directed by the Engineer,
09700-8
4.2 CEMENT NERU FINISHED FLOORING
The base concrete shall be laid in the manner and thickness given underspecifi cations for Tarries.
The bottom layer shall be brought to a level so that top layer shall have aminimum thickness of 12mm. The bottom layer shall be thoroughlycompacted by tamping but shall not be finished smooth. While the bottomlayer is still plastic, the top layer shall be laid with light tapping for fiveminutes.
After laying the topping the surface shall be covered either with dampHessian cloth or wet soft wood saw dust and every precaution shall betaken to prevent it being subjected to defects of weather for ten to twelvedays.
TERMZZO FLOORING
4.3.1 Mix
The terrazzo mixes shall be composed by weight as follows:
Plain terrazzo for allfloors and bases indicated as terrazzo and nototherwise specified, shall be composed of one part cement, whiteor grey, and 2 parts of marble chips of the sizes and colourshereinafter specified.
4.3.2 Ptepa@lion bt f erazzo
The grade and thickness of concrete as shown on the Drawingsshall be laid as under bed to receive terrazzo. The surface of thebed shall be roughened tor bounding with the terrazzo finish. lf thesurface is too smooth it shall be roughened with a toothed chiseland, prior to laying the terrazzo the bed shall be cleaned of all dirt,oil grease and extra loose material.
4.3.3 Division Strips
ferrazzo lloots and bases shall be divided up by marble strips ofspecified thickness and depth. The division strips between fieldwork and borders shall have exposed tops in full width of the,strips The division strips shall be set immediately after thespreading of the under bed, the strips bejng partially embeddedtherein, securely anchored to the sub-floor and grouted solid.
All division strips shall be set, straight to lines and to the properlevel to ensure that the tops of the strips will show uniformly aftergrinding and smoothening operations are completed and jointsand intersections shall be fitted tight. Strips shall be braced toprevent bulging during the placlng of terrazzo.
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, the divisions in fieldwork of large areas shall not exceed 4 feet x 4 feet and in smallareas shall not exceed 2 feet x 2 feet.
Edging strips shall be placed at doorways between terrazzo andother types of flooring and along the edges of all terrazzo basesborders and adjoining other types of floor flnishes or
4.3
a
09700-9
covering. The edging strips at doorways shall be placed in linewith the step face of doors. All edging strips shall be anchored andgrouted solid in the under bed or to the concrete sub-floor andbraced to prevent bulging as specified for division strip.
4.3.4 Layingfeffazzo
The sub-surface shall be swept clean, thoroughly moistened, butnot saturated, and slushed with a coating of neat cement groutapproximately 1/8" in thickness. The under bed consisting of class'C' cement concrete screed shall be spread and brought to a levelnot less than 3/4" below the finished floor level. The dividing stripsshall be installed in the green under bed. The terrazzo mix shallbe spread, tamped and rolled into a compact mass not less than3/4" thick. After rolling additional aggregate mix shall be sprinkledover the surface to fill up all depressions, to take up excessmoisture and to permit the leyazza lo be trowelled to a level,dense and even surface, slightly above the finish line of floor. Thislevel, shall allow for the surface grinding necessary to expose thespecified area of aggregate, and to produce smooth, level floorsfree of waves and depressions.
4.3.5 Seasoning
The completed terrazzo shall be allowed to season for 6 daysduring which time it shall be kept moist by (1) covering withapproximately 'l" thickness of sand; or (2) covering with buildingpaper or mats; or (3) sprinkling with water at every 10 hourinterval.
4.3.6 Surface
Following the cJring period, the terrazzo shall be machine groundto a true, even surface using a No. 24 grit followed by a No. 80 gritor finer abrasive stone. After the first grinding, the floors shall bethoroughly grouted with the same cement and colour compositionas specified for the matrix of the tefiazzo mix. The grout shall beof the consistency of thick cream, and shall be brushed over thefloor to eliminate all pjts and thoroughly fill the surface for finalgrinding.
4.3.7 Finishing
Not less than 72 hours after application, the grouting coat shall beremoved by grindlng. In the later stages of grinding, the grit stonesor other abrasive used in the grinding machine shall be of a grainor fineness that will give the surface smooth finish. Small areas,inaccessible portions and corners which cannot be reached by thegrinding machine shall be ground and rubbed by hand.
4.3.8 Protection
The walls and all surfaces of the finished work of other trades shallbe properly protected from damage and spoiling during theprocess of grinding and washing of the terrazzo. After the tinishgrinding has been completed and the surface treatment applithe terzzzo work shall be covered and protected with m
--{\
o09700-10
approved by the Engineer until completion of the work of all othertraoes.
4.3.9 Cleaning and Coating
Prior to placing the protective covering, the terrazzo floor shall beapproved by the Engineer. After the work of all other trades hasbeen completed and the protective covering removed, all terazzowork shall be washed with cleaning compound, mixed with warmwater and using a fine abrasive Where necessary to remove anystains or cement smears. The terrazzo shall be allowed to drythoroughly and shall be given a sealing application of preservativematerial. The sealing material shall be applied in accordance withthe manufactureds directions, leaving all leffazzo work.in cleanoondition as approved by the Engineer.
4.3.10 Dado/Skirting
The ingredients of dado/skirting shall be one part of cement andtwo parts of marble chips varying from Nos, zero to 2. Strikingshall be laid over a base of plaster of specilied thickness. Thethickness of dado/skirting layer shall be as specified. The surfaceshall be grinded and polished to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.4 TILE FLOORING
When setting out the tiles, care shall be taken to establish the correctelevation for the floor. A gauge rod shall be used, indicating the overallmeasufement of a given number of tiles with specified joint width toreduce cutting.
After the floor has been machine finished, it should be covered with white,non-staining sand or rags to protect it while other work is being done.After removal, the floor shall be thoroughly scrubbed.
4.4.1 General
The base shall be prepared by laying cement concrete of specifiedgrade and of thickness as shown on the drawings, or specified inthe Bill of Quantities.
The curing period of the setting bed shall be as directed by theEngineer. As large an area of setting bed shall be spread at onetime as can be covered with tiles before the mortar has set.Surplus mortar shall be removed. The thickness of setting bed inany space shall not be less than 'll2".
Floor and wall surfaces to receive the tiles shall be thoroughlycleaned of all dirt, dust, oil and other objectionable matters. Tilesshall be laid out from the center line of each space in an outwarddirection and the pattem should be made symmetrical with aminimum number of cut tiles as directed
09700-11
Engineer.
Joints between the tiles shall be of uniform width. Tiles shall becut with a suitable cutting tool and rough edges shall be rubbedsmooth. Tiles shall be laid to the straight edges.
4.4.2 Cement Concrete Tiles
The cement concrete tiles shall be laid to the required lines, levelsand grades over a setting bed of cement sand mortar comprisingof 1 part of cement and 4 parts of sand by volume.
The sides shall be buttered with cement mortar and adjacent tileslaid in the same manner in the required pattern, with a thin joint inproper level and line. The joints shall then be thoroughly cleanedwith wire brush and pointed wlth neat cement of the same colouras the ti le.
Care shall be taken to see that full tiles are used as far aspossible. Where this is not possible, the edge tiles sh€ll be neatlycut with an electric saw and th€ edges nrbbed smootfi. In case ofpatteirEd:fibB;ftelilea shalt b€ hid in. su6h a:wBy.that tre pati6rh ,ende synmetrically on tlvo sides.
cement concrete tiles shall be cured for 7 days with water andthen thoroughly cleaned and dried. Notwithstanding anythingwritten above, the manufacturer's printed instructions regardinglaying shall bi) strictly followed.
4.4.3 Ceramic Tiles/Porcelain Tiles
The ceramic tiles/porcelain tiles shall be laid to the required lines,levels and grades over a setting bed of cement sand mortarcomprising of one part of cement and 4 parts of sand by volumeand the joints filled with neat white/pigmented cement includingvertical and horizontal covers. The tile floor shall be kept wet for atleast 72 hours and no traffic should be allowed on the tiles duringcuring period.
Surfaces to receive the ceramic tiling shall be clean and free ofdirt, dust, oil, grease or other objectionable matter. Setting bedsand tile shall be installed with their resoective surfaces to trueplanes, level or pitched to off-sets as required by the drawings, sothat the surface of the completed tiling work will be at theelevations and grades shown. Re-tempering of mortar will not bepermitted. Tiles shall be laid out from the center lines of eachspace outward adjustments made along walls, partitions andborders, if any, so as to symmetrize the pattern with a minimumcut tiles.
Joint between tiles shall be of uniform width and the same as thetile installed Fractional changes in dimensions without varying theuniformity of joint widths be permitted. Tile shall be cut with asuitable cutting tool and rough edges shall be rubbed smooth.Cut-tile misfits shall be laid to the straight edges. Straight edgesshall be accuratelv set to the lines established and mat at suitableintervals to keep the joints parallel over the entire area.
09700-12
o
Over the existing bed a topping of 1-112 thick PCC 1:2:4 shall belaid. Scratch mats for aoolication as foundation coats shall not beless than 5/8" thick and shall be composed by Volume of 1 partGrey Portland Cement to 3 parts dry sand, mixed with theminimum amount of water necessary to produce a workable mass.Mortar for scratch coats shall be used within one hour after mixingand re-tempering will not be permitted. Scratch coats shall beapplied in sufficient quantity and with sufficient pressure to coverthe entire area and 'ln good keys, it shall be deeply scoured orscratched and cross- scratched, it shall be protected and keptmoist during the curing period. Scratch coats shall be thoroughlydamp-cured, and an interval of not less than 24 hours and notmore than 48 hours shall be permitted between application ofscratoh coats and application offloat coats.
Float coats shall be composed by volume of '1 part Grey Portlandcementlo 2 parts dry sand, mixed with a minimum amour of waternecessary io produce a workable mass. Float coats shall be
from the finish suitable for reception oftiles.
Joints shall be straight, level perpendicular and of even widththroughout. Verticaljoints shall be maintained plumb for the entireheight of the tile work. Each tile shall be brought to true level andplane by uniformly applied pressure under a straight edge orrubber-faced block. Tiles that are out of true plane or misplacedshall be removed and reset. Damaged or defective tile shall bereplaced. The tile shall be installed as follows: -
Wall tile shall be set by troweling a skim coat of neat PortlandCement on the float coat or by applying a skim coat to the back ofeach tile unit and immediately floating the tile into place. After tilehas set remove mortar using a minimum of water. Replacedamaged tiles.
After the tiles have been thoroughly set, jojnts shall be grouted fullwith a plastic mix of neat, white cement immediately after asuitable area of tile has been set. The joints shat) be struck flushand excess mortar shall he cut off and wiped from the mortarjoints after grout has been cleaned from the surface shall beroughened at once and filled flush with the tile edge, before themortar begins to harden. Tile skirting and coves shall be solidlybacked mortar.
Ties shall be fit closely to electrical out-lets, piping, fixtures & otherpenetration so plates collars or covers overlap tiles.
At dado, tiles shall be laid in grids, pattern, unless otherwiseindicated. Joints shall be aligned when adjoining tiles on floors,base, walls and trim are the same size. Tile work shall be laid outand center tile fixed in both directions in each sDace or on eachwall/floor area. Ad.iustments shall be made to minimize cutting.Uniform joint width shall be provided unl
) :09700-13
se indicated.
To prevent adhesive or staining of exposed tile surfaces by Grout,a temporary pre-coating of a continuous film of protective coatingindicated below can be aoolied:
Petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot.Grout release.Kraft paper.
The colour variation shall be in ranges selected during samplesubmittals and acceptable to the Engineer and special care shallbe taken while installing in any single enclosed area, as perinstructions of the Engineer. At all vertical & horizontal corners,the edges of the toes shall be grind & cut at 45" to achieve proper& perfect joint marring visible: side, surface of tiles. Before finalinspection, protective coatings shall be removed & neutral cleanershall be rinsed from tile surface. The finished work shall be clean& free of cracked chipped, broken, un-bonded & otherwisedefective tile works. Tiles with any of the above defects in anyarea shall be removed and changed immediately.
ln Thin Set l\4ortar
Tiles laid in Thin Set Dry Bond Mortar shall be applied as perdetails shown on drawings and shall consist of a P.C.C. base ofspecified thickness. Tiles shall be set. by troweling a skin coat ofDry Bond l\4ortar on the base coat and combed with a notchededge of trowel. Back butter each tile unit to ensure 100% mortarcoverage and float the tile into place, tapping the tile to ensuremaximum bond strength. All other installation requirements' shallbe as per specifications mentioned in part [a] above.
Using Epoxy Adhesive
A layer of Sika Tile Fix '15 or approved equal be applied over theprepared surface as per instructibns of the manufacturer. The jointwidth in floors shall be as per instructions of the Engineer and thegap shall be filled with Sika Tile Grout (White) or any otherapproved equivalent with matching colour.
4.4.4 L4arble/Granite Flooring
lvlarble / Granite tiles of approved size, colour, texture and qualityshall be spread on floor and water be sprinkled for visibility ofactual shade/colour of the marble Wes. Tiles with variations inshade/colours, cracks, broken edges, defective spots/holes,venation in texture or any other defect unacceptable to theEngineer shall be taken out as rejected and removed from site.Only approved tiles shall be used in works.
The Contractor shall employ skilled and trained tile workers fordoing this job. He may be allowed to employ an approvedspecialist alb-Contractor for this item of work. The surface overwhich the tiles are requlred to be fixed will be clean of all dirt anddust and should be properly hacked so that the mortar sticks wellto the surface. The edge of the tiles shall be dressed true
a)b)
(a)
(b)
09700-14
a
square by rubbing them with carborundum stone or any otherapproved means and the same will be fixed in position.
The marble tiles on wall shall be laid in Sika Tile Fix '15 adhesiveor any other approved shall be applied as per manufacturer'srecommendations. Tile shall be allowed to season for at leastthree days during which it shall be kept moist.
Du6 allowance shall be made for movement of the structure andbacking by lncluding construction and expansion joints in the tilework. These should be properly filled with app owed masticcompound. Expansion joints shall be formed to coincide with theexpansion joints in the building.
Over the prepared surface each tile shall then be set individuallyover the adhesive and worked by tapping tiles gently with awooden mallet. The tiles shall be laid in pattern as per drawingand instructions of the Engineer and joints, width shall bra fixedaccordingly and in no case shall vary.
Tight joints for marble I Granite work should not exceed 1/8" Thejoints shall be grouted Sika Tile Grout or any other grout approvedequal as per manufacturer's recommendations in matchingcolours. The joints must be all in the lines running straight fromroom to room, room to passage, etc, and for this purpose piecesof tiles may have to be used at edges. Tiles shall be set -evenlyand the 4 corners of each tile shall meet flush with the adjoining 4corners of the tiles. The whole of the floorinq shall be true to leveland grades where required.
Laying of tiles in any pattern shall begin from centre of the area sothat the opposite side will require the $ame number of tile and theborder design may work symmetrically.
The colour variation shall be in ranges selected during samplesubrilittals and acceptable to the Engineer and speci.l care shallbe taken while installing in any single enclosed area as perinstructions of the Engineer.lf tiles have become dilly, they s is ii be washed with washingsoda. The surface shall be cuvgrind, repaired, grind again andchemically polished . to full gloss to the satisfaction of theEngineer.
Marble slabs be used in lieu of marble tiles where indicated.
Granite slabs shall be used in lieu of Granite tiles where indicated.
Final Finish
The contfactor shall make suitable arrangement for giving finalflnish to the tile works such as cleaning, washing and polishing asspecified.
The marble shallbe polish finished (Chemical polish) to a surface
o shall be made for exertingother methods to ensureacceptable limits.
4.4.5 Concrete Pavers
of all necessary controls, botching oruniformity in quality of stone within
Concrete pavers shall be laid in-accordance with the instructionsof the manufacturer over a cushion of sand. The pavers will belajd as per the instructions of the Engineer. The layout shall be asper approved design, The exposed face ot all pavlng stones shallhave the smooth flnish, shall be kept clean and free from anyexternal matter. Where ever streaks are formed these shall bewashed off immediately and shall not be allowed to harden.Horizontal and vertical joints shall be parallel and smooth. Thethickness of the joints shall be approximately l3 mm.
4.4.6 Terrazzo Tiles Flooring
Apply cement slurry coat over surfaces of concrete substrateimmediately prior to placing sefting bed which shall comprisecement sand mortar 1:2 and shall be 1" thick and shall be spreaduniformly. Limit area of application to avoid premature drying out.Set tiles before initial set occurs. Apply a thin layer of cementpaste to bottom of each unit. Set tamp and level units immediatelyso that cement mortar slurry rises up in the joint. Set units inrequired pattern as specified and as per the instructions of theEngineer with uniform joint widths. The levels and lines shall bechecked with very fine twine and the defects removedimmediately. After the tiles have initially set, the joints shall beraked out and coloured cement of required shade shall be spreadin the form of slurry to fill all joints. Force grout into joints, strikeflush and tool slightly concave. Remove mortar and grqut fromsurfaces while still moist and as the work progresses. The surfaceafter drying (minimum of seven days) shall be machine grinded toa true even surface using various grades of abrasive stones asrequired and directed by the Engineer. After the first grinding thefloor shall be grouted with the same colour composition as usedfor its manufacture, to a consistency of thick cream and shall bebrushed over the floor to fill in the joints and after 72 hours thegrouting coat shall be removed by grinding till a smooth and evensurface is obtained. and chemically polished.
The tiles shall be cut wherever required with a suitable cutting tooland rough edges shall be rubbed smooth. The finished surfaceshall not show any depressions in individual tiles or anyundulations in the floor.
Do not permit traffic on finished surface ior a minimum of 72hours.
4.4.7 PVC VinylTies
The base shall be prepared as per thickness shown on drawingskeeping the margin of tile thickness. After the base is cured,irregularities found on the base shall be filled in and leveled
09700-16
the application of tiles. Surface to receive tiles shall be thoroughlycleaned of all dirt. dust. oil and other obiectionable mafter.Aoproved manufacture/s recommended adhesive shall be appliedas per specifications and in quantities recommended by him. Tilesshall be laid starting from one side of the room or as per theinstructions of the Engineer and shall be so pressed that completeadhesion takes Dlace,
Tiles shall be cut where required with suitable cutting tool andrough edges shall be rubbed smooth. Tiles shall be laid to straighteoges as per approveo pattern.
I\4EASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
GeneralExcept otherwise soecified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will be made for the undermentioned specified works related to the relevant items of the Bill ofQuantities.
The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unitrate of the respective items ofthe Bill of Quantities.
5.1.1 Loss and wastage of material due to consolidation, erosion andsettlement.
5.1.2 All type of joints (expansion, contraction and construction jointerc.).
5.1.3 class 'C' cement concrete screed base and 1:4 cement sandmortar under terrazzolbrick on edge flogr and skirting/dado etc.
5.1 .4 Finishing/grinding, washing & polishing works of ceramic, concrete,tetrczzo tile,leffazzo floors and marble tiles.
5.1 .5 Marble strips in terrazzo floors
5.1.6 1:2 and 1:4 cement sand rough cast plaster.5.1.7 Sand cushion under concrete pavers
5.1.8 Adhesives used in the laying of PVC flooring.
Cement Concrete Floor
5.2.'1 Measurement
Measurement of acceptably completed works of cement concretefloor steel trowelled finish will be made on the basis of net actualarea in square feet or net area in cubic feet laid in position asshown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
5.2.2 PaymentPayment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofcement concrete floor steel trowelled finish on the basis of unit
5 .1
5.2
09700-17
and shall constitute full compensation for all the works related tothe item.
ceramic Tile and marble / Granite Floor
5.3.1 Measurement
5.4
Measurement of acceptably completed works of ceramic tile infloor will be made on the basis of net actual area in square feet offloor laid in position as shown on the drawing or as directed by theEngineer.
5.3.2 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofceramic tile floor on the basis of unit rate per square feet quoted inthe Bills of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation for allthe works related to the item.
Ceramic Tile Dado
5.4.1 Measurement
Measurement of acceptably completed works ol ceramic tile indado will be made on the basis of net actual area in square feet ofdado laid in position as shown on the Drawing or as directed bythe Engineer.
5.4.2 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of ceramictile in dado on the basis of unit rate per square feet quoted in theBills of Quantities. The unit rate shall include all cost of cement,sand, mortar and shall constitute full compensation for all theworks related to the items.
Cast in place Tenazzo, Skirting and Dado
5.5.1 Measurement
Measurement of acceptably completed works of casFin-placetenazzo floot, skirting and dado, respectively will be made on thebasis of net actual area in square feet of floor, riser and tread laidin position as shown on the drawing or as directed by theEngineer.
5.5.2 PaymentPayment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of cast-inplace terrazzo floor, skirting and dado, on the basis of unit rateper square feet quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shallconstitute tull compensation for all the works related to the item.
Cement Concrete Tile Floor/Pavers
l\,,leasurement
Measurement of acceptably completed works of cement contile in floor will be made on the basis of net actual area in
5.6
09700-18
a feet of floor laid in positjon as shown on the Drawing or asdirected by the Engineer.
5.6.2 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofcement concrete tile in floor on the basis of unit rate per squarefeet quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute fullcompensation for alt the works related to the item.
PVC Tile
5.7.1 lvleasurement
Measurement of acoeptably completed works of PVC tile in floorwill be made on the basis of net actual area in square feet of floorlaid in position as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the
. Engineer.
5 .7 .2 Payment
Payment will be made tor acceptable measured quantity of PVCtile in floor on the basis of unit rate per square feet quoted in theBills of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation for all theworks related to the item.
STONE FOR FACING WORI(CLADDING
5.8.1 Measurement
lvleasurement of acceptably completed works of stone for facingwill be made on the basis of net actual area in square feet of walllaid in position as shown on the Drawing or as directed by theEngineer.
5.8.2 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of stonefor facing on wall on the basis of unit rate per square feet quotedin the Bjlls of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation forall the works related to the item.
5.7
t
5.8
O
09700-19
o sEcTtoN - 09900
PAINT AND COATING
SCOPE
The work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing allmaterials, plant, labour, equipment, appliances and performing all operations inany floor and at any height in connection with surface preparation, mixing,painting concrete works, gates, frames, walls, ceilings and all such surfaces,architectural textured coatings, as shown on the Drawings and/or as directed bythe Engineer. The scope of this section of specification is covered with detailedspecifications as laid down herein.
SUBMITTALS
2.1 Samples of all colors/textures and finishes shall be prepared inadvance of requirement so as not to delay work and shall be submittedto the Engineer for approval before any work is commenced. Any workdone .without such approval shall be redone to the Engineer'ssatisfaction, without additional expense to the Employer. Samples ofeach type of painytextured coating shall be on separate 12" x 12" x 1/8"tempered hard board panels. Manufactureis chart showing all thevariety of painutextures shall be submitted for colour/texture selection.
2.2 The Engineer will furnish a schedule of colours/textures for each areaand surface. All colours shall be mixed in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions.
MATERIALS
3.1 Except as otheMise specified, all painting shall be applied inconformity with BS CP 231 "Painting of Building" as applicable to thework. All materials shall be acceptable, proven, first grade productsand shall meet or exceed the minimum standards of reputablemanufacturers as approved by the Engineer.
3.2 Colours shall be pure, non-fading pigments, mildew-proof sun-proof,finely ground in approved medium. Colours used on-plaster andconcrete surfaces shall be lime oroof. All materials shall be subiect tothe Englnee/s approval.
3.3 All synthetic enamel paints and primers for structural steel works,metal work and wood works will be the best available of its type andshall be approved by the Engineer prior to its procurement.
3.4 Approved quality Weather Shield^iveather Coat paint shall be used forpainting the exteriors of the structures or other surfaces wherespecified on the drawings as directed by the Engineer.
3.5 The plastic emulsion painwinyl emulsion paint or similar as approvedby the Engineer shall be used for interior surfaces.
Texture cqating wherever specified shall be acrylic resin basedcoating composed of acrylic copolymerg, natural quartz, naturalmarble chips, metallic oxides, antibacterial and antifungal additives,
t .
2 .
o
3.7 All material for Bitumen painting shall consist of Bitumen grade 10/20.It shall be used for foundations or wherever recommended by theEngineer. The rate of application in foundations shall not be less than20 lb/100 Sft. each coat.
3.8 Only paints manufactured by lcl or Berger shall be used in thisProject.
All material shall be delivered to site in their original unbrokencontainers or packages & shall bear the manufacturer's name, label,brand & formula & will be mixed and applied in accordance with hisdirections.
DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING
Paints/coatings shall be delivered to the site in sealed containers, which plainlyshow tree type of paint, colour (formula or specifications number) batch number,texture, quantity, date of manufacture, name of manufacturer and instructions foruse. Pigmented paints shall be supplied in containers not larger than 20 liters. Allmaterials shall be stored under cover in a clean storage space, which should beaccessible at all times to the Engineer. lf storage is allowed inside the building,floors shall be kept clean and free from paint spillage.
EXECUTION
Except as otherwise specified allpa inted/coated .
5.1 SURFACEPREPARATION
concrete and plastered surfaces are to be
5.1.' l All oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale and any other foreignsubstance shall be removed from the surface to bepainted/coated, polished and white washed by the use of a.solvent and clean wiping material. Following the solvent' cleaning, the surfaces shall be cleaned by scrapping, chipping,blasting, wire brushing or other effective means as approvedbY the Engineer.
O 5i.2 ln the event the surfaces become otherwise contaminated inthe interval between cleaning and painting/coating, re-cleaningwill be done bv the Contractor at no additional cost.
5.'1.3 Surfaces of stainless steel. aluminum, bronze, and machinedsurfaces adjacent to metal work being cleaned or painted shallbe protected by effective masking or other suitable means,during the cleaning and painting operations.
5.1.4 All the surfaces to be painted/coated with approved qualitypaint/coat shall be free from dust, dirt, fungus, lichen, algae etc.Oil paint, varnish and lime wash should always be removed byscraping and washing.
4.
All surfaces to be bitumen painted shall be thoroughly cleanedof any accretion, dust, dirt etc. by scraping, wire-brushing or as
o
5.'t.5
t No work in this section shall be allowed until all surfaces orconditions have been inspected and approved by the Engineer.
APPLICATION
5.2.1 All paint and coating materials shall be in a thoroughly mixedcondition at the time of apolication. All work shall be done in aworkman like manner, leaving the finished surface free fromdrips, ridges, waves, laps, and brush marks. All paints shall beapplied under dry and dust free conditions, unless approved bythe Engineer paint shall not be applied when the temperature ofthe metal or of the surrounding air is below 7 degreescentigrade. Surfaces shall be free from. moisture at the time ofpainting.
5.2.2
5.2 .3
All primary paint shall be applied by brushing- The first coat ofpaint shall be applied immediately after cleaning, When paint isapplied by spraying, suitable measures shall be taken to preventsegregation of the paint in the container during paintingoperation.
Effective means shall be adopted for removing all free oil andmoisture from the air supply lines of the spraying equipment.Each coat of paint shall be allowed to dry or harden thoroughlybefore the succeeding coat is applied.
Surfaces to be Dainted that will be inaccessible after installationshall be completely painted prior to installation. .
Coats of Weather Shield/y'Veather Coat paint and texturedcoatings shall be applied in aocordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions or as directed by the Engineer.
For painting only as much material should be mixed as can beused up in one hour. Over-thinning will not be permitted. Afterthe first coat the surfaces will be soaked evenly four or five timesand the second coat shall be applied after leaving for at leastovernight.
Where shown on Drawings all exterior finishes shall bepainted/coated with Weather Shield/weather coat paint ortexture coated in apprgved coloursltextures as permanufacturer's speciflcations. The number of coats Shall be asshown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
All wooden doors shall be painted with approved syntheticenamel paint or lacquer polished as per manufacturer'srecommendation and instructions or after aporoval of theEngineer.
Plastic emulsion paint, vinyl emulsion paint or matt enamel paintof the approved make and shade shall be applied to surfaces asshown on Drawings as per manufacturer's instructions. Thenumber of coat shall be as indicated on the Drawings or asdirected by the Engineer.
5.2.4
09900-3
5.2.5 Two coats of hot bitumen paint shall be applied to exposedconcrete surfaces in contact with earth. The tirst coat shall beallowed to dry for about six hours before applying the secondcoat. During the operation of painting great care should be takento avoid air bubbles. The manufacturers instructions andEngineeds directions shall be complied with.
The Contractor shall repair at his own expense all damaged ordefective areas of shoo-oainted metal work and structural steelwork. Metal surfaces against which concrete is to be placed willbe shop-painted and shall be cleaned prior to being embeddedtn concfele,
6.
5.3 JOB CONDITIONS
5.3.'1 observe manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximumtemperalure but do not apply paint or finish to any surfaceunless ambient temperature is 10 degree C or above and lessthan 43 degree C. No painting shall be done above 9070 relativehumidity.
5.3.2 Place drop cloths to adequately protect allfinished work.
5.3.3 Remove and replace all items of finish hardware, device plates,accessories, lighting fixtures or other removable items.
5.3.4 In no case shall any finish hardware or other finished item that isalready fitted into place be painted, unless otherwise specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
All painvcoat for any one suface shall be top quality, of one manufacturer andapproved by the Engineer. Deep tone accent colours shall be used and theunavailability oJ linal coat colours may be the basis Ior rejecting materjals lor anyone surface.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
7.1 General
Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in Contract Documents,no measurement and payment will be made for the under mentionedspecified works related to the relevant items of the Bill of Quantities. Thecost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unitrate of the respective items of Bill of Quantities.
The rates quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities shall includework to be executed under these specification in any floor and at anyheight except where otherwise specifically stated in the relevant item ofBill of Quantities and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim orclaim any compensalion on this account.
Paintinq
1 Preparatory works, including preparatory materials, scraplng,
ill?.lllif :,iii"L",?':,'^tlx'-,:'""n'nn' prime coaiins' primins(.+nR\
protection offlnished works etc. (q09900-4 \n
a 7.1.2 Polishing works, including preparatory materials, scraping,cleaning, sanding etc.
7.1 .3 Painting work on steel & wooden surfaces.
7.2.'1 l\4easurement
lvleasurement of acceptably completed respective type of paintingworks will be made on the basis of net actual areas in square feetof the surface painted as shown on the Drawlngs or as directed bythe Engineer.
7 2.2 Paymenl
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofrespectjve type of painting on the basis of unit rate per square feetquoted in the Bill of Quantities and shall constitute fullcompensation for allthe works related to the item.
o
a
o09900-5
sEcTtoN - 10100
FIBRE GLASS WORKS
1. SEE-9E,]498KThe work covered under this section of specification consists of supplying andfixing of Fibre Glass, cleaning providing all labour, tools, appliances, material,transport and the performance of all operations required for the properinstallation of the Fibre Glass as specified and shown in the drawings, or asinstruoted by the Engineer.
FIBRE GLASS:
The Fibre Glass used in various locations shall be as indicated in the drawings,and shall conform to BS-952: 1964.
Fibre Glass Sheet shall be of thickness and size shown on the Drawing. EachFibre Glass Sheet shall be bedded with a thin layer of good quality material asapproved by the Engineer and should be fixed securely screwed,
INSTALLATION:
Samples of Fibre Glass must be approved by the Engineer before its installation,and shall be cut to required sizes, and the edges smoothed before installation.
All Fibre Glass Sheets shall be watertight on completion. Edge clearance shall beequal all around each pane, and not less than 3mm.
All sun-facing Fibre Glass Sheets shall be washed properly with drinking water torender them free form any greasy water. Solar control film shall be applied oncleaned sheets by authorized seryicemen for this work as approved by theEngineer. The film shall be applied on the Fibre Glass before it is fixed at itsappropriate place. The film shall be applied with approved adhesive in such away that no air bubble is left between the Fibre Glass and film and clarity is notaffected.
The Contractor shall make good at his own cost, all Fibre Glass Sheets brokenby his workmen while cleaning or carrying out other operations. On completion ofthe Fibre Glass work, all Sheets shall be cleaned at Contractor's expense.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
The cost of all the Fibre Glass works involved within the scope of this section ofspecifications as per all the drawings and condition so contract are covered onlywithin the quoted rate of items of the Bill of Quantities.
10100-1
4-
o
sEcTtoN - 15100
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
'I. GENERAL
Supply, fixing, testing and commissioning of water supply system, including pipes,accessories, valves, etc., as specified in other sections and herein: as shown on draw-ings and instruction of Consultanv Engineer.
2. MATERIAL AND INSTALLATION
2.1 Galvanized lron Pipe Work
The galvanized pipes shall conform to British Standard 1387 Specifications for "SteelTubes and Tubular suitable for screwlng to B.S. 21 pipe threads". Pipe of 1/2" to 2-1/2" diameter may be of medium quality, llL or KPM make.
All screwed pipes and sockets shall have B.S. pipe thread in accordance with B.S.21. In order to prevent damage to the leading thread, the ends of the sockets shallbe chamfered internally. A complete and uniform adherent coating of zinc will beprovided for galvanized pipes.
Every pjpe length shall be tested at the manufacturer's place to a hydraulicpressure of 483 N/cm square (700 lb./sq.in) and shall be maintained at thepressure sufficiently long for proof and inspection.
Pipes which are bundled shall be secured together by rope or soft iron or othersuitable material. The threads of all pipes shall be effectively covered with a goodquality grease or other suitable compound, and each pipe above 50 mm (approx.: 2")nominal bore shall have a protecting ring affixed to the unsocketed screwed end.
All pipe fittings up to 3'dia. shall conform to B.S. 21 and shall be of malleable castiron.
Unions and flanges should be furnished and installed at each threaded or flangedconnection to all equipment or valves. The faces of flanges being connected shouldbe alike in all cases. Unions and flanges should be located so that pipe can be easilydisconnected for removal of equipment, valve or tank. The run and arrangement ofall pipes shall be as shown on the drawings and as directed during installation. Allvertical pipes shall be erected plumb and shall be parallel to wall and other pipes. Allhorizontal runs of piping shall be kept close to walls. lf required to change thelocation etc. during the currency of the work, the Contractor will do so at noadditional cost.
Screwed joints in G.l. pipes shall be made perfectly tight, without the use of any fillerexcept approved jointing compound or tape, wherever required to make flangedjoints, they shall conform to B.S. 10 Table D.
Sultable and substantial number of hangers, supports and clamps of approved typeand make shall be provided for all horizontal and verticalshall be supported in the following mannerl
IeSItesl
t15100-1
prprng
2.2
2.3
Pipe Size Maximum Spacing of Hanger Rod Size.
(dia in mm) (meters) (mm)
15-50 2.5 9.5
65100 3.0 13.0'150 4.0 '13.0
Hangers shall be supported from approved concrete inserts in concrete slab. Nopiping shall be hung from the piping of other systems. Long radius bends shall beused wherever possible.
Furnish and install all pipe passing through walls with sleeves of G.l. sheet l8 gauge,Xhe inside dia, of which shall be at least ll2" grealet than the outside of the pipepassing through it. Sleeves in exterior walls and pits shall have anchor flanges andspace between pipe and sleeve shall be caulked water-tight. All pipes passingthrough floors shall be provided with 18 gauge G.l. sheet sleeves properly anohoredto the floor. At water proof locations, and approved waterproof type pipe sleeve shallbe provided.
Underground piping shall be painted with two coals of black asphalt paint or twocoats of bitumen wrapped with Hessian cloth or shall be applied one layer of PVCwrapping tape with 20% overlap.
All l\4.S. hangers, brackets, etc., shall be given one coat of red oxide primer and h'vocoats of synthetic enamel paint. All exposed G.l. piping shall be given two coats ofsynthetic enamel paint. Materials for painting shall be high quality products of a well-known manufacturer and shall be approved by the Englneer before using. The pipingshall be painted according to a color code approved by the Engineer.
All water distribution system shall be tested whole or in part to 1-112 times theworking pressure. The Contractor shall pay for all devices, materials, supplies, laborand ' for the test. The test will be run for h,vo hours at revealed by the test shall berepaired and the whole test return until the system proves to be satisfactory.
PPRC PIPE WORK
Centrifugal Water Supply Pumps
Refer to section '15300 for details
Valves
Refer to section 15440 for details.
15100-2a
2.4
2.7
2.5
2.6
StrainersStrainers should be'Y'pattern and cast iron body, working pressure should beequal to or greater than the maximum water pressure. The drain cock should beprovided for cleaning purposes.
Caps
Should be machined, gasketed and with straight threads or bolted type.
Unions and Flanges
Unions and flanges should be furnished and installed at each threaded or flangedconnection to all equipment or valves. The faces of Flanges being connectedshould be alike in all oases. Unions and flanges should be located so that thepipe can be easily disconnected for removal of equipment, valve or tank.
STERLIZATION/CHLORINATION
After installation and testing complete domestic water system, reservoirs, storagetanks, mains, hot or cold water piping etc. have been installed and tested shall besterilized by the following method.
A solution of chlorine gas and water containing not less than 50 ppm of free chlorineshall be injected into the system, in such a hanner as to ensure that the entiresystem is completely filled with the solution. During this procedure all valves shall beoperated and outlets shall be tested for residual chlorine, injection shall continue untilall outlets indicate at least 50 pDm of free chlorine.
After injection, the systern shall be isolated and the solution be held in retention, for aperiod of not less than 24 hours. Tests shall be made for residual chlorine atterretention. lf such tests indicate less than 50 ppm of residual chlorine, the entireprocedure shall be repeated. After satisfactory sterilization has been effected, thesystem shall be flushed from any approved source, until all traces of chlorine contentis no greater than that in the existing supply.
Until sterilization of the water system has been made, the contractor shall have signsposted at proper locations stating that the water system has not been sterilized andshall not be used for human consumption.
A certificate of sterilizaton/chlodnation, togetherwith bacteriological reports shall beprepared and submitted to the Engineef Incharge stating the work has been done inaccordance with the specifications set for the above and prior to final acceptance ofthe installation.
o
a15100-3 ,1'ril.-,t;y'
2.
1 .
sEcTtoN 15200
VALVES
SCOPE
The work under this section of the specification consists of furnishing all plant,labour, equipment, appliances, materials and performing all operations requiredas specified herein, as shown on the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer, inconnection with installation of valves
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Bronze gate valvesBronze check valvesFloat valves
BS- 1952BS- 5152BS- 1212
1"n..2;
3.
4.
SUBMITTALS
The contractor shall submit technical brochures and samples of all the itemsmentioned in the Specifications from approved manufactures or as directed bythe Engineer
MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT
4.1 DESCRIPTION
All valves shall be of renowned manufacturer as specified. Valve material shallbe suitable for installation on potable water lines, sewage line or sludge piping.Service rating of the valves shall be at least 7 bars. The interior of all valves shallbe cleaned of allforeign material before installation.
Valves shall be installed at the position indicated in the Contract .Documents oras directed by the Engineer. Valves shall be adequately suppoded. Installedvalves shall be subjected to pressure and leakage tests and no leakage shall beobserved under these tests. End joints, flanges, etc., shall be of the appropriateclass and material.
Valves shall be installed either in chambers or above grade on line as shown inthe Contract documents and/or as specified herein. Valves shall be securelyancnoreo.
Open and closed position indicator shall be provided for all valves. lf installed invalve chambers, the indicator shall not extend above ground and shall notinterfere with opening or closing of the valve. The indicator design shall beapproved by the Engineer before installation.
Unless otherwise specified, valves should be of the same nominal sjze as thesize of the pipe line to which they are connected. All valves that incorporatedpacked glands should be capable of having glands packed when connected inline and subject to the working line pressure. AII isotating valves shall providetight shutoff in the closed position. All hand wheel valves shall rotate clockwise toclose the valve. Check valve should be install in only which isrecommended by thb manufacturer and approved by
at5200-1
Valve bonnets and covers should be easily removable and the gasket and glandsshould be readily renewable.
All gate and sluic€ valves shall incorporate guides in the body to ensure thecorrect position of valve discs at all times. The working parts of valves and cocksshould be bronze and the body casting should be bronze for valves and cocks upto 2", connection and cast iron for valves and cock of 2-'ll2" diameter connectionand above.
Gland rings and spindles should be of a good running fit and stuffing boxesshould be fitted with neoprene 'O' ring seals. The exterior finish of all bronzevalves bodies should be polished except otherwise specified.
Check valves up to and including 2-'ll2" diameter should be of JY' pattern swingtype having regrindable bronze discs with the disc seat integral with the valvebody. The disc and seat should be accessible via a screwed cap for regrindingwithout removal of the disc.
lsolating valves for all water piping should be full way type gate valves unlessotherwise indicated and should be fitted in the following positions, whether shownon drawings or not:
- Inlet and outlet connections to pumps.
- Inlet and outlet connections to water strainers and filters
- Inlet and outlet connections to tanks.
- Inlet and outlet connections to three Port Valves.
- By pass connection around valves and equipment.
- Branch connection from service mains.
- At top or base of the riser served from below or above.
Ball float valve should be the internally hydraulically balanced double seatedpattern. The operating mechanism should be properly fixed to an arm oi brasswhich in turn shall be fixed to tinned coooer float. The valve shall be of bronzebody. The valve faces shall be synthetic rubber. The hinge pin and bushes shallbe copper alloy.
Regufating valves for all water services lor size 2" and smaller should be lockshield pattern disc type with parabolic shaped slotted disc and shall regulate theflow in proportion to the lift of disc.
Regulating valves larger than 2" size shall be globe pattern valves.
Bib cock shall be male inlet, face of wall lype and chromium plated. Pressurerelief valves shall be spring loaded angle type, water pressure relief valve locatedin water line and constructed with semi-steel bodv. bronze tdm.
dq\)s/\at )a\ /"R\;-;'vjt5200-2
I 4.2 BRONZE GATE VALVE
All gate valves of 75 mm and below shall be of bronze conforming to BS-1952 and shall be of appropriate class for the working pressure of thesystem on which they are installed. Open and shut indicators shall bemarked on the handle. The ends may bo screwed or flanged. The valvesare to be installed inclusive of all fittings and accessories required forcomplete installation.
4.3 BRONZE CHECK VALVES
Check valves shall conform to B.S. 5'152 "Soecifications for bronze checkvalves for general purposes". The service rating shall be 10 Kg/cm2. Thedirection of flow shall be permanently marked on the body of the valve.Body of valve shall be tested to 1-112 times the service rating and seatshall be tested to service rating. No leakage shall be permitted under theabove tests check valves shall be of swing type.End of the valves shall be flanged to joint with the standard fittings.Flanges shall be of appropriate class and material. Valves shall beinstalled at positions shown on the drawings the interior shall be cleanedof all foreign matter before installation. They shall be inspected to ensurethat all componehts are sound and in working condition.
AtR. VALVES
Air valves shall be of cast iron. of specified size for automatic discharge oiair and for automatic breaking of vacuum in a pressure main. They shallbe suitable for installing on water mains of 7 bars working pressure. Thematerial used shall be corrosion resisting, groMh. Each valve shall beinstalled with an isolating gate valve, stand pipe, damp and connectionwith the l ine.
FLOAT VALVE
Flo:at valve shall be of copper alloy, piston type and shall conform to B.S.'1212. Floatshall be ofcoDoerand shall conform to B.S. 1968.
DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
Valves should be handled and stored properly to avoid any damage and slippageof threads especially during installation.
TETESTING & COMMISSIONING
Valves shall be tested to ascertain their proper working under test andpressures.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
7.1 MEASUREI\,IENT
Measurement of acceptably completed works of valves, wili bethe basis of actual number of valves installed in oosition as shown onDrawing or as directed by the Engineer including jointing arrangempipe on both end of valves gaskets, nuts, bolts, etc., anchoring of
4.4
4.5
',
maoe
\1.,
t;15200-3
t concrete. steel embedded parts and indicators, wire mesh scre€n onwashout and Painting.
PAYMENT
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantjty of valves, on thebasis of unit rate pef number ouoted in the Bill of Quantities and shallconstitute full comoensation for all the works related to the item.
7.2
a
a15200-4
sEcTtoN - 15400PLUMBING FIXTURES & EQUIPMENl
1 . SCOPE
The work under this section consists of providing all material and equipment andperforming all the work necessary for the complete execution (jointing, clamping,cleaning, painting etc. Both above and underground and embedded in walls) andcompletion, including testing and commissioning of all systems of plumbingworks as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein and/or as directed bythe Engineer. The system include plumbing works as follows:
Hot Water and Cold Water Supply
Building Drainage
Rain Water Drainage
;
i i j )
t All the above named systems shallextension of these internal systems upas indicated on the drawings.
be completed in all respects includingto the specified limits outside the building
2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS
G. L PipesC. l. Pipes
SUBMITTALS & SHOP DRAWINGS
BS- 1387 (1985) Medium dutyBS- 416 & 2494
o
All the materials and equipment shall be of the specifications mentioned hereinand the Contractor shall submit the sample, necessary catalogues, sketches, thename of manufacturer and guar€rntee if necessary, before installation. Thesystem shall be installed after the Engineer approves it. All material andequioment shall be new and unused.
It is specifically intended and must be agreed to by each Contractor submitting abid, that any material or labor which is usually furnished as a part of suchequipment and which is necessary for its proper completion and best operationshall be furnished as a part of this Contract without any additional cost whetheror not shown in detail on the drawings or described in detail, in the specifications.
Approval of material and equipment by the Engineer shall not absolve theContractor of the responsibility of furnishing the same of proper size, quantit,quality and all performance characteristics to efficiently fulfill the requirementsand intent of the Contract Documents.
Prior to commencement of works on site and at least 3 weeks in advance of allthe drawing being required for actual execution the Contractor shall submit onlarger scale as approved by Engineer, shop drawings in triplicate for approval tothe Engineer. The Engineer shall review the drawing and (i) approve the drawingor, (i i)approve the drawing with comments or, (i i i) di roved the drawings withcomments for rectification/revision of the
15400-1
it 3 copies to the
a
Engineer for approval. On a drawing being approved, the Contractor shall submit6 copies forformal approval and distribution to relevant offices.
All drawings shall have plan and section and with sufficient details to clearlyreflect the ingtallation of the system. All material specilications shall be providedon the drawings. All information required for preparing suitable foundation, forproviding suitable access to the system, for making openings in buildingstructure, for coordination with electrical, air-conditioning (where shown ondrawings) and other designs etc., shall be clearly provided.
Installation shall not be allowed to commence unless approved shop drawingsare in possession of the Contractor, for which purpose shop drawings shall besubmitted by the Contractor to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of actualrequirements lo gllow for ample time in checking and approval and no claim forextension of the contract time will be considered by reason of the Contractor'sfailure to submit the drawings on time.
Each shop drawing submitted by the Contractor shall include a certificate by theContract that all related conditions on site relevant to that particular installationhave been checked and that no conflict exists.
Any expenses resulting from an error mistake or omission in or delay in deliveryof th6 drawings and information mentioned above shall be borne by theContractor.
Drawings approved shall not be departed from except on the instructions of theEngineer.
The approval by the Engineer for any submitted data, working drawings,performance curves, test certificates for any items, arrangements and/or layoutshall not relieve the Contractor from any responsibility regarding the performanceof the Contract. Such aooroval shall not also relieve the Contractor fromresponsibility of any error in the submitted data and workings, brought to light atany time.subsequent to any approvals.
Relevant specified imported item, model cuts will be available with the authorityconcern for execution of work for contractor to check the models for farmpon.
4. MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT
4.1 G.I. COLD, HOT WATER PIPES AND FITTINGS
The galvanized pipes shall be of medium grade and conform to BritishStandard Specifications '1387 for "Steel Tubes and Tubular suitable forscrewing to BS 21 pipe threads".
All screwed tubes and sockets shall have BS pioes thread in accordancewith BS 21. In order to prevent damage to the leading thread, the ends ofthe sockets shall be chamfered internally.
A complete and -uniform adherent coating of zino will be provided forgalvanized pipes.
Every tube shall be tested at the manufacturer's works to a hydraulic testpressure of 4.90 lvlPa (71opsi) and shall be maintained at thepressure sufficiently long for proof and inspection.
15400-2
lF*F3.*edd ---
4.2
Tubes whioh are bundled shall be secured together by rope or sofl iron orother suitable material.
The threads of all tubes shall be effectively covered with a good qualitgrease or other suitable compound, and each tube above 2 inch nominalbore shall have a protecting ring affixed to the un-socketed screwed end.
All pipe fittings up to 75 mm dia. shall conform to BS 2'l and shall be ofmalleable oast iron. Pipe fittings above 75 mm dia. shall be of approvedmaterial and specifications as decided by the Engjneer.
SOIL. WASTE. VENT & RAIN WATER DRAINAGE PIPES & PIPEFITTINGS
The cast iron pipe shall contorm to British Standard Specifications No.4'16for "Cast lron spigot and socket soil, waste and vent pipes and flttings withspigot and socket or hubless ends. The joint shall be lead caulked orelastomeric (Rubber rings) to BS-2494
Cast iron pipes shall be centrifugally (SPUN) cast.
The quality of material shall be according to B.S.S. No.1452 for Grade 10.
The contractor shall supply coated pipes and fittings. The coatingcomposition shall be of the basis or a mixture of natural bitumen with asuitable hardener and natural asphalt. The coatings shall be smooth,tenacious, sufficiently hard, not to flow when exposed to a temperature of63 Degrees Celsius and not so brittle at zero degrees Celsius that it chipssoft when soribed lightly with the point of a pen knife.
Every pipe shall be tested at the manufacturer's work to a hydraulic testpressure of 0.07 l\4Pa. Every pipe and nfting shall ring clearly when testedfor soundness by being struck all over with a light hammer.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
4.3.1 GeneralReouirements
Materials shall conform to the latest referenced standardspecifications and other provisions stipulated herein and shall benew and unused.
All fixtures shall be ofthe best quality and finish.
Prior to procurement of the materials, the Contractor shall berequired to prepare and submit to the Engineer for his approval, acomplete schedule of materials to be used in the works togetherwith a list of the names and addresses of the manufacturers andthe trade names of the materials. The schedule shall includediagrams, drawings and such other technical data as may berequired by the Engineer to satisfy himself as to the suitability,durability, quality and usefulness of the material to be purchased.ABproval of the schedule shall not be construed as authorizing
- any deviations from the specifications unless the attention of theEngineer has been invited to the specific changes. lf the materialor eouioment offered under this
4.3
15400-3
a Engineer, equal to or better than specified, it will be givenconsideration.
Plumbing fixtures shail have smooth impervious surfaces, be fre;from defecG and concealed fouling surface. They shall be true toline, angles, curves and colour etc. Normally they shall be of localmake and of the best quality available, provided.
AII taps and cocks to be installed with plumbing fixtures shall bechrome plated (CP) and shall be of approprlate class to workwithout damage or leakage on the specified pressure of potablewater system, which is 0.88 MPa (128 psi). The taps and cocksshall be ofthe best quality locally manufactured.
When any tixture is provided with an overflow, the waste sh;ll beso arranged that the standing water in the {ixlure cannot rise in theover flow when the stopper is closed or remain in the overflowwhen the fixture' is empty.
Plumbing fixtures shall be installed in a manner lo afford easyaccess for cleaning. The space between the fixture and the wallshall be closely fitted and pointed so that there is no chance fordirt or vermin to collect.
When practical, aJJ pjpes from fixtures shall be run to the nearestwall. where fixture comes in contact with wall and floors. the iointshall be watertight.
Wall hung fixtures shall be rigidly supported by metal supportingmembers so that no strain is transmifted to the connections. Flushtanks and similar appurtenances shall be secured by approvednon-coffosive screws or bolts.
Fixtures shall be sei level and in proper alignment with referenceto adjacent walls. No water closet shall be set closer than 400 mmfrom its centre to any side wall. No urinal shall be set closer lhan
o
o
a
i00 mrtumbir)ut culnctuqe
)ther r
n from its centre to any side wall or partition nor closer tharr centre to centre. The supply lines or fittings for evenrg fixture shall be so installed as to prevent backflow. Altings, making holes etc. and making it good shall b€' in the work.
hvsical/chemical properties of the fixtures are as below:3. No Physical/Chemic Pakistan European
.1-4,\\\\Properties Standards StandardsWater absorption ess than 0.50% \4aximum 0.50701
):2 Scratch ResistanceMaximum 5.5 t4aximum 5MOH's scale VIOH's scale
3 Resistance to lesistant to acids, Resistant toelkalies, bases & lhemicals. \\ry i 9;z
)ther householdrleaDing)hemicals
4 lrazing Resistancelrazing "NlL" Srazing "NlL"5 Narpage \,4axi,'num 5.5- lMaximum 6mm
imm |/:,)r.]15400-4 4&l
- 'l;
t. No. Physical,/Chemic Pakistan European
6 Strenqth aqainst Vlore than 700 450k9/cm - 700)endtnq (g/cm (q/cm
7 l-hermal shock More than '10 \,4ore than 2lycles of thermal lvcles of thermalrhock from hot to thock from hot tolold water 15 C- loK waler zu u200 c 110 'C
8 furability rermanently lurable for everlurable
4.3.2 Wash Basins
Wash basin shall be vitreous China, best quality, local make ofcolour, size and type as approved by the Engineer. lt shall beinstalled as a complete unit including 15 mm mixer for hot and hotwater and cold water supply or CP brass faucet for cold wateronly, 15 mm stop-cocks, C.P brass chain with 32 mm rubber plug,C.P brass bottle trao for individual wash basin and C.P brass Ptrap for battery of wash basins as applicable, C.P brass strainer,heavy duty cast iron brackets with bolts, screws etc. approvedwater inlet connection pipe, waste pipe, jointing and sealingmaterial, etc., with all other minor accessories required tocomplete thejob in all respect.
4.3.3 Vanity Wash Basins
Wash basin Vanity type where shown on drawings shall bevitreous China, best quality, local make of colour, size and type asapproved by the Engineer. Other necessary fittings shall be sameas described for above Wash basin.
4.3.4 Water Closets (European type)
European type water closet shall be best quality local make ofcolour, size and type as approved by the Engineer. lt shall beinstalled as a complete unit including all accessories. Flush tank(13.5 liters) shall be of low level type - it shall be fitted with eithersingle push button or double push button type. Trap shall be castintegral with pan. The seat shall be of smooth non-combustiblenon-absorbent materials ljke Bakulite and of the open front typefixed to the pan with hinges. The fittings shall also includeapproved water inlet connection pipe, nuts bolts, 15mm dia stopcock etc. required for comDlete installation.
4.3.5 Water Closets (Orissa)
Squatting (Asianiorissa) type water closet shall be vitreous China,best quality local make of colour, size and type approved by theEngineer. lt shall be installed as a complete unit including, 15 mmstop cock, approved water inlet connection pipe, low level or highlevel Flush tank ('13.5 liters), as required. All fittings shall beinstalled at low level, or high level as required includinginterconnecting flush pjping. Foot rests, cast iron P trap, jointingand sealing materials, 15mm dia stop cock etc. with all otherminor accessories for complete installati
a15400-5
a 4.3.6 Kitchen Sinks
Kitchen sinks shall be stainless steel o{ best quality local make ofcolour and type as approved by the Engineer, single bowl ordouble bowl with integral drain board of at least 1000 x 500 mmsize. ls shall be installed as a complete unit with arrangement oforboth cold and hot water supply, 15 mm c. P mixer for cold and hotwater, approved water inlet connection C.P brass strainer, wasteoutlet pipe, heavy duty cast iron brackets with bolts screws etc.,joints jointing and sealing material etc., with all other minoraccessories required for comolete installation.
4.3.7 Urinals
Urinals shall be vitreous China of apDroved make and size and ofwall hung type either with integral water seal trap or with separatebrass P-Trap. The complete unit shall be.installed including 15mmTee-stop cock, plastic water inlet / outlet connections, CPbrackets, bolts. screws and all internal accessories or CP steelflush pipe. CP steel waste pipe, joints, jointing and sealingmaterials etc with all other minor accessories. White color vitreouschina URINALS Prime quality KARAI\.4CERA or equivalent make.It shall at a minimum consists of 2 Nos. CP T-stoD cock withconnector. "ASIA,/IVIASTER" make with nuts and bolts flushingcistern with PVC connection.
4.3.8 Gas or Electric Water Heaters
Water heater shall be of automatic storage type Electric or Gasoperated including all necessary fitlings for complete installation &operation. The heater shall be of best quality, local make asapproved by the Engineer.
The working and test pressure of the heater to be of 6 bar andbar respectively and shall deliver water at 150'F.lt shallcapable to reach the peak demand, storage capacity.
Heater shall be provided with following accessories.
i) Thermostaticcontrol
10be
iD Temperature & pressure relief value High limil Contro
Other specifications of water heater are as given below:
Inner tank shall be extra heavy gauge anti-rust G.l. sheet metal tohold maximum insjde water pressure. As an insulation, importedgenuine glass wool shall be uged to maintain the desiredtemperature that controls the liting up of the burner. The outerbody shall be made of requisite gauge M.S. sheet shaped into'reinforced circumference. Flow and delivery pipes shall be of highquality G.l. pipes fabricated with heavy gauge anti-rust baffleplate. The thermostat shall be of Robershaw (U.S.A) make. Thbumer shall be made of cast iron with drilled ports. lt shall be
15400-6
o to be detached, Special anti-rust-baked primer-heaw coatedstoved enamel paint with high gloss automotive shine shall beused on sheet metal.
Standard type gas water heaters shall have following specsi
Capacity Inner Tank
'15 gallons G.l. sheet 14-16 swg
30 gallons G.l. sheet 14-16 swg
50 gallons G.l. sheet14 swg
100 gallons G.l. sheet 8-10 swg
Outer body
l\4.S sheet painted 22swg
M.S sheet painted 22swg
M.S sheet painted 22swg
M.S sheet painted 22swg
4,4,12 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER 'W-COOLER"
Electric water cooler will consist of following:
20 gal. Cooling capacity MECO/UNlAlR make electric watercooler l\4odel lvlE-609, Ceramic filter and C.P. tee stop cock withf lexible connector ASIA,/[/ASTER make.
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
4.4.1 Taps and Cocks
All taps and cocks shall be of brass, gun metal or other equallysuitable corrosion resisting alloy conforming to BS 10'10 and shallbe best quality local make. The nominal size specified shall bethe nominal bore of the seating. Washers for hot water and coldwater cocks shall be of specially selected leather, rubberasbestos composition or other equally suitable material. Washersfor hot water cocks shall be of good qualjty fiber, rubber -asbestos composition or other equally suitable material. Everytap/cock shall be tested, complete with its component parts, to ahydraulic pressure of at least '1.96 MPa (284.4 psi) during test itshall neither leak nor sweat.
4.4.2 Floortraps/drains
Floor traps/drains shall be of cast iron or of other anti-corrosivematerial, compatible with the material of pipe. They shall haveminimum water seal of 40 mm and shall be provided wjthremovable metal strainers. The traps shall be of self-clearing type.The open area of the strainer shall be greater than the cross
. section area of the drain line to which it connects. Floor traps shallbe well set in position so that there is no leakage at the jointbetween trao and the floor.
4.4.3 Roof Drains
Roof drains shall be of bitumen coated cast lron compatible withthe material of pipe. They shall have strainers extending at least
4.4
o'15 mm above the roof surface immediately adjacent-to then, iwhen installed on flat part. Bottom of strainer shall be flush with, r r
15400-7 \ , /u\x\.\,1:.u;
the roof surface, when installed on vertical part. Strainer shallhave an available inlet area, above roof level, of not less than 'l-
1l2 times the area of the down-oine to which the drain isconnecled.
The connection between roof and roof drain s- aii be mazewatertight by the use of properflashing material.
4.4.4 Cleanouts
Cleanout shall be of the same nominal size as that of the pipe onwhich it is installed. Cast lron Cleanout shall consist of tappedheavy duty cast iron ferrule caulked into cast iron fitting and heavyduty brass tapered even plug. Cleanout shall consist of either two45" bends or one long radius bend both with an removable endcap and other necessary fittings/material for complete installdtionin floor Cleanouts shall be turned up through floors by long sweep
. fittings, wherever the space so permits. Top finish of cleanoutshall be flush with the floor by means of finished metal platesecured in position and screwed firmly to the plug. Cleanout shallbe so installed that there is a clearance of at least 300 mm forpipes less than 75 mm diameter and at least 457 mm for pipes of75 mm and larger diameter, for the purpose of roding.
Pjpe used with cleanout shall be measured and paid under pipeitem. All other work of ferrule, plug, concrete work, frame andcover etc. shall be measured and paid under cleanout item.
4.4.5 Grease Trap / interceptor
The grease trap shall be of stainless of specified capacity withcover, baffles and strainers to separate grease from watereffectively. The grease trap shall be of approved make orequivalent and installed in the position as shown as drawings oras specifled by the Engineer.
4.4.6 Glass Mirror
The glass mirror shall be of specified size, 5 mm thick, securelyfixed on hard board packing and of best quality Belgium make.The mirror shall be fixed on wall as shown on the drawings or asdirected by the Engineer. All accessories required for completefixing of mirror on wall shall be included in Contractor's scope ofwork.
4.4.7 Towel Rail, Toilet Paper Holder, Soap Trays, Mirror Trays
The towel rail, toilet paper holder, soap trays & mirror trays shallbe of best quality. All accessories for complete installation of towelrail, toilet papers holders, soap tray and mirror tray shall beincluded in the Contractor's scooe of work.
4.4.8 Gullv Trab
Gully trap sha be of cast iron with specified sizs outlet. The inletshall be provided with cast iron, medium duty grating. The openarea of the grating shall be at least 1-112 times the area ofoutlet. The trap shall be of P-Type with a minimum water seql
15400-8
50 mm. lt shall be lnstalled as aworks as shown on relevant details
4.4.9 Cast lron Grating
complete unit including all civiland drawings.
Cast iron grating shall be of the specified size. The specified sizeshall mean the clear span. Cast iron grating shall be complete withframe. They shall be of Lighvmedium duty type to resist no.maltraffic loads, the casting shall be sound and free from all defects.The frame shall be set in place at the time of pouring of concrete.Openings in grating shall be in approved pattern.
4,4.10 BIB COCKTOILET SHOWER
Chrome plated long neck bib cock plus toilet shower shall be maleconnection complete with flexible chain hook ASIAJMASTERmake.
4.4.1't SHOWER
It will at a minimum shall consist of following:2 nos. neck bib cock (master make), 2 nos. concealed stop cocks(master make) and 1 no. shower head
4.4.12 VANITY
White color vitreous china VANITY Prime quality KAMMCERA orequivalent make and 2 Nos. C.P. T-stop cock with connector."ASlA,/lilASTER" make including nuts and bolts.
4.4.13 t\, ltRROR
It shall be clearwithout any waves, 5 mm thick Belgium orequivalent make. Fixed to wall with adjustable clips and screws.The mirror shall be detached from the wall for ventilation fromfeaf.
4.4.14 GRATING
It shall be chromium fixed casted ASIAJ MASTER or equivalentmake.
4.4.15 SOAP DISC
It shall be fine quality plastic make ASIA,/MASTER or equivalentmake as approved by the Engineer.
4,4.16 ELECTRIC HAND DRIER
This shall be approved before installation and shall be of reputedmake. The operation shall be auto for shut off. Provision shall bemade for the installation during the construction stage.
EXECUTION
5.1 GENEML
15400-9
a
The Contractor shall be responsible for his work until its completion andfinal acceptance, and shall replace any of those that may be damaged,lost or stolen without any additional cost.All openings left in floor for passage of lines of water supply,vent. etc. shall be covered and orotected.
soil, waste,
All open ends of pipes shall be properly plugged to prevent any foreignmaterialfrom entering the pipe. Misuse of plumbing Jixtures to be installedunder this Contract is prohibited during the currency of the contract.
All metal fixture trimmings shall be thoroughly covered with non-corrosivegrease which shall be maintained until allwork is completed.
Upon the completion of work, all fixtures- and trimmings shall bethoroughly cleaned, polished and left in first class condition.
Before erection, all pipes, valves, fittings, etc. shall be thoroughly cleanedof oil, grease or other material.
All soecial tools for orooer operation and maintenance of the eouiomentprovided under this Conlract Shall be delivered at no additional cost.
The Contractor shall allow in his bid for cost of all cutting, making holesand subsequent making it good to the desked linish as per approval ofthe Engineer. No separate paym€nt shall be made for this item.
The Contractor shall allow in his bid for the cost of providing protectivepainting or coating as specified in the relevant sections and no claimshall be entertained for this item.
All pipes shall be properly installed as shown on the drawings and/or asdirected by the Engineer, and shall be as straight as possible formingright angles and parallel lines with the walls and other pipelines. Theposition, gradients, alignment and inverts shall be as shown on thedrawings and/or as directed in writing and set out by the Engineer.
The arrangement, positions and connections of pipe fittings andappurtenances shall be as shown on the drawings. The Engineerreserves the right to change the location etc, Special precautions shallbe taken for the installation of concealed pioes as shown on thedrawings and/or as required. Should it be necessary to correct piping soinstalled, the Contractor shall be held liable for any injury caused to otherworks in the correction of piping. The Contractor shall closely coordinatewith other works during the entire stage of execution.
A minimum distance bet\ween different services shall be maintained asshown on the Drawings and/or as approved by the Engineer.
Pipes should be installed in such a manner that minimum distanceshould always be maintained beh/veen pipe and wall, beams, columns,etc. Pipes shall be supported on hangers and braskets as shown on thedrawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Waste-watervent terminalminimize thebuilding.
outlet from each fixture shall be individually trapped. Eachshall extend to the outer air and be so installed as topossibilities of clogging and the return of foul air to the
I15400-10
When the roughing-in is completed, the plumbing system shall besubjected to test prior to concealing the roughing-in, in order to ascertainthat all threads and connections are watertight.
Cast iron soil and drainage fittings for change in direction shall be used asfollows:
*Vertical to horizontal: short sweep or long-turn for diameter 75 mm andlarger; long sweep or extra-long-turn for less than 75 mm. dia.
*Horizontal to vertlcal: quarter bend or short turn.
All fittings with hubs shall be aligned so that the hub faces upstream. Nodrainage or vent piping shall be dril led.
All exterior openings provided for the passage of piping shall be properlysealed with snugly fittlng collars of metal or other approved rodent-proofmaterial securely fastened into place.
Joints at the rool around vent pipes, shall be made water-tight by the useof lead, copper, galvanized iron, or other approved flashing or flashingmaterial. Exteriorwall openings shall be made watertight.
Each length of pipe & each pipe fitting, trap, fixture, & device used in aplumbing system shall have cast, stamped or indelibly marked on it themaker's mark or name, the weight, type & classes of the product, whensuch marking is requlred by the approved standard that applies.
Where different sizes of pipes, or pipes and fiftings are to be connected.the proper size increasers or reducers or reduced fittings shall be usedbetween the two sizes.
Any fitting or connection which has an enlargement, chamber, or recesswith. A ledge, shoulder, or reduction of pipe area that offers anobstruction to flow through the drain pipe is prohibited. The verticaldistance form the fixture outlet to the trap weir shall not exceed 600 mm.Each fixture trap shall have a water seal of not less than 50 mm and notmore than 100 mm.
Full S, bell, crown vented traps and traps/depending for their seal uponthe action of movable oarts are orohibited. No fi{ure shall be doubletrapped. Where fixture comes in contact with wall and floors, the jointshall be water-tight. Piping in ground shall be laid on a firm bed for itsentire length.
Piping in the plumbing system shall be installed without undue strains andstresses. Vertical piping shall be securely held to keep the pipe inalignment and cary the weight of the pipe and contents. Horizontal pipingshall be supported to keep it in alignment and prevent sagging. Hangersbnd anchors shall be of metal of sufficient strength to maintain theirproportional share of pipe alignments and prevent rattling. Hangers andanchors shall be securely attached to the building under construction. ltmusj be clearly understood that the Contractor shall be fully responsiblefor hangers and supports and shall obtain prior approval of design as tothe shape, material, dimensions, spacing etc.
15400-11
Piping in concrete or masonry walls or footings shall be placed orinstalled in sleeves which will permit access to the piping for repair orreplacement.
5.2 G.I. HOT WATER AND COLD WATER PIPES AND FITTINGS
The run and arrangement of all pipes shall be as shown on the Drawingsand as directed during installation. All vertical pipes shall be erectedplumb and shall be parallel to wall and other pipes. All horizontal runs ofpiping shall be kept close to walls. If required to change the location eto.during the currency of the work, the Contractor will do so at no additionalcost. Screwed joints in G.l. pipes shall be made perfectly tight, without theuse of any filler except approved jointing compound or tape. Whereverrequired to make flanged joints, they shall conlorm to BS 10 Table D.
Furnish and install all pipe passing through floors and walls with sleevesof G.l. sheet, 18 gauge, the inside dia. of which shall be at least 1/2"greater than the outside dia of the pipe passing through it. Sleeves inexterior walls and pits shall have anchor flanges and space between pipeand sleeve shall be caulked and sealed watertight. At waterprooflocations, an approved water-proof type pipe sleeve shall be provided.
All embedded water supply piping shall be wrapped with approved anti-corrosion polyethylene tape. All exposed piping shall be painted with twoaoats of enamel oaint over a coat ot red oxide.
Insulation
All hot water supply andherein. Prior to insulationcteaneo.
Nominal PipeDia. (mm)
't5 (1t2\20 (3t4',)25 (1" )32 (1-1t4',)40 (1 -1 t2 ' , )50 (2)65 (2-1t2',)75 (3)
return piping shall be installed as specifiedthe pipes shall be hydraulically tested and
Thickneas of pre form fiber glass pipeinsulation. (mm)
2525252525252525
Insulation shall consists of pre-formed fiberglass pipe insulation, withfactory applied reinforced aluminum vapor barrier, single layer in semi-circular halves, consisting of long, fine glass fibers bounded with atemperature resistance binder, free from shot or coarse fibers, damageresistance , light in weight easy to handle, cut and fit. The product thallcomply with the requirements of B.S. 3958: part 4. the insulation shall berot-proof, odorless non-hygroscopic and shall not sustain vermin. Thefiberglass insulation shall be covered with a layer of approvedpolyethylene tape in the field. Further reinforcement shall be provided bythe use of 20 mm wide soft aluminum bands, generally spaced at 457 mmand on either side of elbows and tees. All butt joints shall be sealed withself-adhesive type of approved quality adhesive tape.
15400-12
All trimmed sections shallself-adhesive tape to formdone in a neat andrecommended prarctice.
NominalDia mm
be secured by wrapping of approveda complete waterproof seal. All workworkmanlike manner, and should
type ofshall be
reflect
All hot water and hot water return lines concealed in walls only, shall beprovided with glass wool blanket insulation.
Pipe work Supports
All supports, clips, steel rods and hangers shall be of mild steel painted.with two coats of approved metallic zinc primer. All clips and bracketsshall be equipped with I mm sectional rubber liners (shore-hardness A40+5 ).
Pipe work supports shall be installed in order to allow free movement dueto expansions and contraction. Supports shall be arranged adjacent tojoints, changes of direction and branches. Each support shall carry theoverall weight of pipe work and water to be borne by it. The intervalsbehreen pipe supports shall not exceed the following:
......... ............M,q.xinymjt[9rv,ei..!9${--e,,e-n.p"|]p"pPl.tp'(m"-e".!9ril.Sieel pipes
Horizontal
10't52025324050
80
1 .72.02.42.72.73.03.4
3.74 .1
Vertical2.O2.42.72 ' 73.53 .94.34.34.6'100
oDimensions of suDport Materials
Nominal Dia Flat iron bandsmm mm
Support rodsmm
LJ-boltsmm
610't0'10
25x3
25x325x340x540x540x550x650x6,50x6
10152025
40506580100
6661010't0
12
Single pipes hung from floor slabs shall be supported on rod hangers.Where h,vo or more piDes are involved a channel or anqle from shall befitted to the underside of slab by two hangers and the pipes shall bgrq\supported from the channel iron byrod hangers and flal iron hands. /r/ . "
\ 'o
15400-13
All hanger rods shall have double nuts and bevel€d washers to allow thehanger rod to swing.
Multiple pipe runs along walls shall be supported on purpose madesubstantial angle and channelframes securely fixed to the wall, floor andceiling as necessary. All pipes shall be arranged to slide on the steelsupports and U-bolts shall be provided to form a rigid guide.
Exposed pipe work shall be supported on channel, angle iron or with U-bolts to form a rigid guide.
All U-bolts, sxcept used as anchors, shall have a pair of nut and washerson each leg with the supporting steel flange clamped tight bet\,veen thepair of nuts to form a rigid guide and allowing the pipe to slide axially,. U-bolts shall be provided on alternate pipe bracketl
Small pipe wqrk running along skirting shall be supported by standardbuilfin or screw-on type clips.
Pipes shall be individually supported. Pipes shall not hung from otherotoes.
Points at which pipes pass through walls, floors, conneotions to plant,equipment and heat emitters, etc. do not constitute points of supports forthe pipes.
Vertical pipes shall be supported at the base or at anchor points towithstand the total weight of the riser, Brackets from risers shall not beused as a means-of support for the riser.
Vjbration isolators to be provided with the hangers as approved by theEngineer.
c,5 PPRC PIPES
5.4 WATER PIPES AND FITTINGS OUTSIDE BUILDING (EXTERNALWORKS)
5.4,1 HANDLING
Pipe and accessories shall be handed in such a manner as to ensuretheir delivery to the trench in sound, un-damaged condition, lf any pipe orfitting is damaged, the repair or replacement shall be made by theContractor at his expenses in a satisfactory manner. No other pipe ormaterial of any kind shall be placed inside of a pipe or fittings. ripe shallbe carried into posltion and not dragged. The interior of pipe andaccessories shali be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before beinglowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during laying operationsby plugging or other approved method. Before installation, the pipe shallbe insoected for defects. l\,4aterial found to be defective before or afterlaying shall be replaced with sound material without additional expense tothe Employer. Rubber gaskets that are not to be installed immediatelyshall be stored in a cool dark place and protected against the direct raysof the sun.
15400-14
o
5,3.2 CUTTING OF PIPE
This shall be done in a neat and workman-like manner without damage tothe pipe. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer or recommendedby the manufacturer, cufting shall be done with a mechanical cufter ofapproved type. Wheel cutters shall be used wherever practicable.
5.3.3 LOCATTON
Where the location of the water pipe is not clearly defined by dimensionson the Drawings, the water pipe shall be located as directed by theEngineer.
5,3.4 DEFLECTION
Maximum allowable deflections from a straight line or grade, as requiredby vertical curves, horizontal curves, or offsets will be 2 degrees unlessotherwise recommended by the manufacturer. lf the alignment requlresdeflections in excess of the specified limitations, special bends or asufficient number of shorter lengths of pipe shall be furnished to provideangular deflections within the limit set forth, as approved.
5.3.5 PLACING AND LAYING
Pipe and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by meansof derrick ropes, belt slings, or other suitable equipment. Under nocircumstances shall any of the water line materials be dropped or dumpedinto the trench. Care shall be taken to avoid abrasion of the pipe coating.Poles used as levers shall be of wood and shall have broad flat faces toprevent damage to the pipe. Except where necessary in makingconnections with other lines or authorized by the Engineer pipe shall belajd with the bells facing in the direction of laying. The full length of eachsection of pipe shall rest solidly upon the pipe bed, with recessesexcavated to accommodate bell coupling and joints. Pipe that has thegrade or the ioint disturbed after laying shall be taken out and re-laid.
. Pipe shall not be laid in water shall be kept out of the trench until thematerials in the joints have hardened or until caulking or jointing iscompleted. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe, fiftings, andvalves shall be securely closed so that no trench water, earth, or othersubstances will enter the pipes or fittings. Where any part of a coating orlining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at hisexpense in a satisfactory manner. Pipes shall be installed in accordancewith recommendations of the pipe manufacturer. Pipe ends left for futureconnections shall be valved, plugged or capped, and anchored, as shownor as directed, where connections shall be made by using specials andfittings to suit the actual conditions.
5.3.6 JOtNTtNG
The joints shall be in accordance with the recommendations of themanufacturer or as approved by the Engineer. Connections betweendifferent types of pipes and accessoriea shall be made with transitionfittings where reoommended by the pipe manufacturer.
Service connections shall be made as indicated and in accordance withthe recommendations ofthe oiDe manufacturer.
o15400-15
O
5.3.7 THRUST BLOCKS
Plugs, caps, tees, bends and fire hydrants shall be provided with concretethrust blocks. Backing shall be placed between solid ground and thehydrant or fitting to be anchored. The area of bearing shall be as shownon the Drawings. The backing shall be so placed that fitting joints shall beaccessible for repair. The concrete shall be class C plain cementconcrete.
5.3.8 PIPE BEDDING
Fine sand as pipe bedding material shall be used for bedding of pipesand fittings. The sand shall be free from clay, site, salts, organicimpurities and debris. Approval of pipe bedding materials shall beobtained from the Engine.er prior to placing
5.3,9 FLUSHING
The Contractor shall provide facilities for flushing the line. Water forflushing the line shall be arranged by the Contractor. Flushing of line shallbe done section by section. For each valved section of pipeline theContractor shall make a temporary hose connection between the walerpipeline and the pipeline under test. Water shall be pumped into thesection flushed. Other arrangements for storing and pumping of watershall be subject to the approval of Engineer. Due precautions shall betaken by the Contractor for the disposal of water. The pipeline shall beflushed by keeping all the branching pipes open. Flushing shall becontinued until clean water starts flowing through the other end. Sectionby section, the entire pipeline shall be flushed at a minimum flushingvelocity of 2.5 ft./sec.
5.3.'10 PIPELINE DISINFECTION
The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labour and material for theproper disinfection of the pipeline. Disinfeotion shall be accomplished bychlorination after the lines have been tested for leakage but before theyhave been connected to the main system. Disinfections of the pipelinesshall be done in the presence of the Engineer representative withequipment approved by him.
Chlorination A chlorine and water mixture shall be supplied by means ofa solution feed chlorlnation device. The chlorine solution shall be aopliedat one end of the pipeline through a trap, in such a manner that as thepipeline is filled with water, the dosage applied to the water entering thepipe shall be atleast (25 p.p.m) or enough to meet the requirements givenhereinafter.
Retention Period Chlorination water shall be retained in the pipeline for aperiod of at least 24 hours. After the chlorine treated water has beenretained for the required time, the chlorine residual at the pipe extremitiesand at such other representative points ghall be at least 10 parts permillion. This procedure shall be repeated until the required residualchlorine concentration is obtained.
Chlorination of Valves During the process of chlorination the pipeline, allvalves or other appurtenances shall e operated while the pipeline is filledwith the heavilv chlorinated Water.
FINAL FLUSHING
Following complete disinfection of the pipeline, all treated water shallroughly flushed from the pipeline at its extremities. Treated water
15400-16
5.4
water used for flushing the pipelines shall be disposed of in a mannerinstructed by the Engineer. Fresh treated water shall be filled in the lineand water tested from presence of coliform. The test result shouldindicate negative coliform presence. lf the test indicates any positivecoliform, the entire process of disinfection shall be repeated or improveduoon until coliform free samoles are obtained.
5.3..I2 SAMPLING AND TESTING
Disinfection of the pipeline and appurtenances shall be the responsibilityof the Contractor. The first set of samples will be collected for analysis bythe Engineer. Should the samples reveal presence of coliform theContractor shall again disinfect the pipeline and appurtenances at noextra cost to the Employer for sampling and testing for subsequent retests
. until coliform free samples are obtained. The charges for re-sampling andretesting shall be recovered from the Contractor.
5.3.13 CLEAN-UP
Upon completion of the installation of the water supply lines, distributionsystem and appurtenances, all debris and surplus materlals resulting fromthe work will be removed and disposed off in a manner satisfactory to theEngineer.
SOIL, WASTE, VENT & RAIN WATER DMINAGE PIPES & PIPEFITTINGS
All cast iron soil pipes and fiftings shall be installed to the lines andgrades shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Whenrequired to be installed above ground floor level, suitable and substantialnumber of hangers and supports of approved type and make shall beprovided. No piping shall be hung from the piping of other systems.Clamos shall be orovided on not more than 1.5 meter centres or aminimum of one hanger per each length of pipe whichever is smaller.Where excessive numbers of fittings are installed, additional clamps willbe provided.
All steel clamps, hangers and support etc, shall be given one coat of redoxide primer and t\wo coats of synthetic enamel paint. All exposed C.l.soiyvent pipes shall be given two coats of synthetic enamel paint.l\4aterials for painting shall be high quality product of well-knownmanufacturer and will be approved by the Engineer before using. Theinstructions of the manufacturer regarding all painting work shall strictlybe adhered to Pipes passing through walls, floors, etc. shall be providedwith sleeves of approved design. All vent pipes to be installed in thesystem shall be provided with approved cowl and will rise at least 0.70meter above the roof.
Caulked joints for cast iron bell-and-spigot soil pipe shall be firmly packedwith oakum or kemp and filled with molten lead not less than 22 mm deepand not to extend more than 3 mm below the rlm of the hub. Rubber ringjoints shall also be allowed. No paint, varnish, or other coatings shall bepermifted on the jointing material unit after the joint has been tested andaooroved
Pipes passing through walls, floors, etc. shall be provided with sleeves of
provided with approved cowl and will rise aroof.
15400-17
DELIVERY CONDITIONS
The internal and external surfaces of pipes and fittings shall be smoothand free from grooving, blistering and any other surface defect. Thematerials shall not contain visible impurities or pores, Pipe ends shall becleanly cut, and the ends of pipes and tittings shall be square with theaxis of the pioe
IV]ARKINGS
Pipes, fittings and sealing rings shall be marked clearly and indelibly sothat legibility is maintained for the life of products under normalconditions of storage, weather and use.
fhe markings may be integral with the product or on a label. Themarkings shall not damage the product.
PIPES
Pipes shall be marked with at least the following information:
Manufacturer's name or trade marklPioe material:Nominal diameter of pipe;Nominal wall thickness of pipeManufacturing information, in plain text or in code, providingtractability of the production period to within the year andmonth and the productlon site if the manufacturer is producingat several national or international sitesThe number of this lnternational Standard.
Pipes with a nominal laying length up to and including z, meters shallbe marked with at least once. Pipes with a nominal laying lengthgreater than 22 meters shall be marked at intervals of 23 meters atthe most. The values of z2 and 4 shall be as specified by theauthorities in each country.
Fittings
Fittings shall be marked with at least the following information:
I\,4anufactureas name or trade mark:Fitting material (may be given on packing only in the case ofPVC, provided this information is not required on each articleby national authorities);Nominal diameter of fitting;Classification (where applicable)Values of angles, if any;Manufacturing information, in plain text or in code, providingtractability of the production period to within the year andmonth and the production site if the manufacturer isproducing at several national or international sites (may begiven on packing only, provided this information is notrequired on each article by national authorities);The number of this International Standard (may be given on
a.b .c.d .e .
L
c.o .e.f.
a.b .
s.packing only, provided this informaeach article by national authorities
15400-18
required on
6. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
6.,1 G.I. HOT WATER AND COLD WATER PIPES
All water distribution system shall be tested whole or in part to 2 times theworking pressure with a minimum test pressure of 100psi. The contractorshall pay for all device, materials, supplies, labor and power required forthe test. The test will be run for two hours at the specified pressure andthere should be not leakage in the system. Defects revealed by the testshall be repaired and the whole lest rerun until the system proves to besatisfactory.
After all the pipes and fixtures have been properly laid and tested, theyshall be flushed clean with water and then disinfected with water solutionof chlorine of at least 50 ppm strength for a contact period of 6 hours. Thesystem will be finally flushed with clean water.
6.2 SOIL. WASTE. VENT & RAIN WATER DMINAGE PIPES & PIPEFITTINGS
The entire system of drains, waste, and vent piping inside the buildingshall be tested by this Contractor under a water test. Every portion of thesystem shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure equivalent to at least 3-meter head of water. After filling this Contractor shall shut off water supplyand shall allow it to stand two hours, under test during which time thereshall be no loss or leakage.
The Contractor shall fumish and pay for all devices, materials, supplies,labor and oower required in connection with all tests. All tests shall bemade in the presence of and to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.
The contractor shall also be responsible for the repair ;f this work & otnertrades work that may be damaged or disturbed by the tests. Defectsdisclosed by the tests repaired. Work shall be replaced with new workwithout extra cost to the Employer. Tests shall be repeated as directed,until all work is proven satisfactory.
All fixtures shall be tested for soundness, stability, support and satisfactoryoDeration.
o
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
7.1 COLD & HOT WATER PIPES & FITTINGS
7.1.1 Measurement
Measurement for acceptably completed works of supply and installationof cold and hot water pipes shall be in running FEET length.
ln building works, no measurement shall be made for earthworks, pipefittings, jointing, hangers, clamps, brackets, sleeves, insulation, cuftingand breaking concrete and then making it good, applying protectivepainting, coating, cleaning, testing and disinfecting etc. and themeasurement will be for the full work specified herein.
o15400-19
o. In external works, no measurement shall be made for pipe fittings,jointing, insulation, cutting and breaking concrete and then making itgood, applying protective painting, coating, cleaning, flushing, testing anddisinfecting etc. and the measurement will be for the full work specifiedherein. However, earthworks (excavation, backfilling, sand bedding), andthrust blocks shall be paid separately as specified in Bill of Quantities.
7.1 .2 Payment
Payment for acceptable measured quantity will be made at theunit rate per running FEET length of cold and hot water pipesquoted in the Bill of Quantities. The amount bid shall be the fullpayment for completion of the work in all respects as specifiednerern.
C.I. SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPES
7.2.1 MEASUREMENT
Measurement for acceptably completed works of supply andinstallatjon of C.l. pipes, will be in running FEET length and thework to be done shall include all pipe fittings, jointing, hangers,clamps, brackets, sleeves, cutting and breaking concrete and thenmaking lt good, applying protective painting coating, cleaning andresrng.
7.2.2 Payment
Payment wil l be made at the unit rate of bid per running FEETlength of pipe acceptably supplied and installed. The amount bidshall be full payment forthe work specified herein.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
7.3.1 MeasurementMeasurement for plumbing fixtures will be made as per actualnumber acceptably installed. The Contractoas bid against these
. items shall include installation of complete unit as specified herein,inclusive of all work from inlet connection of water supply to outletconnection with the sanitary system, complete as per ContractDocuments and/or as directed bv the Enoineer.
7.3.2 Payment
Payment for plumbing fixtures shall be made at the applicable unitprice per number bid for the respective item in the Bill ofQuantities. The amount bid shall be full payment for thespecified herein.
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
7.4.1 Measurement
Measurement for acceptably completed works of floor drains,drains, cleanouts, glass mirror, towel rail, toilet paper holder, soaptrays, mirror trays, water coolers, water heaters, flexible watertanks etc. shall be made on the basis of actual number acceptablyinstalled in position. The Contractor's bid against these items shallinclude installation comolete as soecified herein and/or as shownon the Drawings.
O
7.4
)i".:=.ij'
7.4.2 Payment
15400-20
tPayment for acceptably measured quantity of floor drains, roofdrains, cleanouts, glass mirrors, towel rails, toilet paper holders,soap trays, mirror trays electric water coolers, water heaters,flexible water tanks etc. shall be made at the applicable unit rateper number quotod in the Bill of Quantities, The bid amount shallbe full payment for the works specified herein and as shown onthe Drawings.
t
a
e15400-21
t sEcTtoN - 15440
PLUMBING PUMPS
SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be done under this section of the specifications includes furnishingall plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing alloperations required in connection with the installation of pumping machineryincluding ail accessories as specified herein or shown on the Drawings or asdirected by the Engineer.
MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
Materials and machinery shall conform to the latest referenced specifications andother provisions specified herein and shall be new and unused, in case wheremanufacturers are specified, material and equipment will be of the samemanufacturers. In all other cases the Contractor shall submit the names andaddresses of the lvlanufacturers and trade names of the materials and eouiomentthat he intends to buy. Other information such as diagram, drawing anddescriptive data wlll be supplied if so desired by the Engineer. Approval ofmaterials and all the machinery under this provision shall not be construed asauthorising any deviations from the specifications. The approval of machinery ofmanufacturer other than specified will be purely on the discretion ofthe Engineer.The Engineer will fully ascertain the facts and satisfy himself as to theperformance of the machinery offered by the Contractor.
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS OF PUMPS
The Contractor shall furnish with each pump properly identified characteristiccurves prepared and certified by the manufacturer showing capacity, head,efficiency and brake horsepower throughout the entire range of the pump.
The pumps shall stable throftling curves and be suitable for unrestricted paralleloperation. The pumps and their drives shall not overload or trip when operatingagarns( zero pressure.
The design, construction and materials shall be such that damage as a result ofcavitation is completely eliminated.
Pumps shall have bearings and be suitable for continuous as well as intermittentoperation without external seating or cooling water.
The pumps shall be such that they shall come into operation at once after aprolonged shutdown period without having to take special measures,
Pumps shall be capable of delivering specified quantity of water at the specifiedpressure. Pumps shall be tested at site before their final acceptance.
Pumps shall be installed at positions shown on the Drawings and/or as directedthe Engineer.
Pumps and their drives shall be in perfect alignment when installed in position.
The centrifugal water pump shall be complete with pump. frame, CC foundatiorstarters suitable specify electric motor, discharged a! connection withvalves and accessories as per typical connection
1 .
J .
a
J.'o drawngs.
15500-1
n on the
The pump shall be suitable for quiet and continuous operation at actual head anddischarge, the pump shall be closed coupled type, single stage, cast iron bodyand imDeller.
The casing and bearing housing shall be of cast iron, highest point in the casingshould be provided with air vent and lowest point should be provided with drajnptug.
The shaft seals shall be mechanical seal type.
The impeller, impeller guide, glands, stuffing box ring,of cast iron.
The shaft shall be of steel, turned and ground.
The bearing frame assembly of the pump should be fitted with non-graspable ballbearing equivalent to electric motor's bearing standard.
The pump and motor shall be mounted on a common base plate of heavystructuralsteel.
The pump casing shall be designed to withstand a discharge head specified plusthe static head on system plus 50% of total head, but not less 10 Bars.
and shaft sleeve shall be
suitable starters andThe electric motors shall be drip proof type provided withtotally enclosed. Fan cooled type, with overload protection.
The pumps shall be non-overloading at any point on the characteristic curve.
The flexible connection shall be provided on discharge of the pump.
Electric motor shall have Class "F'insulation for high ambient temperature.
4. PUMP AND MOTOR
4.1 POTABLE WATER PUMP & MOTOR
4.1.'J Specjfications
I
The pump sets will consist of close coupled, horizontal, centrifugalpumps of specified capacity and head and duty and shall behorizontally mounted, totally enclosed, fan cooled, squirrel cageinduction motors of specified power.
Pump material sirall be as under:15500-2
I Body Fine grained grey cast iron.impeller BronzeShaft Bronze or stainless steel
Pumps shall have mechanical seal. The suction and dischargeflanges shall be rated tor a working pressure of 10 kg/cm'zforpotable water pumps. The flanges shall be drilled to BS 19 (Table'D' or 'E') or BS 4504.
Motors shall run on 3-phasg,400 volts +'l0olo,50 cis A/C powermotors shall be protected from low voltage, overload, andoverheating and phase failure.
4.'1.2 Installation
Potable watdr pumps and motors shall be installed on concretefoundation wlth anchor bolts.
4.'1.3 Ooeration
For potable water pumps, one pump shall be duty and one shallbe standby. Duty shall however change between the pumps oneach starustop/cycle of the pump.
Operation of potable water pumps shall be controlled by waterlevel indicalors provided on the roof tank of the building.
- Duty pumps shall automatically start, when the water levelreaches the low water level-'l (L.W.L-1)
- Duty pumps shall automatically stop when th9 water levelreaches high water level (H.W.L).
- ln case the duty pump fails to start, the stand by pump shallstart automatically at lowest water level-2 (L.W.L.-2).
- In case the stand by pump also fails to start, the emergencyalarm will be automatlcallv sounded.
ACCESSORIES
5.'l Pressure Gauge
Pressure gauge shall be of copper alloy, bourdon tube type with 100 mmdiameter dial face. The dial shall be engraved in black on whitebackground from zero to 6 bars or 1.5 times the working pressurewhichever is larger. Gauge shall be installed socket welded to the pipelinewith the isolating plug/ball valve. Gauge shall be installed no higher than1.8 M above the finished floor. lf the oioeline installation is such that theabove requirement can not be met pressure gauge of remote readingtype shall be installed.
5.2 Y-Strainers., Strainers shall.be 'Y' types with bronze body
75mm diameter Screen shall be of 20 mesh mo
o15500-3
and threaded ends upto
6.
Strainers above 75 mm shall have Cast lron body with flanged ends:Screen Cover shall be provided with blow off tapping. Screen shall be ofperfgrated stainless steel.
36 holes per Sq.Cm., with 1.14 mm diameter and 0.5 mm thick. Allslralners for water supply application shall be suitable for 10.5k9/Crn2and 120 degree C. All strainers for fire protection service shall be suitablefor 21 Kg/Cm2 and '120 degree C.
5.3 . Foot Valve for Pumps
Shall be installed on the suction Line of the pumps where required orindicated on the drawing. Foot valve shall be of brass, and shall beprovided with integral strainer. Foot valve shall be provided with a springloaded vertical check disc with gasket for tight shuGoff.
MOTOR PROTECTION
Motors of 3kw or less power shall be started direct on line. Larger motors shall bestarted by Star-Delta Starter.
l\4otor shall be protected against under voltage over voltage overload, over-heating and phase failure.
l\.4otor shall be rated for normal operation against a voltage fluctuation of + 10%and frequency fluctualion +2H2.
7. MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
Refer to relevant electrical specifications and drawings.
8. MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND TOOLS
8.1 A book or books containing the complete information in connection withthe assembly operation, lubrication, adjustment and repair of the pumpingequipment, electric motor, together with the detailed parts list with thedrawings or photographs shall be furnished in duplicate.
For the pumping station, special tools necessary for maintenance andrepair of the pumps and electric motors including tools kits, grease gunsetc. with accessories shall be furnished.
The equipment to be supplied for the pumping station shall be providedwith spare parts necessary to the operational and maintenance for 'l year.
The manufacturefs recommended list of spare parts to be stocked by theAuthority shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer forapproval. Such spare parts will also be furnished by the Contractor.
All the maintonance manuals, tools, spare parts etc., shall be supplied bythe Contractor at no cost of the Authority and all cost shall be deemedincluded by the Contractor in his bid against item of pumping set.
15500-4
8.2
8.3
8.4
o
o MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
9.1 Pumping Machinery
9.1.1 Measurement
Measurement for payment of pumping machinery shall be theactual number of pumping sets acceptable provided and installedin position; the Contractor's bid against this item shall include costof providjng and installing the pumping machinery, including thepumps, electric motors, all accessories, manuals, tools, spareparts, etc. as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, or in.BOQ or as directed by the Engineer.
9.1.2 Payment
Payment for pumping machine shall be made at the applicableunit rate per pumping set bjd in the Bill of Quantities. The amountbid shall be full payment forthe work specified.
O
a
o15500-5
2.
I
sEcTtoN - 15500
SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM
SCOPE
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of soil, waste and vent systemincluding, laying of pipe, jointing, cutting, excavation, backfilling as specified hereinand as shown on drawings and as per instruction of Engineer.
MATERIAL
a. Cast lron Spun Pipes
All horizontal drainage piping should be installed in practical alignment ata uniform downstream slope 1:40 for pipes 4" and smaller and 1:'100 forlarge pipes. Vent piping should be installed in practical alignment andsloped up works continuously from the lowest connection with soil orwaste piping to its termination in the atmosphere above the building roof.
All underground soil, waste snd vent fittings should be of "Y" type, longbend. 135o bends or as shown on the drawings.
Cast lron Spun pipes confirming to British Standard Specifications No. 85416 of1973 for soil, waste and vent system. Only Cl spun fitting and specials will be used.
b. UPVC Pipes
3. INSTALLATION
I
o
i i .
t , All underground pipes should be laid on a firm natural bed of earth for itsentire length, clean earth, sand or screened gravel should be placedunder, around and above the piping to at least 1 ft above it, and com-pacted carefully. Thereafter excavated earth should not be allowed intrench as backfill material.
iv. All horizontal soil and waste piping should be provided with cleanouts/plug as required for rodding. An accessible clean out should beprovided at the base of the soil and waste stack
All supports and hangers will be provided and installed as perrecommendation gf pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
The lubricant sealant as recomm;nded by the pipe manufacturer will beusedi
15500-1
1 .
sEcTtoN - 15600
SEWERAGE SYSTEM
SCOPE
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of sewerage system including, layingof pipes, excavation, backfilling and construction of manholes specitied herein: asshown on drawings and as per inslruction of Engineer ln charge.
The work to be done under this section of the Specifications consists of providing allmaterial, labour, equipment and appliances and in performing all operations includingearthwork, concrete, block masonry, plaster, fixing manhole cover and frame, makingholes etc. in connection with proper installation of miscellanegus sewerappurtenances i.e. manholes, grease traps, gully traps etc. complete in strictaccordance with this section of the Specifications and the drawings, and subject tothe terms and conditions of the Contract. All sewer appurtenances shall be placed atlocations on lines and levels as shown in the drawings and as directed by theEngineer.
MATERIAL AND INSTALLATION
R.C.C. pipes shall conform to B.S.S. 556(1955).
Th; jointing of R.C.C pipes with collars shall be done first with tat cloth(dipped in silicon cement) fitted behiveen the ends of the pipes andpressed together. the width. of the cloth shall not be less than 4" or asdirected by the Engineer. The collar shall than be brought in the middle ofthe joint, wooden wedges shall be placed at h,vo or three places aroundthe pipe for pressing together. At a time five or six pipes shall be jointedtogether. After putting hemp rope suitable jacks and wedges or any otheraooroved melhod shall be used. The inside of the collar and the outsideportion of the collar and outside portion of the pipe shall be cleaned withbrush and cement mortar of 1.1 proportion shall then be inserted fromboth end of the collar. The mortar containing as little quantity of water aspossible shall be carefully inserted on the joints and tightly pressed withcaulked tool. The mortar shall be finished off on the outside at an angle of45 degrees. The wooden wedges shall be carefully removed. The jointsshall be protected from weather and maintained wet for at least ten daysand shall not be covered with back fill until the joints have beenand approval given by Engineer.
MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS
The size of manholes and chambers shall be according to the drawias directed.
t .
t .
a
ii. Brick work to manholes and chambers shall be carried out with cementmortar ('l:3). The mortar shall be raked out at the joints as the workproceeds. The brick work shall be plastered with water proof cementplaster (1:3) 3/4" thick and finished smooth with cement from inside andflush pointed from outside.
iii. The sizes of the manholes and chambers shall be the inside dimensions.
iv. Malrfloles covers shall be 4'thick R.C.C. with standard weight CME make18ll cast iron cover as shown on the drawing or as directed by
iEngineer Incharge.' 15700-1
vi.
All C.Ul\,'lS. covers steps, and grating shall be painted with lhree coats ofbitumaster Daint.
The inverts and benchings shall be properly shaped to the forms anddimensions shown and shall be rendered with two coats of granolithicconcrete and brought upto a smooth face to the forms and gradientsindicated on the drawings. Steps shall be provided when depths exceed 1m from ground level to benching.
Unless otheMise indicated on the drawings, every manholes shall beprovided with a cast iron frame and cover of dimensions shown on thedrawtngs.
All manhole covers shall be true to pattern in form and dimensions, freefrom faults, cracks and other defects affecting their strength. The covershall have a continuous and even bearing on the frame, and shall beproperly set to avoid knocking. All inequalities, projections or roughnesson abutting surfaces of the cover and the frame shall be removed, andthe cover fitted into the frame as neatly as possible without jamming.
4. GULLY TRAP
Glazed ware gully trap with chamber and Cl cover shall be used on the wastesystem from the sewer as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. ltshall be 75mm water seal.
5. SEPTIC TANKSeptic Tank shall be constructed in brick or concrete as per drawings. Thespecification for brick construction shall be as given in Civil Works section 04100 andthatfor concrete as given in section 03300
o15'700-2
sEcTtoN - 15700
BORING / DRILLING & INSTALLATION OF WELLS
1 .
4-
2.
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of furnishing all materials, plant, equipment and labourand performing all operations in connection wjth furnishing, water divining, boringdrilling, development complete in place and in strict accordance with theseStandard Specifications, the Drawings, Special Provisions or as directed by theEngineer.
The Contractor shall furnish the bore in accordance with an itemized list, whichwill be furnished to the Engineer, showing the number and lengths of the bore.
After the borehole has reached its final stipulated positions, after the sampleshave been taken out, as required by the Engineer and the borehole has beencompletely cleaned ol all loose matter and otherwise made ready to receive thereinforcement and thereafter the concrete, the contractor shall so inform theEngineer.
Material requirements
Material shall be of Steel, wood, metal or other approved materials and shall befree from faults such as corrosion, decay and time dependent erosion etc. Thematerial should be of sufficient rigidity to prevent ffom defects due to the drillingeffect and other loads incident to the construction operations.
Borehole Design and Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare working drawings and furnish material data for theBorehole along with auxiliary equipment to be submitted to the Engineer foraooroval unless otherwise directed.
Borehole Construction
Borehole shall be constructed and maintained so as to prevent damage andleakage of pipe joints due to the drilling and shall be true to the dimensions, andgrades of the material with the sufficient strength, rigidity, shape so as to leavethe finished works true to the dimensions shown on drawings or required byEngineer and with the installation finish as specified.
Borehole pipes of exposed surfaces shall preferably be painted with appaints, or may with the Engineer's permission, be of uniform thickness.pipes shall be smoothed at all sharp corners and shall be given rounded surfain the case of all projections, to ensure easy maintenance and removal.
Fasteners condisting of bolts, clamps or other devices shall be used asnecessary. The use of ties consisting of twisted wire loops to hold bolts inposition will be permitted after getting approval from the Engineer. Metal liesanchorage within. the pipes shall be so installed as to permit their maintenawithout iljury to the borehole.' 15700-1
a
O The inside surfaces of pipes shall be cleaned of all dirt, mortar and foreignmaterial. Pipes whioh will later be removed shall be thoroughly coated with formoil prior to use. The form oil shall be of a good quality or other approved coatingwhich will permit the ready release of the pipes.
Soil and earth shall not be deposited on the pipes until all work in connection withconstructing the borehole has been completed, all materials required to beembedded in the concrete have been placed for the unit to be poured, and theEngineer has inspected and approved the borehole and materials.
The shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness, and surface smoothness of usedpipes shall be maintained at all times. Any warped or bulged portion must beresized and reshaped before being reused. Pipes that are unsatisfactory in anyresoect shall not be used.
Inspection
Borehole will be inspected at the installation site. The Contractor shall notify theEngineer when materials have been delivered to the site and shall give theEngineer at least ten (10) days' notice before commencing the drilling operation.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer. a copy of all mill orders, certified milltest reports and a Certificate of Compliance for all structural sieel to be used inthe work other than steel which is to be used under the provisions as"Unidentmed Stock Material". Certified mill test reoorts for steels with specificimpact values shall include, in addition other test results, the results of Charpy V-notch impact tests. Certified mill test reports and Certificates of Compliance shallbe furnished prior to siart of drilling. The Certiflcates of Compliance shall besigned by the manufacturer and shall certify to the Engineer the specifications towhich the material has been manufactured and tested, and that the material is inconformance with the said specifications and test requirements.
Material to be used shall be made avaihble to the Engineer so that the eachpiece can be examined. The Engineer shall have free access at all times to anyportion of the site where said material is stored or where work on said material isbeing performed.
Development of W€ll
The development of well shall be for a specified time as indicated by theEngineer. The Contractor shall furnish all equipmenl for the development of wel..
Testing and Commissioning ofwell
The testing & commissionjng shall be for a period of at least 72 hours. TContractor shall furnish all equipment for the testing and commissioning.
6.
8. Equipment and Agc6ssories
The bore pipe casing -shall be PVC 5 mm thick with PVC micro strainer at lower10 meter depth or as specified in the water diviner/ testing report or as showndrawings and as approved by the Engineer. The pump/ motor shall be of repumake KSB or equivalent. lt shall be provided with motor control unit and ot
15700-2
*-ti-h---
Oaccessories as indicated in the bill of quantities. The specifications of G.l. pipesshall be as given in water supply.
Measurement and Payment
The quantity to be paid for, shall be the calculated theoretical number ofkilograms of different shapes of members.
The items to be paid shall include erection and installation with protective coating(painting). The measurement shall be the total weight of the finished membercomprising pipes, rolled sections, shear connectors, stiffeners, splice plates andall incidentals, necessary to complete the item, without allowance for tolerancefor rolling margin and other permissible deviations from standard weights, andincluding the weights of welds, fillets, bolts, nuts, washers and protectivecoatings. No deductions shall be made for notches, holes and the like each lessthan 0.01 square meter measured in areas.
9.
I
a
o15700-3
sEcTloN - t5990
TESTING OF WATER TANKS
t. scoPE
The work under this section of the specifications includes furnishing all labour,plant, equipment, appliances and materials by the Contractor and performing alloperations in connection with testing of water tank for imperviousness, completein strict accordance with this section of the specifications, the applic€bledrawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract The scop€ ofthis section of specification is cavered with detailed specification as laid downneretn.
2. TESTS
2.1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer/Engineer's Representative inadvance of making the imperviousness test, so that arrangement may bemade for their presence to witness the test
2.2 The Contractor shall furnish and pay for all devices, material, supplies,labour required for alltest.
2.3 The Contractor shall fill the water tank with water for a period of sevendays After expiry of this period, the Contractor shall record the level of thesurface of water and further observations be recorded at intervals of 24hours for seven days. The permissible drop in the surface level of tankdue to absorption and evaporation shall be decided by the Engineer. lfthe total drop in the surface level does not exceed 12mm (1/2 inch) inseven days, the water tank may be deemed to be water tight.
When the water tank does not satisfy the conditions of the test, and thedaily drop in water level continues, the period of test may be extended forfurther seven days observation and if. the specified limits is then reachedthe structure may be considered as satisfactory.
2.4 All test shall be made in the Dresence and to the satisfaction of theEngineer/Engineer's Representative.
During the test the outside surface of tank shall be inspected by theEngineer for any leakage and wet patches.
lf during the test the tank is found leaking the Contractor would suggest tothe Engineer necessary remedial measures which will be carried by theContractor at his own cost after approval by the Engineer.
Approval by the Engineer will not relleve theobligation of making the tank tight.
Contractor of his contractual
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
2.5
2.6
2.7
lvleasurement
JMeasulement of acceptably completed works of testing of water tankbe made on job basis including all devices, materials, supplies and la
3 .1
15990-1
required for testing of water tank, water used for testing of water tank, allremedial measures to make the reservoir water-tight, etc complete.
Payment
Payment will be made for acceptably completed job of testing anddisinfection of reservoir on lump sum basis quoted in the Bills of Quantitiesand shall constitute full compensation for all the works related to the item
15990-2
1-
sEcTroN - 16010
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of thid contract covers all operation and activities required forconstruction ofthe works related to the Electricalthat are included in the scope ofthis Contract are shown on the Tender Drawings, stated in the Bill of Quantitiesand explained in these Specifications. All the equipment & allied accessories andtheir installation shall also comply with General Specifications described here-under. with other rclevant Drovisions oI Tender Document and other utilities'latest Specifications/Standards. Electrical & Communication systems shallbroadiy include but not limited to the following:
- Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Lighting fixtures/Ceilingfans
- Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the Low Voltage Singlecore/multicore PVC/PVC & PVC/SWAJPVC Copper conductor cables.
- Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the Earthing of Electricalsystem and grounding of atmospheric electric charge.
The Contractor shall submit shop drawing to The Engineer for his approval priorto start any activity/work.
The scope shall include the continuing oithe contractor to remain responsible forremoval of defects detected in the works and for achieving satisfactoryoperation/functioning/service of the works during defect liability period.
The contract shall include furnishing of all construction equipment, tools, labour,supervisory stafi plants, transport, power, testing apparatus/arrangements andall construction materials as shall be required for gatisfactory cornpletion of worksstrictly in accordance wlth the Technical Specifications and Bill of Quantitiesforming part of these Tender Documents and as per levels and dimensions asshown on the drawings Supplied with these tender documents and in drawingswhich may be supplied by the Employer from time to time under approvedvariation orders.
The Contractor shall also be responsible to supply any other equipment notspecifically mentioned in these Documents but which is necessary for properoperation of the works/ system included in the scope of this Contract. TheContractor shall solely be responsible for ensuring proper functionalrequirements of various equipments. He shall also be responsible for furnishingany additional piece of equipment and for making modiflcation in the equipmentas desired and/or approved by the Project l\,4anager to achieve proper co-ordination with various other equipment's offered in the bid and also with thoseinstalled by others.
a
16600-1
2. RULES & REGULATIONS
The entire Electrical & Communication systems installation/work shall be carriedout by licensed Contractor, authorized to undertake such work under Xheprovisions of the Electricity Act 1910 and The Electricity Rules 1937 as adoptedand modified upto date by the Government of Pakistan.
All works shall be canied out in accordance with the latest edition of XheRegulations oi the Electrical Equipment of Buildings issued by the lnstitute ofElectrical Engineers-London, 16'edition, NEC 1999, the Contract Documents,the Electricity Rules 1937 dnd bye]aws that are in force from time to time.
Any discrepancy between these specifications and the standards/ regulationsshall be brought to the notice of Project Managerfor his instructions and decisiono the Project Manager shall be final and conclusive,
The Contractor shall be responsible completing allformalities and submitting thetear certificates as per prevailing rules and regulations, and shall have theinstallation passed by the Government Electric Inspector of that region. Alliequirements of the Electtic Inspeclor and the utilily company shall be compliedwith.
MARKINGS
The Contractor shall provide "Danger Boards" and "Shock Charts", whereverrequired, to comply with the requirements of local Electricity Rules and accordingto normal practice.
STANDARDS
:fhe latest standards and codes of reputable organizations shall be applicable forthe material and equipment specified herein and for installation work. Suchorganizations shall be British Standard Institution (BSS), International Electrotechnical Commission (lEC), IEEE and NEC. In case the Specifications laid downherein differ from those given in the standards, then the better specifications shallgovern. Wherever applicable, the equipment shall also conform to therequirements of Pakistan Standards lnstitute (PSl).
PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING
All equipment shall be boxed, crated or othewise enclosed and protected duringshipment, handling, storage and after installation until final acceptance of theequipment. Electrical materials shall be delivered in manufacture/s originalcartons or containers with seals intact, as applicable. Large multi-componentassemblies shall be delivered in sections that facilitate field handlinq andinstallation.
Unless designed for outdoorand covered from -exposurehaving anti-friction or sleeve
use, all equipment shall be kept dry, off the groundto weather. Electrical equipment and equipmentbearings shall be stored in
4.
16600-2
r tight storage
facilities. Heaters in equipment shall be connected and operated until theequipment is placed in operation. The Contractor shall prevent corrosion,contamination or deterioration of stored eouioment.
Eouioment and materials shall be handled in accordance with manufacture/srecommendations. Large or heavy items shall only be lifted from the designatedpoints, Padded slings and hooks shall be used for lifting to prevent damage.
All equipment shall be protected until final acceptance and all factory surfacesmust be protected from impact; abrasion, discolouration and other damage. Alldamaged equipment must be repaired or replaced before final acceptance.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
The Contractor shall supply to the Project Manager Three (3) copies ofmanufacturer's instruction manuals in properly bound form for installation, testing,commissioning, operation and maintenance of the specified equipment includingmanuals of spare parts and tools of the equipment. One copy of the documentsshall be submitted in original. The installation instructions shall be submitted four(4) weeks prior to commencement of installation of each equipment andoperation & maintenance instructions at least two (2) weeks before the time ofcommissioning. lf the contractor fails to provide the documents, the ProjectManager shall withhold issuance of requisite certificates and deduct suitableamount from the payments to the Contractor.
GUARANTEE
In addition to the Contractor's guarantee and liabilities for satisfactory operationof the works, wherever advised by Project Manager, the Contractor shall alsofurnish written guarantee of the manufacturer or supplier with lespect tosatisfactory performance of each equipment. Guarantee shall be given forreplacement and repair of part or whole of the equipment that rnay be founddefective in material or workmanship. The guarantee shall as a minimum coverthe duration of l\4aintenance Period as defined in the Conditions of Contract. Thisguarantee shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations and he wjll be fullyresponsible for the repair or replacement of any defective material in time, so asnot to cause any undue delay in carrying out the repairs and/or replacements.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
The Contractor shallfurnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required toinstall, connect, test and commission all electrical equipment specified herein,whether or not such equipment is furnished by him or by others.
8.
t6600-3
sEcTtoN - 16020 swtTcHEs, socKETs AND ACCESSORTES
A) GENERAL
Switches to 8S-3676, sockets to 8S-196/546 ceiling roses, to 85-76 etc. generally toBS-5733 shall be of while moulded plastic, all insulated type, suitableflush mounting.
b) swrTcHEs
Switches shall be of Architect's approved make or as per Bill of Quantities and to beinstalled on 16 SWG sheet steel back box where specified on drawing two way switchshall be installed.
Unless otherwise specified, wherever switch control only the light points, these shall begang type switches installed on outlet boxes.
For locations where switches and fan regulators are installed together, single switchesshall be grouped and multi holes face plate screwed to a sheet steel box of appropriatedimension. The fixing of plate on outlet boxes shall be by means of flat headcountersunk galvanized screw with the head of the screw finish with the surface of theplate. Except oi switches controlling light points, all single switches for fans, sockets,etc., shall have identification symbolon the operating levers.
c) swlTcH socKET uNtT.1 PHASE.
Switch - socket units shall be 250 volts a.c 3 pin, rated for 13 or 15 Amps, combined 3pin rated for 5 / 10 Amps, or a specified in the bill of quantities.
The 15 A, 3-Pin switch socket unit shall be l\,4ultipurpose pins whereas for computerpower it shall flat pin.
d) OUTLET BOXES
The outlet boxes for installation of switches, fan dimmers and sockets outlet shall be ofwooden having appropriate dimensions. The box shall have knock-out nipple welded forreceiving the conduit. An earth terminal for connecting specified earth continuityconductor shall be provided. The outlet box shall be given one coat of anti- rust oxideprimer and finished in heavy enamel gray paint. These shall be recessed mounted suchthat face plate or plastic sheet shall flush with the wall surface. An earth connectingterminal shall be provided in the box.
E) CEILING ROSE
The ceiling rose, wherever provided at light polnts, shall be suitable for 5 Arnps, 250volts, single phase AC. lt shall have white plastic moulded base plate, copper or brassterminals for wiring with 2.5 sq.mm cable. The ceiling rose shall have a dome coverhaving cable inlet hole. Terminal for connecting the ECC shall be provided.
16600-4
o
s) INSTALLATION
Switches and switch sockets unit shall be installed on recessed-in-wall on 1.63mm thicksheet steel boxes or as specified, having appropriate dimensions. At locations whereswitches and fan dimmers are provided at one place, these shall be grouped togetherand installed on a common sheet steel box so as to finish flush with the surlace of thewall. These shall be fixed by means of flat head galvanized screws sunk in the plasticplate so as to tinish with the surface.
h} INSTALLATION
Prime quality fan dimmer with switch with plastic/Pvc back box complete in all respectsas approved by The Engineer. (Clipsal, Legrand)
o16600-5
sEcTtoN 16030 WIRE AND CABLES
A) GENERAL
The Contractor shall fumish and install all wires and cables along with the accessoriesas specified herein, in Bill of Ouantities and Drawings. Aparl from the material specified,th'e Contractor shall provide, the necessary material for termination or fixing of wires andcables such as lugs, solder, supports, bushes, glands for a complete wiring installation.Miscellaneous materials, like filing compound, identification tags, markers and earthingstrips shall be furnished for completion of works in accordance with the best engineeringstandards and practice. The wjring installation shall be carried out in strict accordancewith the scheme, cable sizes and circuit details shown on the drawirigs or as specified.The contractor is to oroduce Durchase certificate from recommended manufacturers likePakistan Cables, New age Cables or fast Cables for each & every lot and each andevery coil of wires to be stamped by consultants before it is being sent to site for use.
b) L.v. CABLES AND WTR|NG
Cable and conductors shall be PVC insulated, PVC sheathed with copperconductors, single /multicore, armoured/ unarmoured 450/750 volts grade for light andsocket circuits and 600/1000 grade lor motor power circuits, to BS 6004 and BS 6346.
The neutral and phase conductors shall be coloured black and red/yellow/bluerespectively. The circuit protective conductors shall be of hard drawn stranded bareelectrolytic copper above the size ol 6mmx2 (12 SWG), & for 6 sq.mm and below agreen PVC insulated conductor shall be used.
Each circuit shall have its own separates neutral, and the "looping in" system for wiringshall be used. Joints shall be made at main switches, distribution boards and panels,sockets outlets, light fan points and switch boxes onlyj no joints shall be made in jointboxes, nor will any "through joints" be allowed.
PVC/PVC 3-core flexible cords, shall be used for connection to the luminaries andfixtures from the ceiling rose/outlet box, through 3-terminal PVC connectors. Soldered orcrimped tinned copper lugs, shall be used on the termination of cables and conductors1osq.mm and larger. All multi-core cables shall be provided with compression glands, ofthe correct size and type, at panel entry positions.
c) INSTALLATION
The wiring through exposed or concealed conduit shall be started only after the conduitsystem is completely installed and all junction boxes, outlet boxes, switch boards, etc.have been fixed in proper position. For outdoor installation, where specified the cablesshall be run direct in ground or in pipes as specilied. Ihe cables shall be pulled throughconduit or pipes with care to prevent any damage to cables. To facilitate pulling,lubrication only as recommended by cable manufacturer may be used for decreasingfrlction. Under no circumstances shall oil or soap be used for cable pulling. Whereseveral wires are to occupy the conduit or pipes they shall be pulled along together withearth continuity conductor. In general, the wires shall not be bend to radius less than ten
o16600-6
o
times the overall diameter of the wire, or as otherwise recommended by cable manufac-turer. The contractor shall furnish all installation material and labor for installation, testingand commissioning of cable system.
The wiring to power circuit and 15 amperes single phase socket outlet shall be run inconduit separate from light wiring conduits. Care shall be taken to ensure lhat all phaseconductors are connected to the proper terminals and correct phase sequence ismaintained. Wherever the size of conduit is not stated on drawings, it shall be inaccordance with the following Table based on LE.E. Regulations.
TABLE FOR NUMBER OF WIRES TO BE LAID IN GIVEN SIZE OF PVC CONDUIT.
WIRE SIZE OF CONDUIT(sq.mm.) ( mm. dia)
50382520
1.5
4.06.010.016.0
;2
13I
343
2
20
6 1184
The wires or cables shall be terminated at light points, switchboard, etc. such that theinsulation is always led into the equipment to which connection is made. The cable entryhole in equipment shall be such as not to damage the cable. lnside the switchboards orcontrol boards, the wires or cables shall be securely fanned out in a neat arfangementand laced with wax cord. The wires of different phases shall preferably be bunchedseparately. ldentification tags or ferules shall be provided at termination of wires inswitchboards with resoect to connected eouioment for ease of installation andmatntenan@.
d) POWER, LIGHTING IKVAND CONTROL CABLES.
1,4.1 Under ground Cables
PVC Cable for underground installation shall be PVC insulated, sheathed and armoredwith galvanized steelwire of specified sizes.
'1.4.2 Surface Cables
Cables for distribution system on surface shall be ejther single-core or multicroe,as required and PVC insulated and PVC sheathed.
ot6600-'l
o
1,4.3 Cables in Conduits
All cabbs/wires, in conduits shall be ofcopper, PVC sheathed or PVC insulated.
PHASE IDENTIFICATION
All cables shall have phase identification colours on insulation of each phase. The colourcode for three phase circuits shall be red, yellow and blue for phase conductor and blackfor neutral conductor.
Single phase circuits shall have red for phase and black for neutral conductor.
e) GABLE ACCESSORTES
Best quality cable accessories should be used with the approval of consultant. The cableaccessories, include, cable tray, cable trunking, floor trunking, clips, saddles (allgalvanized). Cable glands made of brass should be used when cable enters/leaves apanel/Distribution Board. ldentification tags made of engraved brass plates to be usedfor all cables. All the cables should be security fixed to cable tray or trunking with help ofplastic ties. Cable lugs should be compression type of BICC U.K, Eipress Sweden orequivalent. Lugs should be pressed with help of compression machine approved byconsultants.
0 coNDU|TwtRtNG-TNSTALLAT|ON
The wiring through conduit shall be started only after the conduit system is completelyinstalled and all outlet boxes, junction boxes, etc. are fixed in position.
The wires shall be pulled in conduit with care and, to {acilitate pulling, the cablemanufacturer's recommended lubri€nt shall be used. Use of any kind of oil or soap willnot be permifted.
Where several wires are to be drawn in the same conduit, they shall be pulled together.The wires shall not be bent to a radius less than ten times the overall diameter of thewire, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
The wiring shall be continuous between termination. The looping in sygtem shall befollowed throughout. Any joint in wires will not be allowed. The use of connectors willonly be allowed at location where looping-in is rendered difficult. The consent of theConsultant in writing, will be required for using connectors. The connector shall be ofsuitable rating having porcelains body, sunk-in screw terminals and terminal strips. Theconnector shall be wrapped with PVC insulation tape after its installation. A minimum of150 mm extra length of cable/wire shall be provided at each termination to facilitaterepairs in future.
g) wrRtNG SYSTEM / CONDUIT
All electrical work shall be €rried out in accordance(including amendments) of "The IEE Regulation for the
with the latest editlonElectrical Equipment of
Buildings" except where such regulations are modified
a,16600-8
specifications.
h) MATERIALS
Except where otherwise specified all materials shall be supplied fixed,connected and completed by the contractor.
(1) All materials shall comply with the rebvant and latest BS orequivalent Pakistan Standard Specifications.
(2) Fittings and Accessories! Allthe fittings andaccessories should conform current British or its equivalent Pakis-tan standard Specifications. No material of inferior quality shall beallowed for use in work.
(3) Cable of Conductor- All cable and cords shall be of CMA grade orequivalent Pakistan grade, approved by Engineer In-oharge from timeto time.
(4) Sizes of Conductors:- The minimum sizes of conductors shall be:-
b .
t
(i) Lighting cables withsectionalarea.
conductor of 1.ssq.mm
(iD Lighting flexible cords with conductor of0.75sq.mm sectional area.
(iiD Power cables with conductors of 2.50sq.mmsectionalarea.
(iv) Sub-mains cables with conductors ot 4sq.mm sectional
Any other size of conductor when required shall comply with IEE regulations and asspecified in BOO.
5) Socket Outlet Points (3 Pin, 5 Amps and 15 Amps)i
(i) Socket outlets shall be of shuttered pattem.
BUILDING WORK
The position all holes or cutting will be agreed with the Engineer-jn-Chargebefore the work is taken in hand. All making good shall match the existingsurroundings.
16600-9
t
SITING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
a. The siting of cable/conduit runs, controls, fittlngs, accessories, etc., mustbe in accordance with the plans and settled on site in conjunction with theEngineer-in-Charge before work commences.
b. The height from the flobr level to bottom offittings shall be as follow€:-
(1) lvlain control.1 .75 m
Distribution board.
Peidant and interior bracket
board for lighting switches and fan regulators 1.25 m
Socket outlets (generally).1.5f1
c. The siting of main switches, meters and distribution boards for officeasbungalows and important buildings shall be done inside the rear/sideverandah or in any suitable place in the rear of the building.
K) MOUNTING OF FITTING AND ACCESSORIES
Ordinary pendant, batten and simibr lighting fittings and accessoriesshall be mounted direct in/on conduit box/wooden blocks, etc.
Switch tuse, distribution board and the like shall be secured by means ofwood screws, coach screws, rag bolts or other suitable method asapproved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Spacer bar saddle shall be secured by screws of minimum length of 25mm.
(2J1.75 m
(3)2.50 mo
(4)
(5)
o .
b.
CONDUIT WIRING
a. (l) The system shall consist of single core PVC un-heated cables inscrewed steel conduits installed for surface or concealed wiring asspecified.
2) The loop-in system shall be employed.advisable, teeing off by ir ns of taped porcelainconduit boxes may be utilized as approved by the
conduit and conduii Fittings:-
Where necessary orheated connectors in
Engineer-in-Charge.
16600-10
(1) All other conduits shall be heavy gauge class B welded seam asper BSS 31 table 1 as given below. BSS-31 - Table '1
STANDARD DIMENSIONS AND WEIG}ITS OFSTEEL CONDUIT
Outside dia 20mm
Threads per 25mm 16
Max. length of threadson ends. 14mm
25mm 40mm 50mm
16 16 '16
17mm 20mm 23mm
ONominal thickness. 1.83mm. ' l.83mm 2.03mm 2.34mm
Minimumthickness. 1.68mm
Weight per meterbeforeenameling/galvanizing 0.79k9 1.08k9 1.85k9 2.86ks
Conduit for magazines, explosive stores and POL installations shall be soliddrawn.
The conduit boxes and covers shall be of malleable cast iron and shallconform to latest specifications. Solid fittings will not be permitted.Inspection elbows tees or bends will be used for surface wiring at theends of conduits immediately behind fiftings or accessories wherespecif ically approved.
Fixing screws for conduit and inspection covers be of brass or rust proofmaterial.
c. Erection:-
(1) All conduit and conduit fittings shall be erected before any cables aredrawn in. The number of cables allowed, in the conduits shall be inaccordance with IEE Regulations. All screwed connections shall be metalto metal and exposed screw thread and parts where the galvanizing orenamels has been damaged shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted withtwo coats of anti-conosive paint, such painting being done as the workproceeos.
'1.68mm 2.00mm 2.21mm
(2)
(3)
o16600-l l
All points shall be such as to ensure perfect electrical continuity andwhere running joints are necessdry, lock nuts shall be utilized.
Where conduit passes through principals, rafters, purlins orjoists whetherof wood, iron or steel, these must be drilled in approved position to takethe conduits, the holes being of the smallest possible dia, consistent withrequirements.
Where the conduit passes through a floor, wall, partition or ceiling thehole shall be made good with cement or similar incombustible materials tothe full thickness of the floor, wdll, partition or ceiling and space throughwhich a fire might spread shall not be left. Junction between conduit andadaptable boxes, back outlet boxes and the like, not provided with entryspouts,, also between conduit and iron clad distribution boards andcontrol gear, shall be effected by means of lock nuts and conduit couplersinto which will be screwed a brass hexagonal smooth bore bush, from theinside of box or case. In addition to ensure perfect continuity where boxesshall be fitted between the bush and box or case. Conduit system shall beerected as far as possible to avoid traps where water may accumulatefrom condensation.
Where this is unavoidable, suitable provision for drainage shall be made.Conduit shall be kept at least 150 mm clear of and preferably belowsteam or hot water pipes.
Bonding and Earthing:- All conduit system shall be electrically continuousthroughout the installation. The maximum conductivity resistance of theconduit together with earthing lead shall not exceed one ohm. All conduitsystems shall be efficiently earthed.
m, SURFACE CONDUIT WIRING
No conduit shall be less than 20 mm dia.
Normally the conduit shall be carried on the surface of walls and ceilings,but where conditions permit, the conduit may be run within holiow spacesof walls, floors, partitions, and ceilings or in roof spaces. Diagonal run willnot be permitted for surface wiring and particular attention shall be paidto "Sets" which must fit as close to the walls, etc., as possible. Theconduit shall be secured by means of spacer bar saddles made of Clpressed steel fixed at intervals of maximum 900 mm with a saddle within100 mm of each fitting or accessory. Spacer bar saddle plates shall be 3mm thick for conduits upto 40 mm dia and 5 mm for larger sizes ofconduit. The saddle plates shall be secured by wood screws. Whereconduit is attached to iron or steeljoists or pillars, suitable or girder clips,
(2)
(3)
d .
b .
a
spaced at 900 mm
16600-12
intervals shall be utilized.
n) CONCEALED CONDUIT WIRING
a. (1) No bonduit shall be less than 20 mm dia. Normally the conduit shall besunk in walls and ceilings to such depth that there is not less than 20 mmcover but where the construction of the buildings is such that it is foundimpossible or inadvisable to sink the conduit, may with the approval oftheEngineer-in-Charge, be installed as for surface wiring.
The conduit shall be secured by means of hooks or other means fixed atintervals of 1.25 m or within 'l00mm of each fitting or accessory. Not morethan four bends shall be provided in a single run of conduit.
Where a concealed conduit is to traverse on RCC roofs, it shall beembedded in the concrete and not run on the surface ofthe slabs.
b. Where junction boxes are tixed in walls, etc., for
(2\
drawing in, the covers must fit flush with the plaster at all points.
Where junction boxes are laid under or in concrete or floorc, trapsof approved design having a flanged outer frame for keying intothe concrete, etc., and fitted with a recessed cover suitable forfilling in with the floor material shall be utilized.
d. Where junction boxes are laid under wooden floors, properlyconstructed traps shall be put in the flooring and secured withsuitable counter sunk brass screws.
Number of traps in the floors must be kept to a minimum.
Where flush type switches or socket outlets are specified,plate must over-lap the cavity and fit flush with the plaster atpoints. No "filling" or "packing" will be permitted.
t.
Conduit buried in plaster is, in ordinary circumstances, deemednot to be in a damp situation.
o) FLAME PROOF CONDUITWIRING
(1)a. The system shall consist of single core PVC unheated cables in gcrewed steelconduits installed for surface wiring as specified.
lhe loop-in system shall be employed. Where necessary or advisable, teeing oflby means of taped porcelain in heated connector in conduit boxes may beutilized as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
All conduits shall be class 'B'screwed, solid drawn, heavy gauge in accordancewith BS 31 of 1940.
(2) a. For Storage of Explosive Group-15.
(2)
(1 )
16600-13
o.
The fittings shall be flame proof duly tested/approved by Govt. of Pak, CentralTesting Laboratories Lahore, in accordance with BSS No. 31/1940 and229t1957.
For Storage of Explosive Groups-1.2 & 4. The fittings shall be dust proof inaccordance with 853-3807/64.
For Storage of Remaining Explosive Etc. The fittings shall be totally enclosed inaccordance with BSS-281 7/57.
Fixing screws for conduit boxes, inspection covers shall be 8mm x14mm. Trihead steel screws may be used or as specified by the Engineer-ln-Charge.
Capacities of different sizes of steel/Pvc conduits in terms of cables are given inthe followino table.
(3)
(4)
MAXIMUM CAPACITY OF CONDUITS
Size of Conduit
Size of Cables
1 sq.mm
1.5 sq .mm
2.5 sq .mm
(1t1.78)
2.5 sq.mm
(7t0.67)
4 sq.mm
6 sq.mm
10 sq .mm
'16 sq.mm
25 sq.mm
35 sq.mm
70 sq.mm
20 mm 25 md 40 mm 50 mmPVC i Steel PVCi Steel PVCi Steel PVC/ Steel
12 12 20 19 41 39
11 10 18 17 32 30
40'1314 23242
2a
18
16
6
20
17
11
I
7
4
3
2
12 11
99
77
44
22
19 38
'16 30
'10 19
817
6 13
36
24
16600-14
o
I
O
q)
0
s)
t)
p) EARTHING (Neutral) Conductor
a. In all cases where the supply conductors include an earth neutral, anindication of a permanent nature shall be provided to enable such neutralconductor to be distinguished from any live conductor at the point.
PRECAUTIONS VIS.A-VIS GAS, WATER SUPPLY, ETC.; FITTINGS
In bath rooms, lavatories, sculleries, kitchens, or any places where gas or watertaps or tittings or masses of metal connected to earth are handled, specialprecautions shall be taken so that it is impossible to touch the electricalapparatus fittings or the accessories and the gas or water .system, etc.,simultaneously.
ITEMS OESCRIPTION FOR SMALL wlRING
Work under this includes supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all'material, labour, tools and accessories as required for the completion of systemin accordance with the specification, drawing and instruction of Engineer-Incnarge.
All back boxes for swltches and socket outlet to be of '16 SWG sheet steelwith provision for connection of earthing wire.
All wiring shall be done by 1-core PVC jnsulated wires inappropriate/specification conduit shall be installed in wall, column, ceiling, underfloor or exposed on surface.
LIGHT CIRCUIT WIRING
Wiring with 2x2.5 sqmm+Ecc 1x1.5 sqmm 1-core wires from DB to switch boardincluding any wiring between switch boards on some circuit.
SWITCH TO POINTWIRING.
Wiring from switch board to lighvfan point with 3x1.5 sqmm for phase, ECCand as neutralfor all point on one circuit .
u) POTNT TO POTNT WR|NG
Same as wiring for "switch to point " but point to point.
v) POTNT WR|NG-FOR TWO-SW|TCH
I
16600-r5
x)
v)
2't
Wiring between two-switches and light/fan point with 1.5 sq.mm wires. The slzeof neutral & ECC wires shall be as described in switch to point wiring. The sameshall be point to point wiring.
DB TO POINT WIRING
Wiring for group control of light directly from Distribution board to first light pointwith 2x2.5 sqmm + 1x1 .5 sqmm 1-core wires as specified in BOQ.
Same wires shall be used for point to point wiring.
wtRtNG FOR ToA"SOCKETS
Wiring for 10A, 3-Pjn Sockets shall be done with 3x2.5 sqmm wires from DB tofirst outlet including connection/ termination in sockets. The same wires shall beused for outlet to outlet wiring.
WIRING FOR 15A SOCKETS
Wiring for 15Ams. sockets shall be with 3x4 sq.mm or 3 x 6 sq.mm wires fromDist. Board to first socket outlet. The same wires shall be used for wiring fromoutlet, including connection on both ends.
WIRING FOR AIR.CONDITIONING UNITSWiring for single phase A,/c units upto 2.0 tons shall be done with 3x6.0 sq.mmwires from Dist. Board to AJc outlet. including connection at both ends.
STANDARDS
tEc 7't-1tEc 56
and IEC 129 For impulse level and test voltage.
tEc 185 / BS-3939rEc 't86 / BS-3941
For circuit breaker.Current transformer.Potential transforme..
a
a16600-16
b)
sEcTloN - 16040 CONDUITS & PIPES
A) GENERAL
The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, and commissioningof all matela and services of the complete conduit & pipe system asspecified herein and/gr shown on Tender Drawings and stated in the Bill ofOuanlit ies.
The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and co-ordinate at site with other services for exact route, location and oosition oi theelectrical lines.
PVC CONDUITS
All wiring for light, power, control and other circuits shall be carried out in class-BPVC pipe, minimum 3/4" dia. The conduits and pipes shall be supplied completewith all accessories including bends, joints junction boxes and all cutting, repair,excavation backfilling, etc., required for complete instaliation. The conduits forinternalwiring to lights, sockets and power circuit shall be of approved brand.
Manufactured smooth bends shall be used wherever conduit change directjon.The sharp 90 degree bends or tees shall not be allowed. All conduit accessoriesshall conform to same material specification as given above for conduit.
The bends shall have enlarged ends to receive conduit without any reduction jnthe internal diameter at joints.
The round junction box for ceiling light points shall be of PVC having minimumdimensions of 63 mm dhmeter and 63mm deep. The outlet box at wall lightpoints shall be general purpose type having mjnimum dimensions of 63 mmdiameter and 38 mm deep. Pull boxes and inspection boxes shall be installed inconduit runs where required to limit the pulling of the cables or for inspectionpurposes. The pull boxes shall be square having minimum dimension of 100mmand 50 mm deep. In all cases, the minimum length of inspection boxes shall benot less than four times the cable manufacturers recommended bendino radiug ofthe cable.
These dimensions are minimum only and the Contractor shall determine theexact size keeping in view ease of maintenance and installation. In general theuse of pull boxes and inspection boxes shall be avoided. The pull boxes andinspection boxes shall be of 16 SWG. sheet steel provided with anti-rust paintand finished in gray enamel paint.
Wherever installed, pull boxes and inspection boxes 6hall have a cover of 3 mmthick ply- board wjth white formica sheet glued firmly to it. The face plate shall besecured to the box by means of flat head galvanized screw.
a16600-t7
ct GALVANIZED IRON (G.D PIPES
The G.l. pipes shall be of l\,4.S., galvanized inside and outside by hot-dipgalvanizing process. The pipes shall be free from stains, burrs or any otherdefect, and shall conform to BS-137. The accessories for G.l. pipes such assockets, bends, etc., shall be galvanized inside and outside and shall be of samequality and specifications as the pipes.
G.l. pipes for underground installations shall be given bituminous paint coatingbefore installation.
STEEL CONDUIT
Where required, wiring shall be carried out in heavy gauge (5/8 inch minimumwallthickness, Class B) screwed steel conduit, to BS 31, minimum 3/4 inch dia,protected with two coats of red oxide anti-corrosion primer and two coats ofenamel, clipped to the surface.
Conduit accessories, to BS 31, shall be cast-iron or of 16 b.g sheet steel conduitterminations shall be provided with soft, rounded, brass bushes and lock nuts.Saddles shall be of heaw duty hospital-type, and shall be installed at spacesrecommended by the IEE regulations.
Additional supports in the form of '1-'ll2 inch x 1/8 inch llates ot 'l-'ll2 inch x1/8 inch angle iron shall be provided wherever necessary. No welding to thestructure shall be oermitted.
Flexible steel conduit, to BS 731, shall be used for final connections to motorsand other equipment subject to vibration and movement. The flexible conduitshall be encased in water-proof plastic fixed with jubilee clips. Ends of theconduit shall be welded to brass couplers/adaptor.
R.C.C PIPE
Where required, cabling shall be laid in reinforced cement concrete pipes (ClassA), to ASTM C-14, installed 24 jnches below grade, with 4 inches thick fineriddled / sieved sand bedding under and over the pipe. Joints in pipe shall bemade by wrapping one lap of a tarred gasket around the spigot of one pipe andplacing it into the collar of the other pipe. The joint shall be filled with cement-sand (1 r1) mortar.
d)
c
e)
O INSTALLATION
3.6,' l Conduits
The conduit shall be installed concealed in wall, column ceiling or underfloor, on surface, above the false ceiling gr as stated on the drawings.The drawings are diagrammatic and"do not indicate the location of
o16600-18
junction boxes, pull boxes or inspection boxes which shall be provided tosuit site conditions.
The concealed conduits shall have a minimum of 25 mm concrete cover,when concealed in R.C.C works. The conduits in R.C.C works shall belaid before pouring of concrete. Chases shall not be made in R.C.Cstructure for conduits and accessories after pouring of concrete. In slab,conduits shall be laid over the bottom reinforcement steel and tied firmlyto it. The conduit outlet boxes shall be held firmly to finish with the so{fit ofthe slab or beam. At expansions joints, flexible condujts or alternatearrangement shall be provided.
Where conduits have to be concealed in cement concrete work afterconcreting or in block masonry, chases shall be made with appropriatetools and of required depth. The conduit shall then be fixed firmly in therecess and covered after plastering. All chases for concealing conduitsshall be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor will be responsiblefor bringing back the generalfinish to the condition that it was before thecutting and chiseling by the Contractor.
The work ofconduit installation and cutting in cement concrete work orbrick work shall be coordinated with civil construction so as not to causeany undue hindrances and delays in progress. The Contractor shallobtain approval of the Consultant for route, etc. to suit the site conditionsbefore starting chasing and cutting. Alljunction boxes, outlet boxes, pullboxes etc. shall be installed concealed so as to finish with the surface.
Conduits installed on surface shall be fixed by means of blackenameled steel saddles and clamps having thickness of 3 mm. Theclamps shall be installed at a distance of not more than 600 mm.
Bending of conduits by heating or otherwise can be adopted provided thatthe recommendation of conduit manufacturer are strictly followed. Aftercompletion of oonduit insiallation, the system shall be checked for anycharred or twisted portion prior to the pulling of wire. At all joints, PVCjointing solution must be used.
The termination of conduits is shown diagrammatically on the drawings.
The exact final location of the termination shall be coordinated with theequipment to be installed. Conduit ends pointing upwards or downwardsshall be properly plugged, in order to prevent the entry of foreignmaterials. All openings through which concrete may leak shall be carefullyplugged and boxes shall be suitably protected against lilling withconcrete. At all termination of conduit, soft bushes shall be flxed toprevent sharp edges of conduit ends from cutting or damaging the wiresor cables to be pulled through them.
o16600-19
s)
The entire conduit system shall be installed and tested before wiring iscarried out. Any obstruction found shall be cleared by use of a cutting orother aoproved device and the conduit be cleaned out before theinstallation of cable.
3.6.2 SteelConduit
At all joints the. pipe shall be firmly screwed and cotton yarnwith water' proof compound shall be used to make the
ioint water-prool
At each termination, the pipe end shall have threads and socketscrewed on thread for installing sofr metal bush. The soft metalbush shall be of approved quality and shall be male type.
The installation of pipes shall be complete ln all respects includingits fixing at t€rminations before wiring work is started. All sharpedges and burrs shall be removed by using reamer or anyaoproved device.
OTHER ACCESSORIES
Outlet boxes, pull boxes, inspection boxes, switch and socket outlet boxes, fanregulator boxes, etc, to BS 4662, shall be of 16 SWG sheet steel, derusted,degreased, rust-proof with two coats of zinc chormate primer and painted withenamel, complete with earthing terminal. All boxes shall have ample wiringspace, and boxes used outdoors shall be weather-proof.
' f16600-20
t
a)
sEcTtoN - 16050 LIGHTING FIXTURES
GENERAL
All lighting fixtures complete with lamps, accessories, installation materjals, etc.shall be furnished and installed as per drawings. The fixtures shall be designedand built to give reliable seNice continuously at the normal voltage and currentralng.
The light fitting schedule is given on the drawing and each type is specified indetail in the Bill of Quantities. The manufacturer's type and catalog numberspecified shall serve as illustration of the type of fixture required and any otherapproved equivalent fitting shall be acceptable. The equivalency shall be basedon certified photometric data, as well as on construction material, shape, finish,etc. The Contractor shall submit complete technical details and/or samples ofeach and every lighting fixture specified and obtain approval of the Consuhantbefore commencing with placement of order.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODESThe latest editions of the following standards/codes shall be applicable to thematerial soecified within the scope ofthis sectionl
tEc 60081tEc 60920lEc 60155tEc 60400
BS 3677
BS 40'17
Tubular fluorescent lamps BS 1853Ballast for tubular fluorescent lamps IEC 60921Starters for fluorescent lamDs BS 3772Lamp holders and starter holders forfluorescent lapsCapacitors for use in TL, HP mercury and LP sodiumvapour discharge lamp circuits
o) I\,IATERIAL
4.1 Fluorescent Light Fixtures
The fluorescent light fixtures shall have lamps, ballasts, starters and powerfactorimprovement capacitors of proper rating. Each lamp shall be provided withindependent ballast.
The fluorescent lamps shall be tubular in shape. The fluorescent
CURRENTAI,IPS
RATINGl\,lM VoLTAGE
a16600-21
lamps shall have following minimum technical specificationsl
(') After 100 buming Hours
The ballast shall be impregnated copper/iron type totally enclosed and suitable tooperate upto 250 Volt AC at 50 HZ. The power loss shall not be more than 10watts for ballasts of all ratings. A wiring diagram, wattage, voltage and currentfigures shall be printed on the body ofthe ballast.
The lamp holders shall be rotary lock-in type. The starters shall be glow type withradio interference suppresser/by-pass capacitor.
The internal wiring of the fluorescent light fixtures shall be done with heatresistant wires and provided with appropriate connectors for wiring.
The body ol the luorescent light fixtures shall be minimum 22 SWG sheet steel,derusted, degreased, finished in heat resistant paint, stove enameled.Appropriate size bushed wire entry holes, fixing holes and earth terminal shall beorovided.
C) MATERIALS
4.2.1. Fluorescent Light Fixtures
Fluorescent fixtures shall be of the 22 gauge sheet steel, with anti-corrosionbase treatment ofthe metal and white/gray stove-enameling, with deep drying byinfra-red lamps. Wire and bolts shall be of the corrosion resistant type. Allcomponents, high-efficiency fluorescent lamps, noiseless, lowloss high p.f.electronic Ballast, rotary location-type lamp holders, glow starters, with radiointerference suppression and holders, matching capacitors in a duo-circuit toimprove the p.i to 0.95 etc., shall be compatible and ofthe best available quality.
All fluorescent light fixtures shall be provided with capacitors for improving thepower factor to 0.9. The acrylic diffuser of fluorescent light fjtting shall be 3mmthick.
The body of the light fitting shall be minimum 24 gauge sheet steel, finished instove enameled finish color as stated in manufacturer catalog unless otherwisedirected by the Consultant. Bushed wire entry holes and fixing holes of suitablesize shall be provided. The mounting channels ot fitting shall be painted withsprayed coat of white impact resistant coating ofsynthetic enamel.
4.2. 1.a lncandescent Light Fixtures
Recessed type down or up-lighter shall consist of Aluminum reflector inside it andlamp. The glass shade or globe of incandescent light fiftings shall be of superiorquality glass, ftee from air bubbles or voids. The glas6 shall be opal white color
a16600-22
t
or clear as specified. The incandescent fitting shall have bi-pin lamp holders ofbrass if not specifies in BOQ.
The surface-mounting incandescent or fluorescent ljght littings shall be installedwith the fixture back, flush with the ceiling surface. Nylon plugs shall be used forfixing the fixture on the ceiling or wall. The pendant-type fluorescent light fittingshall be hung from the ceiling by two 3/4 inch dia 16SWG white enameledtunbses swiel -joint hanger at the top for fixing directly on to the recessed outletbox or on the ceiling. The recessed type fluorescent or incandescent light fittingshall be install recessed in the false ceiling by cutting the false ceiling to therequired dimensions, such that the frame of the fifting overlaps the ceiling. Thelluorescent fiftings to be installed in a row shall utilize end plates to fix the fixtureends in level so as to form a continuous row without break or void.
4.2.1.b Internal Wiring
lnteanal wiring of fixture shall be with heat resistant wires andsplices.
4.2.2 Construction Requirements
All metallic or extruded parts of lighting fixtures shalland free from imperfections or discolorations. Cast orrigid, true to
contain no
be close grained, soundextruded parts shall be
pattern, of ample weight and thickness. Cast or extruded parts shall be properlyfitted, filed, ground buffed and chased to provided finished surface and joints freeof imperfections with all details of ornamentation brought out. Finish€d thicknessof all cast parts shall not be less than 3 mm. Except where specifically indicatedto the contrary, all fixtures shall be provided with a final synthetic hightemperature stove enamel coating of color and finish as specified or directed.Unless otherwise specified, all stove enameled reflective surface shall be white,with a minimum reflectance of 860/0 prior to painting. All parts shall receive properadhesive surface preparation to assure adequate paint adherence and durability.
Where stainless steel or non-ferrous metal surface other than reflector areremain unpainted or where steel surface are to be elect oplaGd they shallunless otherwise specified satin-finished and coated with a baked lacquer topreserve the surface. Where aluminum surface are treated with an anodizingprocess, the clear lacquer coating may be omitted.
Where aluminum is to be utilized as a reflector surface the aluminum shall betreated as specified by alzak or anodizing process to ensure a permanentreflective surface with a minimum 85% reflectance. Recessed fixtures shall bedesigned so as to be properly coordinated with the ceiling construction.
Fixtures shall be furnished withsupport of the fixture. Frame shallif manufactured of steel shall bebefore de6cribed.
tobe,
all appurtenances necessary for the properbe either manufactured of nonferrous metal orsuitably rust-proof after fabrication as herein
a16600-23
q )
All lenses, louvers or other light diffusing elements contained ln fixture framesshall be removable but positively held within the frame so that hinging or othermotion ofthe frame will not cause the diffusing element to drop out.
LIGHT FIXTURE FOR EXTERNAL ILLUIV]INATION
Incandescent and H.l.D. fi)dures, to BS 232l'1950/3533 shall be of heavy gaugecorrosion-proof metal construction, with brass/porcelain lamp holders. Thediffusers shall be of first grade heat resisting glass, 1/8 inch thick, free fromvoids, or opal plexi-formed material as required. High bay fittings shall be of thethrough-venting type. All components, incandescent lamps, to BS 16'1, HPMVlamps, to BS 4782, matching capacitors, to BS 4017, to improve the p.f. to 0.95,etc. shall be compatible and ofthe best available quality.
Fixtures for use outdoor or in areas designated on drawings as damp locationsshall be suitably casketed to prevent access of moisture into electricalcomponents of the enclosing diffusers, lenses or globes. All metal parts offixtures for use in damp locations and shall be painted with suitable weather andmoisture resistant paints exhibiting qualities equal to epoxy based coatings. Allalu$inum parts of fixtures for use in damp vacationa thai are specified in asrequiring and unpainted linish shall be anodized.
Post top light fixture for external illumination if specified shall be of specifiedshape and specified type. consisting of corrosion resistant aluminum body, bowl,weatherproof gasket, complete with porcelain lamp holder and lamp. The fixtureshall be suitable for mounting on a G.l pipe post painted in black enamel paintwith mate finish.
LAMPS
The fluorescent lamps shall be rapid start, noiseless operation tubular in shapefor general lighting service8 and wjred for lead/lag circuit with E27 type holder asPhilips Tornado 23 watt
Spot lamps shall be incandescent blown bulb or pressed glass lamps with theirown buih-in parabolic reflector producing narrow or flood beams of high luminousintensity or as mentioned in BOQ.
INSTALLATION
The light fixtures shall be installed pendant, on surface of wall/ceiling or recessedin false ceiling. All surfaoe mounted fixtures shall be jnstalled by means ofgalvanized steel screws or bolts depending on the type of fixture and as advisedby the Consultant. Light fixtures installed in the false ceiling shall be supported tothe roof in order to avoid loading on false ceiling.
e)
0
t6600-24
s)
Pendant light fixtures shall be supported to c€iling with single M.S pipes forincandescent spot fixtures and double M.S pipe for fluorescent light fixtures. Allpipes supports shall be 10 mm dia minimum and provided with suitable fixingarrangement, nuts, washer, etc. Where fluorescent lighting are installedcontinuously in row, the same shall be installed on a sheet steel plate pendantmounted from ceiling. All materjal shall be anU-corrosive painted and finished incolor as advised by the Consultant.
The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant details of fixing arrangement forapproval prior to commencement of assembly/fabrication work.
Road Lighting Poler
The Pole mild steel tubular swaged/welded Silver enameled painted Road lightsingle arm or Double arm as required of over all length 1oMtrs having 3 stepsand dimension of 150x100x75mm & tube thickness 6-5-4mm respectively forfixing road light complete with M.S. baseplate having 20mm thickness and300sqmm long curved bracket with 800mm radius for mounting light fixture withall required civil works (including PCC foundations wherever requlred as perrelevant standards and as per instructions) with suitable precautions {or ensuringprevention ofwatering and proper water proof-termination of cables and wires asApproved by The Engineer.
I Type Lighting Pole for Flood Lightl
The l-type mild steel tubular swaged/welded Road light pole of over all length 9Mhaving 3 steps and dimension of 150x100x75mm & tube thickness 6-5-4mmrespectively for fixing road light complete with lV.S. baseplate having 20mmthickness and 300sqmm long curved bracket with 800mm radius for mountinglight fixture with all required civil works (including PCC foundations whereverrequired as per relevant standards and as per instructions) with suitableprecautions for ensuring prevention of watering and proper water proof-termination gf cables and wires as approved by The Engineer.
Gl bmket must be sifuer enameled on too the pole for the installation of theintegralflood light luminaire at I mtr long pole as required forflood/road lights.
h)
16600-25
a)
sEcTtoN - 16060 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
SCOPE OF WORK
The work under this section consists of s'rpplying, installing, testing andcommissioning of all material and accessories for l\.4iscellaneous ltems asspecified herein and/or shown on the Drawings and given in the Bill of Quantities.
The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Project Managef andco-ordinate at site with other services for exact locations and positions of theMiscellaneous ltems.
The Miscellaneous ltems with accessories shall also comply with ihe GeneralSpecifications for Electrioal Works Section - 8001 and with other relevantprovisions ofthe Tender Docurnent and latest WAPDA Specifications.
GENERAL
The miscellaneous items as described in this section shall comply with othersections of these Specifications as applicable. No specific reference to anymanutacturer has been made and the Contractor shall ensure that all themiscellaneous items be supplied/fabricated from the reputable manufacturers,who have already supplied/fabricated similar items.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODES
The latest editions of the following standards/codes shall be applicable to thematerial specified within the scope ofthis Section:
b)
c)
BS 4934
tEc 60439
MATERIAL
Safety requirements for electric ians and regulators
Factory built assemblies of LV switchgear & controlgear
d)
4.1 MCBIMCCB Enclosed in Sheet Steel Box
The single pole 250 Volts miniature ci.cu't breakers (l\4CB) and triple pole500 Volts moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) are used for supplyingsingle phase/three phase power to the equipment shown on the Drawingsand given in the Bill of Quantities.
The MCB/MCCB shall conform to the same specifications as given inseclion LV dislribution boards of these specifications. lt shall be installedin a 16 SWG sheet steel box of such a size which can easilyaccommodate the MCCB and incoming/outgoing wires or cables.Sufficient numbers of PVC connectors shall also be provided inside thesheet steel box for terminating the earth continuity conductors and neutral
16600-26
4.2
wires. The front plate fixed on the sheet steel box shall be of sheet steelfixed with G.l. screws having an opening for operating the ON-OFF leverof McB/MCCB.
Ceiling Fan
Ceiling fan shall be capacitor type, suitable for 250 Volt AC. The airdisplacement shall be 12;000 cfm for 56" ('1422 n].n') sweep and 10,000cfm for 48" (1219 mm) sweep at maximum speed. The fan motor shall becapacitor type and bearing shall be groove type to give noiselessoperalron.
The down rod of ceiling fans shall be appropriate length such that theceiling fan motor and blades are minimum 12 inches below false ceiling.
Ceiling Hook for Fan
The fan hook shall be made of 16 mm diameter mild steel rod. lt shouldbe in the form of a loop about 75 mm long and about 50 mm wide. Therod should be bent to have at least 200 mm extension for tying toreinforcement steel of roofing with rubber sheet to prevent electriccontact. The fan shall be deluxe model, of specified make.
Wall Bracket Fan
Fan motor shall be capacitor type and bearing shall be groove type togive noiseless operation. The fan regulator shall be builfin type with highgrade steel laminations and shall have five speed marks and one "OFF'mark. The fan shall be flnished in white colour, matching the ceiling andshall be of specified make.
Exhaust Fans
Exhaust fans shall be of plastic body and blades. The 6" dia fans shallhave circularframe suitable for fixing in wlndow glass. lt shall have a cardcontrol shutter. The 9" and 12" exhaust fans shall have square shapedplastic body and blades. lt shall be suitable for installation in wallopenings. The fan shall have a c€rd switch for reversible operation.
INSTALLATION
5.1 General
The mounting heights of all the miscellaneous items are stated on thedrawings or in general notes. ln case the mounting height is notmentioned, the instructions of the Project Manager shall be obtainedbefore fixing the item.
MCB/MCCB Enclosed in Sheet Steel Box
The miniaturelmoulded case circuit breaker (MCB/MCCB) shall beinstalled on '1.63 mm ('16 SWG) thick sheet steel box with screws or somesuitable arrangements as approved by Project lvlanager. White face plate
4.3
4.4
4.5
5.2
r6600-2"1
for sheet steel box shall be fixed by means of flat head galvanized screwssunk in the plastic plate so as to finish flush with the wall surface. Theedges ofthe plate shall be chamfered.
b.J uelllng ran
Fan hook shall be installed in the RCC ceiling and to the reinforcementbefore pouring of concrete. The installation of fan shall including fixing ofblades, down-rod, clamp, canopy, including testing and commissioning
The down rod shall be of required length having long threads and shall beprovided with cheok nuts to secure it firmly with the clamp and with thebody of the fan. A slit pin shall be provided both at the fan body end andat the clamp for satety. Any scratches on the body of the fan or fan rodappearing during installation shall be cleaned and painted properly withthe same quality paint as provided by the manufacturer.
Wiring between the ceiling rose and the fan terminals shall be three core'1.5 mm'PVC insulated, PVC sheathed flexible cable.
fl MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
General
The Contractor's bld amount against each Bill of Quantities item as givenbelow shall include supply, installation, testing, commissioning andcompletion for all work specified herein, as shown on the TenderDrawings and given in the Bill of Quantities related to the item.
MCB/MCCB Enclosed in Sheet Steel
6.2.1 Measurement
I\,4easurement shall be made for the number of each itemacceptably supplied and installed by the Contractor as acomplete unit.
6.2.2 Payment
Payment shall be made for the number of units measured asprovided above at the Contract unit price each and shall constitutefuli compensation for supplying, installing, connecting, testing andcompletion of each jtem including gheet steel outlet box, plate andaccessories as required
6 .1
6.2
o16600-28
Ceiling Fans
6.3.1 l\reasurement
lvleasurement shall be made for each type of Ceiling fan &accessories acceptably supplied and installed by the Contractoras a complele unit.
Payment shall be made for the nufnber of units measured asprovided above at the Contract unit price each and shallconstitute full compensation for supplying, installing, connecting,testing and commissioning of Ceiling fans including mounting,accessories such as nuts, bolts, hooks, down rod of appropriatelength etc. and wiring between ceiling rose and fan terminalscomplete in all respects.
t6600-29
sEcTtoN - 16070 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
GENERAL
The distribution boards (DB) shall be of sheet steel fabricated totally enclosed,dust & damp proof suitable for recessed or surface mounting on wall. lt shall befactory assembled, tested complete with all accessories and finishes with twobase coats of anti-corrosive paint and at least one coat of approved color paint,stove enameled.
The cabling inside the DB shall be properly harnessed. An earth bar or terminalstrip of suitable section be provided, which shall be permanently connected to bebody of DB. Flexible copper strip shall earth the door of the DB. All componentsand circuits shall be labeled consistent with the wiring and distribution of circuitsby permanentfire resistant plastic tape.
The distribution board shall be designed for front operation and shall:
- be rated lot 440/250 volts, 3 phase 4 wire, 50 Hz system.
- be designed forflush mounting of all instruments on the fronl side.
-- have incoming and outgoing cable termination arrangement,terminal block / line up terminals etc.
- have name plate and suitable danger signs on the front and wiringdiagram on the back side of door. The distribution board shall befabricated with minimum 16 SWG thick sheet steel. All thecomponents shall be mounted on a common component mountingolate fixed inside the enclosure with a screwed sheet steel frontplate. The enclosure shall be provided with rubber gasketslockable hinged door with cam fastener. Locks shall be providedwhere advlsed by Consultant.
The distribution board $hall be supplied complete with all installation materials asrecommended by the manufacturer and required for completion of work.
The short circuit current carryjng capacity shall be as shown on drawings. Use ofback-up fuses for meeting the short circuit level is not permitted.
COMPONENTS
5.2.1 Circuit Breakers (CB)
The circuit breakers shall be trjple pole / single pole as shown on thedrawings manual operating device. The circuit breakers shall havetemperature compensated thermal over load release and magnetic short-
a16600-30
circuit release.
O
Air cooled, ring type current transformers (CT) shall be provided havingtransformation ratio as indicated on the drawings. The CTs shall be ofsuitable burden having accuracy class 1.0.
5.2.4 SelectorSwitches
5.2,2 Ammete6 and Voltmeters
All meters shall be flush mounting, moving iron, spring controlled. Thefront dimensions shall be 96 mm x 96 mm.
The meters shall have accuracy class 1.5. The ammeter shall be suitablefor direct connection or to 5 Amp secondary of clrrent transformers asshown on the drawings. The ammeters and voltmeters shall havemeasuring range as indicated on the drawings.
5.2.3 CurrentTransformer
Ammeter and voltmetef selector switches shall be complete with frontplate, grip handle and R-Y-B and OFF positions for ammeters and RY-YB-BR-RN and OFF positions forvoltmeters.
5.2.5 Indicating Lamps
Indicating lamps shall be suitable for flush mounting complete with bases,230 volt incand$cent bulb and rosettes of aooroved colors.
Miniature Circuit Breaker (lVlCB)
The MCB'S shall be Single pole 250 Volt of current ratings as shown onthe drawings. These shall have fixed magnetic short circuit and fixedthermat overload protedions, The Single pole miniature circuit breakeEshall have a 6 kA short circuit breaking capacity as per Internationalstandard IEC 60157 Category P2.
The lvliniature Circuit Breakers shall be installed such that their switchinglevers are accessible through the front plate inside the Switch Boards foroperations. Circuit Numbers and Designation on all circuits shall beclearly marked to facilitate connection and maintenance. These CircuitBreakers shall be su:table for working on lighting and power circuits.
Push Buttong
Push buttons shall be momentary make break contact type (normallyopen/normally close). These shall be suitable for flush mounting orDistribution board, plastic lace plate etc. Push buttons shall haveround/souare head.
o.16600-31
Indicating Lamps
Indicating lamps shall be suitable for flush mounting, complete with base,either 230 Volt neon or '12 Volt incandescent lamp through auxiliarytransformer and shall have rosettes of suitable colour.
INSTALLATION
The location of distribution boards are shown diagrammatioally on thedrawings. The actual location shall be determined qt site, keening in viewthe site conditions and in coordination with other equipment.
Low Voltage distribution board for recessed mounting in wall shall beinstalled such that the.door shall finish flush with the surface of wall. Therecess mounted distribution board shall be installed before the plasteringof walls. The DB shall be protected to avoid any damage due to the civilwork.
All loose parts despatched separately with the DB shall be installed asper manufactureis instructions and all adjustments or setting shall bemade, as required. All screws, nuts and bolts used for fixing thedistribution board shall be galvanized. The distribution boards installationshall include connecting all incoming and outgoing cables. The cableentry in the boards shall be provided from top or bottom as required.
The distribution board body shall be connected to earlh as perinstructions given in section "Earthing" of these Specffications. Theswitchboard shal! be tested and commissioned in the oresence of theProject Manager. The LV distribution boards shall be tesied beforeenergizing as per instructions.contained in the article "Testing" ofGeneral Specifications for Electrical Works, Section-8001 of theseSpecifications.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
General
The Contractor's bid amount against each item of Bill of Quantities asgiven below shall Include design, fabrication, supply, installation, testing,commissioning and completion for all works specified herein and/or asshown on the Tender Drawing related to the item.
LV Distribution Board
6 .1
6.2
Measurement
Measurement shall be made for the number of eachtype/designation of LV distribution boards acceptably suppliedand installed by the Contractor as a completejob.
6.2.1
t6600-32
5.3. INSTALLATION
The location of DB as shown on the drawings is indicative and exact locationshall be determined at site in co- ordination with otherworks and other services.
6.2.2 Payment
Payment shall be made for the number of eachtype/designation of jobs measured, as provided above, at theContract unit price each for design, fabricating, supplying,installing, testing, and commissioning of the LV distributionboards, including fixing anangement and accessories forcomolete installation.
The surface mounted DB shall be installed by means of bolts on the mountingframe provided on the DB. The recessed mounted DB shall be installed beforeplastering of walls in a manner such that the door finishes flush with the surface.
All materials and accessories used for fixing of DB shall be of galvanized steel.Distribution board shall be as manufactured by approved Panel Manufacturer byThe Englneer.
16600-33
6.1
sEcT|oN - 16080 TELEPHONE SYSTEM
GENERAL
The work under this section includes all material and labor required for completeinstallation of the system as shown on Drawings and as contained in Bill ofOuantities.
This shall include the telephone exchange, telephone instruments, laying ofcondujt, outlet boxes, rosettes and telephone distribution boards and otherfacilities as required for completion of system. The Contractbr shall be required topull in 18 SWG galvanized steel wire wherever empty telephone conduits arerequired. The Contractor is to co-ordinate and comply with the requirements localTelegraph & Telephone Department in all respect.
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE (PABX)
The telephone exchange shall be electronic, with capacity stated on the drawingsandlor Bill of Ouanlilies.
The unit shall be equipped wjth an AC power supply for connection to a singlephase 230V, 5060 Hz supply. The unit shall include battery facilities comprisinglead storage batteries sufficient for 2 busy hours backup.
The batteries shall be of the sealed maintenance free type. The equipment shallbe from hanufucturer acceptable to local Telephone Department.
The PABX shall have the following features:
- Fully digital.
Dialing method shall be either DTIVIF or rotary.
Direct inward dialing.
Programmable features for direct outward calling, code dlaling etc.
All extensions shall have the following minimum features available:-
- Automatic call-back
- Abbreviated dialing- Callforwarding
-- Booking of outside line
- Call-parking and other requisite faciuties
16600-34
6.2
O
6.3
6.4
a
TELEPHONE SETS
Telephone sets shall have push button dial with auto recall facility. lt shall besupplied in approved color. Telephone rosette shall be furnished with each set.
TELEPHONE CABLES
Telephone cables shall be PVc insulated, PVC sheathed multipair 0.6mmdiameter tinned copper conductor conforming to lEC. publication 189. The PVCinsulation shall comply with BS 7646. The conductor shall be tinned solid highconductivity soft annealed copper complying with BS 6360. The insulation ofconductors shall be color coded as per above mentioned publications. TheContractor shall install approved cable ofthe Telephone Department.
CONDUITS & CONDUIT ACCESSORIES
The specification for conduils conduit accessories shall be same as contained insection conduits & pipes ofthese specifications. The telephone outlet boxes shallbe 63 mm x 63 mm deep made ot 16 SWG (1.63mm) sheet steel and providedwith earth terminal and 3mm white plasticfront plate.
TELEPHONE JUNCTION BOXES
This shall comprise 16 SWG (l.63mm) sheet steel box with hinged cover to befixed flushed with the wall, The copper terminal strips shall be installed oninsulated material sheet inside the sheet steel box and the number of terminalsshall be as contained in the Bill of Quantities.
INSTALLATION
All complete telephone system, i.e. telephone exchange, conduits, outlet boxes,telephone junction boxes etc., shall be installed in complete conformity with thedrawings, and recommendations details in relevant section of thesespecifications of equipment manufacturer.
ldentmcation marking shall be given on the free end of conduit both by color orsuitable approved tag.
6.7
o16600-35
7.'l
7.4
sEcTloN - 16090 EARTHING & LIGHTING PROTECTION
GENERAL,
The work under this section shalt include the earthing and lightning protection ofwhole building as described herein, in the drawing and upto the satisfaction ofengjneer.
EARTHING SYSTEM
Each and every electrical/mechanical equipment, computer accessories, outlet,lixture should be connected to earthing system. the earthing system should bemade by connecting all the earthing electrodes by copper conductor dia 35 mm 2or as shown on drawing, in such a way to from a ring.
Contractor has to ensure a min, earth resistance of 1.0 OHM by four rods type oftest with earth tester. lf difjiculty is faced in getting this value additional earthelectrodes be added into the ring. the drawing for lightening protection & earthingshowsi how the system should be made, but doesn't relive the contractor of hisresponslbility to provide a most effective & dependable system. Therefore thesystem should come from specialist manufacturers, names given in therecommended manufacturers list and should be designed specially for thisproject by the selecied manufacture at no extra cost. The earth for the computershall not be connected to the existing earthing system.
EARTHING CONDUCTOR
35 Sq.mm earth Conductors shall be laid and connecled to the A.C. ElectricCabinet for computer power as shown on drawing.
TEST POINTS
These points are fortesting of earthing systems. At these points hot work can beseparated and can be tested for continuity and resistance. Test points should bemade of brass and solidly flxed to wall at a height of 1.5 meter.
EARTH PITS
These should be made of pre cost concrete with a cover lid and should be placedover the electrode jn level with the finished ground level. The cover lid shouldhave ma*ing showing its number and written "Earth Electrode" in Urdu &English.
16600-36
o
o
7.7
HARDENED STEEL TIP
lt should be able to acceDt conductors oI 25 - 70hardened steel, length to be 135 mm.
EARTH CONNECTION POINT/PLATE
sq.mm dia. should be of
For Computer room a earth point should be provided consisting of electrolyticcopper type earth bar of dimensions as shown jn specific mesh and a separateearth rod. This plate is for connection to all the equipment in that particular room.
EARTHING MESH
lf required an earthing mesh is to be provided to connect earthing & lightprotection network as per drawing and instruction of consultant.
COPPER TAPE
7.8
7.,I0 CLAMP
7.,I1 LIGHTNINGARRESTOR
16600-3'7
o
sEcroN -'t6100 DIESEL GENERATOR
9.I A.C DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN ELECTRIC GENERATING SET AND ALLIEDEOUIPMENTS
Scope ofwork
The continue feeding electrical to light & AJC circuit of the rooms during mainfailure hours, an emergency diesel generation set with canopy shall be providedand installed at the place shown on the drawing. The installation shall becomplete with all necessary auxiliary equipments. Automatic change -over panel,control and protective gears, oil tanks, pumps and related piping, ducting andcabling to provide a complete operational system of emergency power supply.
Rating
b. I The diesel engine driven generating set shall have thefollowing rating and elect cal characteristics:
b. 1.1 Generating Capacity as indicated in the BOQb.1.2 Voltage 400 Voltsb.1.3 System 3 Phase 4wireb.1.4 Frequency 50 Hzb.1.5 Number of revolution per minute As per manufacture/s'specifications
Climate Conditions
c.1 The emergency djesel generating set shall be designed to withstand theclimatic conditions prevailing in Kharian / Sohawa throughout the yearand as such maximum ambient temperatures, maximum humidity andaltitude shall be considered for the design of his equipment.
Special Requirements
The emergency set shall be designed in such a way that the capacityshall be sufficient to give 10 % over load for one hour in any period oftwelve hours operation.
Operation Descriptione.'l The A.C. diesel engine driven electric generating set shall be arranged for
electric starting and for automatic mains failure operation. With the mainswithin limits, the set shall stay in stand-by position. 24(vii)-2
a).
b).
c).
d).
e).
d . 1
.'".
o16600-38
f).
It shall automatically start supply power to the load within approximately 0to 5 second of the complete cessation of mains supply failure on one ormore phases, or when the voltage is reduced by 20o/o ol nominal, andautomatically shut down the plant and re-transfer the load back to themains supply to stabiles before retransfer of the load takes place, andshall be adjustable overthe 1-10 minute range.
Aliernator Specifi cations
f.'l The alternator shall be continuously rated and fabricated steelconstruction. lt shall be A.C brushless type. The bearing shall be greaselubricated or roller bearings.The rotor shall consist of dynamirally balanced salient pole revolvingfield. The magnetic poles shall be equipped with damper windings. Thefield coils shall be able to withstand high centrifugal stresses withoutdeveloping any damage. Rotor insulation shall conform to Class-B.Ihe stator core shall be made form high laminated silicon steel andcarefully tightened to prevent occurence of magnetic vibrations. Thestator windings shall be provided insulation conforming to Class-F. Allwindjngs shall be fully impregnated for topical climates with h;gh qualityoil resistant varnish.The A.C exciter shall have permanent magnets in the field ensuringpositive voltage build-up. The rectification shall be affected by a suitablyrated silicon diode assembly over-hung to the shaft. The rotatingrectifier assembly shall be built to withstand vibration and centrifugalforces.The inherent characteristics of the alternator shall be such maintain theoutput voltage under all conditions of load, power factor and temperature,within the l imits of 2 % of nominal.The alternator shall have self-contained excitation system withtransistorized automatic voltage regulator. The automatic voltageregulator and control gear shall be mounted in a component box on theside of the machine using antivibration mounting. Electrical connectionsto the voltage regulator shall be taken through a multi-way plug andsocket.The alternator shall be screen protected and drip proof. lt shall haveef{icient cooling system centrifugal fans. lt shall be provided with a largeterminal box foroutgoing cable connections.The alternator shall be able to suppress radio or television interference inaccordance with BS 800.Line voltage waveform shall contain not morethan approximately 2% total harmonic contents. 24(vii)-3The temperature rise and performance shall comply with BSS 2613/1957.
Diesel Englne Specificalions
The engine shall be 6 cylinder, 4 stroke, direct injection, continuouslyrating as shown in lhe BOQ., water-cooled industrial diesel engine.The engine shalf withstand a 10olo overload for a period of t hour (in 12hours) in accordance with BS 649i1958).The engine driven pump shall circulated the luband fullflowfilters with reDlace-able shall be
1.2
f .3
t.4
f.6
f.8
t9
s)
9.1
9 .1
9.2
16600-39
pressure
o
9.3 An inline fuel injection pump and a diaphragm type lift pump with filterswith replaceable element and a fuel solenoid shall be provided.
9.4 Governing shall conform to class-A limits of BS 649/1958 and awoodward governor shall be provided.
h) Engine Instruments
h.1 The diesel engine shall be provided with the following instruments andmeters:
h.'1.'l Oil pressurc gauge.h.1.2 Water temperature gauge.h.'1.3 Engine hours run recorder.h.'1.4 Battery charging ammeter.h.1.5 RPM meter.
Engine Protectlon Equipments
i.'l Engine protection equipment shall be incorporated to shut downautomatically the set with a visual cum-audio alarm of the iollowingconditions:
i.1.1 Low lubricating oil pressure (Below a safe working value)i.1.2 High cooling water temperaturei.1.3 Engine over speed.i.1.4 With fuel oil level down engine protection system shall develop visual
cum-audio alarm.
Mechanlcal Coupling
j.1 The diesel engine and A.C brushless generator shall be coupled witheach other by means oI flexible coupling
i.2 The generator end shield and the engine flyrheel housing faces shall befully machined with spigots concentric to their shafts. A fabricated steelcoupling ring wlth both faces machined shall be flange mounted to thefl!4rheel housing and generator end shield by steel pipes.
i.3 A flexible coupling shall be fitted between the engine and generator toprovide the drive and shall be suitable to absorb the transmission ofshock loads.
i.4 The distortional flexibility shall be designed to match the distortionalcharacteristics ofthe slstem to prevent resonant conditions.
Mounting Degcription
k.1 The combined engine-generator unit witch canopy shall be bolted to aseparate sub-frame witch shall be attached to the main frame through'Resilient Mounting' so providing complete protection from the enginevibration to the controlgear, and other set mounted components.
k)
16600-40
l) Cooling System
t .1
1.4t.5
t.6
The diesel engine shall be water cooled. The cooling water shall becirculated by a centriiugal pump through a tropical duty radiator, cooledby a reverse flow fan.A fan cowl and hand protection guard shall be titted.A thermostat shall be pass the cciolant, until a pre- determined operatingtemperature is reached.An immersion heater shall be incorporated in the cooling system.In order to provide sufficient air flow along the radiator an air duct shall bemade form the radiator to the outside wall without any extra cost of the
The contractor shall provide all material and labor that id necessary toachieve this DurDose.
m) Starting System
m.1 The starting system shall consist of a heavy starter motor and starterswitch, a set of 24 volt heavy duty lead acid starting batteries ofadequate capacity, allaffanged for automatic electric starting.
m.2 The starter motor shall automatically disengage when the engine shallfire. There shall be three automatic starting attempts before the starting' batteries are disconnected, should the engine failto start due to shortageoffuel, etc.
m.3 Battery charging shall be affected by an engine driven generator,complete with regulator, whilst the set is running, and by means of amains operated tickle charging unit, when the set is at rest.
m.4 The batteries shall be housed in a cradle on the main base frame.
Control Gear and Meters
n.1 All diesel engine control gear, load change-over equipment and meteringshall be contained within a cubicle type of substantial gauge,
n.2 The front of the cubjcal shall be mounted with the followlng instrumentsand visual signals:One - AC voltmeter with selector switchOne - AC ammeterwith selector switchOne -WattmeterOne - Battery charge ammeter with charge switchOne - Power factor meter.One - Duty selector switch with position. Offautomatic test handOne - Manual start push button.(engine)One - BellOne - Low lubricating oil pressure fault indicating lampOne - Engine over speed indicating lampOne - Fuel oil level down indicating lampOne - Reverse power indicating lampOne -'Failto start' indic€ting lampOne - Altemator available' indicating lampOne - Alternator on load' indicating lampOne - 'Alternator on load' indicating lamp
nl
t6600-4r
t
n.J
One - Push button switches for closing and opening the mains contractorcase of manual controlOne - Push button switches for closing and opening the generatorcontractor case of manual controlOne - Push button switches for canceling visual signalsOne - Push button switches for testing the indicating lampsOne - Push button switches for mariual retransfer of load to mains
The following components and auxiliaries shall be arranged inside thecubic in first class engineering like manner and giving sufficient access formaintenance and replacement for purposes.One - Generator voltage relay with delayed contactsOne - Relay for mains/generafor changeover commandOne - Auxiliary contractor for manual retransfer of load to maimsOne - Auxiliary contractor for generator voltage monitoring and interlockingOne -Generator, suitably rated and complete with 3 low voltage HRCfuss, and delayed thermalover current relaysOne - Mains contractor, suitably rated and complete with 3 low voltageHRC fuses, and delayed thermal over current relays.The generator contactor shall be electrically and mechanically interlockwith the main contactor in sush a way that only one these contractorsshall close at one time. The wiring shall be made in such a way that themains contactor shall always have preference over the generatorcontactor. Only in case oftesting this preference shall be superseded.One - Triple pole adjustable magnetic overload unit which dashpot timedelay for generator overload protection.One - Set of current transformers for overload unit and instrumentation_
Exhauat
o.1 A large and efficient residential acoustic type silencer with a suitablelength offlanged flexible exhaust pipe shall be installed. The pipe shall beof suitable dimension to fit direct in the exhaust manifold to allow for thefree movement of the engine alternator and to give some isolation fromvibration to the sunounding fabric. The exhaust pipe shall be broughtoutside the building to suitable height.
Finish
All sheet steel used shall be zinc coated.The set shall be painted with good quality primer and finished witha high gloss paint, blue color.AccessorlesThe AC diesel engine driven electric generating set shall besupplied with the following accessories and manuals.One - kit of engine tools.One - Set of holding down bolts.Three - Set of installation drawings.Three - Set of circuit diagramThree - Set of engine maintenance book
ol
p)
p.1p.2
p.2p.2.1
p .2 .1 .1p .2 .1 .2p .2 .1 .3^ 2 1 4p.2.1.5
t6600-42
p.2.1.6p.2.1.7
Three - Set of soare oarts manual.Three - Set of generating set instruction manual.
q) Fuel Day Tank
q.1 The capacity of fuel day tank shall be suitable for the capacity of thegenerator as per the manufacture's recommendation mounted on aframework complete with cap and contents gauge. The tank shall bemanufactured from steel plate with welded seams.
q.2 The fuel day tank shall be complete wjth inlet and outlet connection.On/off cock and fully piped to the engine.
q.3 Provis,on shall be made to collect fuel leaking. Drain pipe with valve foremptying the tank for cleaning purpose shall also be provided.
Fuel Pump
r.'1.1 A fuel pump shall be provided with a capacity suitable with the capacity ofthe generator as specified in the BOQ. The pump shall gear lype andconnected to a meter through a flexible coupling.
r.1.2 Thepumpand metershall be mounted on a forged steel foundation plate.r.1.3 The pump shall be supplied with necessary valve, pressure relief valve
and pressure gauge.Fuel Storage TankA fuel storage tank with a capacity suitable for 3 days (underground) shallbe provided outside. The tank shall be complete with fill pipe wjthconnection and vent pipe with cap.
r)
o
r.2.2 The tank shall be provlded with two provided with two manholes.r.2.3 Complete 20 mm diameter piping in first class engineering like manner
shall be of furnished between this tank and fuel day tank inside thebuilding, The overflow pipe going back from fuel day tank to the storagetank shall be of 50mm diameter.
r.2.4 In order to control the pump, level switches shall be furnished mounted onthe fuel day tank and connected to the control cubicle.
5.2 INSTALLATION OF A.C. DIESEL GENERATING SET
9.21 The contractor shall provide all labor and rnaterial under for complete andoperational installation, testing and commission of the emergency power supplyunit. Before commencing the physical installation, the contractor submitsmanufacturer drawings and installation for foundation shall be prepared by thecivil contractor. Electric contractor shall supply and install the foundation boltslantivibration material and another foundation material to be embedded in cementconcrete foundations.
9.22 After the cement concrete foundations are constructed and cured, the emergpower supply unit shall be installed with canopy and mechanical alignment andleveling shall be strictly in accordance with manufacture/s installations. All thesystern component parts, sub-assemblies are described in earlier articles shallbe installed in first class engineering like manner. All wiring material, fixingaccessories etc., shall be orovided without additional cost.
/516600-43
I
I
Affer having installed and connected all the system components parts and sub-assemblies in accordance with the above specifications, as site test shall bemade to connivance the engjneer for the proper functioning of the system. lf thesufficient load for testing shall not be available, then contractor shall furnish adummy load forthe maximum load test.
o
+ -'l llir
o16600-44
t
1 .
sEcTroN - 161,t0 WATER PUMPS
SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be done under this section of the specifications includes furniihingall plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing alloperations required in connection with the installation of pumping machineryincluding ail accessories as specified herein or shown.on the Drawings or asdirected by the Project l\4anager.
MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
Materials and machinery shall conform to the latesl referenced specifications andother provisions specified herein and shall be new and unused, In case wheremanufacturers are specifled, materjal and equipment will be of the samemanufacturers. In all other cases the Contractor shall submit the names andaddresses ofthe Manufacturers and trade names of the materials and eouiomentthat he intends to buy. Other information such as diagram, drawing anddescriptive data will be supplied if so desired by the Project Manager. Approval ofmatedals and all the machjnery under thjs provjsjon shall not be construed asauthorlsing any deviations from the sp6cifications. The approval of machinery ofmanufacturer other than specified will be purely on the discretion of the Projectlvlanager. The Project Manager will fully ascertain the facts and satisfy himself asto the performance ol the machinery offered by the Contractor.
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS OF PUMPS
The Contra.,tor shall fumish with each pump propedy identified characteristiccurves prepared and certified by the manufacturer showing capacity, head,efficiency and brake horsepower throughout the entire range ofthe pump.
The pumps shall stable throttling curves and be suitable for unrestricted paralleloperation. The pumps and their drives shall not overload or trip when operatingagainst zero pressure.
The deslgn, constfuction and materials shall be such that damage as a result ofcavitation is completely eliminated.
Pumps shall have bearings and be suitable for continuous as well asoperation without external seating or cooling water.
The pumps shall be such thal they shall come into operation at once after aprolonged shutdown period without having to take special measures,
Pumps shall be capable of delivering specified quantity of water at the specifiedpressure. Pumps shall be tested at site before theirfinal acceptance.
Pumps shall be installed at positions shown on the Drawings and/or as directedthe Project Manager
o.r6600-45
Pumps and their drives shall be in perfect alignment when installed in position.
4. PUMP AND MOTOR
4.1 POTABLE WATER PUMP & I\,4OTOR
impellerSNATI
4.'1.4 Specifications
The pump sets will consist of close coupled, horizontal; centrifugalpumps of specified capacity and head and duty and shall behorizontally mounted, totally enclosed, fan cooled, squirrel cageinduction motors of specified power.
Pump material shall be as under:
Body Fine grained grey cast iron.BronzeBronze or strainless steel
Pumps shall have mechanical seal. The suction and dischargeflanges shall be rated for a working pressure of 10 kg/cm' forpotable water pumps. The flanges shall be drilled to BS 19 (Table'D' or'E') or BS 4504.
Motors shall run on 3-phase,motors ghall be protectedoverheating and phase failure.
4.'1.5 Installatidn
400 volts + 10%, 50 cis l'lc powerirom low voltage, overload, and
installed on concretePotable water pumps and motors shall befoundation with anchor bolts.
4.1.6 Operation
For potable water pumps, one pump shall be duty and one shallbe standby. Duty shall however change between the pumps oneach starystop/cycle of the pump.
Operation of potable water pumps shall be controlled by waterlevel indicators provided on the rooftank ofthe building.
- Duty pumps shall automatically start, when the water level. reaches the low water level-1 (L.W.L-1)
- Duty pumps shall automatically stop when the water levelreaches high water level (H.W.L).
a16600-46
In case the duty pump fails to start, the stand by pump shallstart automatically at lowest water level-2 (L.W.L.-2).
In case the stand by pump also fails to start, the emergencyalarm will be automatically sounded.
ACCESSORIES
5.1 Pressure Gauge
Pressure gauge shall be of copper alloy, bourdon tube type with 100 mmdiameter dial face. The dial shall be engraved in black on whitebackground from zero to 6 bars or 1.5 times the working pressurewhichever is larger. Gauge shall be installed socket welded to the pipelinewith the isolating plug/ball valve. Gauge shall be installed no higher than'1.8 l\y' above the finished floor. lf the pipeline installation is such that theabove requirement can not be met pressure gauge of remote readingtype shall be installed.
Y-StrainersStrainers shall be 'Y' types with bronze body and threaded ends upto75mm diameter Screen shall be of 20 mesh monel.Strainers above 75 mm shall have Cast lron body with flanged ends:Screen Cover shall be provided with blow off tapping. Screen shall be ofperforated stainless steel.
36 holes per Sq.Cm., with 1.14 mm diameter and 0.5 mm thick. Allstrainers for water supply application shall be suitable fo. 10.5k9/Crn2and 120 degree C. All strainers for fire protection service shall be suitablefor 21 Kg/Cm2 and 120 degree C.
Foot Valve for Pumps
Shall be installed on the suction Line of the pumps where required orindicated on the drawing. Foot valve shall be of brass, and shall beprovided with integral strainer. Foot valve shall be provided with a springloaded vertical check disc with gasket for tight shuloff.
MOTOR PROTECTION
Motors of 3kw or less power shall be started direct on line. Larger motors shall bestarted by Star-Delta Starter.
lvlotor shall be protected against under voltage over voltage overload, over-heating and phase failure.
Motor ghall be rated for normal operation against a voltage fluctuation of + 10%and frequency fluctuation +2H2.
5.2
5 .4
7.
o16600-4',1
7.
8.
MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
Refer to relevant electrical specifications and drawings.
MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND TOOLS
8.'1 A book or books containing the complete information in connection withthe assembly operation, lubrication, adjustment and repair of the pumpingequipment, electric motor, together with the detailed parts list with thedrawings or photographs shall be furnished in duplicate.
8.2 For the pumping station, special tools necessari/ for maintenance andrepair of the pumps and electric motors including tools kits, grease gunsetc. with accessories shall be furnished.
8.3 The equipment to be supplied for the pumping station shall be providedwith spare parts necessary to the operationaland maintenance for'1 year.
The manufacturer's recommended list of spare parts to be stocked by theAuthority shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager forapproval. Such spare parts will also be furnished by the Contractor.
Allthe maintenance manuals, tools, spare parts etc., shall be supplied bythe Contractor at no cost of the Authority and all cost shall be deemedincluded by the Contractor in his bid against item of pumping set.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
9.1 Pumping Machinery
9.1.3 Measurement
l\,4easurement for payment of pumping machinery shall be theactual nunber of pumping sets acceptable provided and installedin positioni the Contractor's bid against this item shall include costof providing and installing the pumping machinery, including thepumps, electric motors, all accesgories, manuals, tools, spareparts, etc. as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, or inBOQ or as directed by the Project Manager.
9.'1.4 Payment
Payment for pumping machine shall be made at the applicableunit rate per pumping set bid in the Bill of Quantities. The amountbid shall be full payment for the work specified.
8.4
8.5
16600-48